Krone Big M 420 Operating Instructions


Add to my manuals
460 Pages

advertisement

Krone Big M 420 Operating Instructions | Manualzz

Self-propelled High-Performance

Mower-Conditioner

Big M 400

( from serial no.

: 784 442)

Order no.

: 150 000 130 0 en

16.02.2010

Table of Contents

Pos: 1 /BA/Konformitätserklärungen/Selbstfahrer/Neu ab 2010/BiG M 420 @ 49\mod_1287034020468_78.doc @ 464363

CV0

EC Declaration of Conformity

We

Maschinenfabrik Bernard Krone GmbH

Heinrich-Krone-Str. 10, D-48480 Spelle hereby declare as manufacturer of the product named below, on our sole responsibility, that the

Machine: Self-Propelled High-Performance Mower-Conditioner

Type/types:

BiG M 420 CV, BiG M 420 CRI to which this declaration refers is in compliance with the relevant provisions of

EC Directive 2006/42/EC (Machinery) and EC Directive 2004/108/EC (EMC)

The signing Managing Director is authorised to compile the technical documents.

Spelle, 01.11.10

Dr.-Ing. Josef Horstmann

(Managing Director, Design and Development)

Year of manufacture: Machine No.:

Pos: 2 /BA/Vorwort/Sehr geehrter Kunde @ 0\mod_1195626300326_78.doc @ 905

Dear customer,

Dear customer,

You have now received the operating instructions for the KRONE product which you have purchased.

These operating instructions contain important information for the proper use and safe operation of the machine.

If these operating instructions should become wholly or partially unusable, you can obtain replacement operating instructions for your machine by stating the number given overleaf.

Pos: 3 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

2

Table of Contents

Pos: 4 /BA/Inhaltsverzeichnis @ 0\mod_1196861555655_78.doc @ 15165

1 Table of Contents

1   Table of Contents ................................................................................................................................... 3  

2   Foreword ............................................................................................................................................... 16  

3   Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 17  

3.1

  Validity ............................................................................................................................................. 17  

3.2

  Identification Plate ........................................................................................................................... 17  

3.3

  Information Required for Questions and Orders .............................................................................. 18  

3.4

  Intended Use ................................................................................................................................... 18  

3.5

  Machine overview ............................................................................................................................ 19  

3.6

  Technical data ................................................................................................................................. 20  

3.6.1

  Technical Data / Vehicle .............................................................................................................. 20  

3.6.2

  Technical data / CV mowing unit ................................................................................................. 21  

3.6.3

  Technical data / CRI mowing unit ................................................................................................ 21  

4   Safety ..................................................................................................................................................... 22  

4.1

  Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 22  

4.2

  Identification of the hazard warnings ............................................................................................... 22  

4.2.1

  Re-Ordering the Adhesive Safety and Information Labels .......................................................... 23  

4.2.2

  Affixing the Adhesive Safety and Information Labels .................................................................. 23  

4.2.3

  Contact ......................................................................................................................................... 23  

4.3

  Position of the Adhesive Safety Stickers on the Machine ............................................................... 24  

4.3.1

  Basic machine „front -/ rear view“ ................................................................................................ 24  

4.3.2

  Basic machine „left and right side hand of machine” ................................................................... 26  

4.3.3

  Lateral mowing unit left / right ...................................................................................................... 28  

4.3.4

  Front mowing unit ........................................................................................................................ 30  

4.4

  Position of the General Information Labels on the Machine ............................................................ 32  

4.4.1

  Basic machine „front -/ rear view“ ................................................................................................ 32  

4.4.2

  Basic machine „left and right side hand of machine” ................................................................... 34  

4.4.3

  Lateral mowing unit left / right ...................................................................................................... 36  

4.4.4

  Front mowing unit ........................................................................................................................ 38  

4.5

  Identifying Symbols in the Operating Instructions ........................................................................... 40  

4.6

  Identification of the hazard warnings ............................................................................................... 40  

4.6.1

  Personnel Qualification and Training Fehler! Textmarke nicht definiert. ..................................... 41  

4.6.2

  Dangers in Case of Non-compliance with the Safety Instructions............................................... 41  

4.6.3

  Safety-conscious work practices ................................................................................................. 41  

4.7

  Safety Instructions and Accident Prevention Regulations ............................................................... 42  

4.8

  Conveying persons, guides, operating personnel ........................................................................... 43  

4.9

  Self-propelled working machine ...................................................................................................... 43  

4.10

  Autopilot ........................................................................................................................................... 44  

4.11

  Implements ...................................................................................................................................... 45  

3

Table of Contents

4.12

  Hydraulic system ............................................................................................................................. 45  

4.13

  Battery .............................................................................................................................................. 46  

4.14

  Cooling system ................................................................................................................................ 46  

4.15

  Tyres ................................................................................................................................................ 46  

4.16

  Emergency exit ................................................................................................................................ 46  

4.17

  Working in the vicinity of power transmission lines ......................................................................... 47  

4.18

  Fire preventions ............................................................................................................................... 47  

4.19

  Maintenance .................................................................................................................................... 48  

4.20

  Telephone and radio sets ................................................................................................................ 48  

4.20.1

  Wheel chocks........................................................................................................................... 48  

4.20.2

  Main battery switch .................................................................................................................. 49  

5   Cabin ...................................................................................................................................................... 51  

5.1

  Ladder to driver's cabin ................................................................................................................... 51  

5.2

  Opening the cabin door ................................................................................................................... 52  

5.3

  Operators controls ........................................................................................................................... 53  

5.3.1

  Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 53  

5.4

  Air comfort seat ................................................................................................................................ 54  

5.4.1

  Setting the left armrest ................................................................................................................. 56  

5.4.2

  Right armrest ............................................................................................................................... 56  

5.4.3

  Drawer for first-aid kit/operating instructions ............................................................................... 57  

5.5

  Guide's seat ..................................................................................................................................... 58  

5.5.1

  Cooler .......................................................................................................................................... 58  

5.5.2

  Emergency Exit ............................................................................................................................ 59  

5.5.3

  OBD Diagnostics Plug (On-Board Plug) ...................................................................................... 60  

5.6

  Steering Column and Foot Pedals ................................................................................................... 61  

5.6.1

  Steering Column Adjustment ....................................................................................................... 62  

5.6.2

  Horn ............................................................................................................................................. 63  

5.6.3

  Indicator Switches ........................................................................................................................ 63  

5.6.4

  Full Beam ..................................................................................................................................... 64  

5.6.5

  Headlamp Flasher ....................................................................................................................... 64  

5.6.6

  Using the operating brake ............................................................................................................ 65  

5.7

  Roof Panel Switch Group ................................................................................................................ 66  

5.8

  Lighting ............................................................................................................................................ 67  

5.8.1

  Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 67  

5.8.2

  Indicator, hazard warning flasher and brake light ........................................................................ 68  

5.8.2.1

  Switching on the indicator .................................................................................................... 68  

5.8.2.2

  Brake light ............................................................................................................................ 68  

5.8.2.3

  Switching on the hazard warning flasher ............................................................................. 68  

5.8.3

  Side light/dipped beam ................................................................................................................ 69  

5.8.3.1

  Switching on the parking light .............................................................................................. 69  

4

Table of Contents

5.8.3.2

  Switching on the dipped beam ............................................................................................. 69  

5.8.4

  Working floodlights ...................................................................................................................... 70  

5.8.4.1

  Working floodlights "down the side and at the right/left mowing units" ............................... 71  

5.8.4.2

  Working floodlights Cab ....................................................................................................... 71  

5.8.4.3

  Working floodlight Bottom front ............................................................................................ 72  

5.8.4.4

  Working floodlight rear ......................................................................................................... 72  

5.8.5

  Allround lights (optional) .............................................................................................................. 73  

5.8.6

  Interior Lighting / Spotlight ........................................................................................................... 74  

5.9

  Outside mirrors ................................................................................................................................ 75  

5.9.1

  Left Outside Mirror ....................................................................................................................... 75  

5.9.2

  Right outside mirror and anti-collision mirror ............................................................................... 76  

5.9.2.1

  Setting the right outside mirror ............................................................................................. 76  

5.9.2.2

  Setting the anti-collision mirror ............................................................................................ 76  

5.10

  Inside mirror ..................................................................................................................................... 77  

5.11

  Sun blind .......................................................................................................................................... 77  

5.12

  Windshield wipers ............................................................................................................................ 78  

5.13

  Washer system – windshield ........................................................................................................... 78  

5.14

  Switch panel .................................................................................................................................... 79  

5.15

  Panel Switches and Pilot Lamps ..................................................................................................... 80  

5.15.1

  Actuating release switches ...................................................................................................... 81  

5.15.2

  Release switch – road/field ...................................................................................................... 82  

5.15.3

  Autopilot release switch / - optional ......................................................................................... 83  

5.15.4

  Release switch - holding brake ................................................................................................ 84  

5.15.5

  Release switch travelling gear ................................................................................................. 85  

5.15.6

  Axle separation key ................................................................................................................. 86  

5.15.7

  Engine Failure Pilot Lamp ........................................................................................................ 87  

5.15.8

  Charge Indicator Lamp ............................................................................................................ 87  

5.15.9

  Pilot Lamp for Cooling Water ................................................................................................... 87  

5.15.10

  Ignition lock .............................................................................................................................. 88  

5.15.11

  Cigarette lighter / 12-V socket ................................................................................................. 89  

5.15.12

  Diagnostics Socket / USB Connection .................................................................................... 90  

5.16

  Multi-Function Lever ........................................................................................................................ 92  

5.16.1

  In Field Mode Only ................................................................................................................... 92  

5.16.2

  Multi-Function Lever (Continued) ............................................................................................ 94  

5.16.2.1

  Driving .............................................................................................................................. 94  

5.17

  Klimatronik / heating ........................................................................................................................ 95  

5.17.1

  Control and display elements .................................................................................................. 95  

5.17.2

  Operation ................................................................................................................................. 97  

5.17.3

  Switching on the System ......................................................................................................... 97  

5.17.4

  Setting the Desired Cab Temperature ..................................................................................... 97  

5

Table of Contents

5.17.5

  Switch air conditioning On / Off ............................................................................................... 98  

5.17.6

  Switch REHEAT mode On / Off ............................................................................................... 99  

5.17.7

  Manual setting of evaporator fan speed ................................................................................ 100  

5.17.8

  Switching the Temperature Display to ° Fahrenheit .............................................................. 101  

5.17.9

  Showing Faults in the Display ................................................................................................ 101  

5.18

  Adjustable Fan Nozzles ................................................................................................................. 103  

5.19

  Radio .............................................................................................................................................. 104  

6   Info centre "EasyTouch" ................................................................................................................... 106  

6.1.1

  Overview .................................................................................................................................... 106  

6.2

  Information Section ........................................................................................................................ 108  

6.2.1

  Status line (I) .............................................................................................................................. 109  

6.2.2

  Motor Data (II) Information Section ........................................................................................... 110  

6.2.3

  Information section of the travelling gear data (III) .................................................................... 111  

6.2.4

  Information section of settings (IV and V) .................................................................................. 112  

6.2.5

  Drive data information section (VI) ............................................................................................ 112  

6.3

  Quick Access Keys in the Basic Screen ........................................................................................ 113  

6.3.1

  Quick access "Hydraulically adjustable cutting height" (optional) ............................................. 113  

6.3.2

  Quick access "Hydraulically adjustable lateral spring compensation" (ground pressure) (optional)

115  

6.3.3

  Quick access "Customer Data Counter" .................................................................................... 117  

6.3.4

  Changing a customer record (1) or creating a new one ............................................................ 118  

6.3.4.1

  Switching the counter on or off .......................................................................................... 119  

6.3.4.2

  Delete customer counter .................................................................................................... 120  

6.3.5

  Quick access "Hydraulic axle suspension" ................................................................................ 121  

6.3.5.1

  From the "Road travel" basic screen ................................................................................. 121  

6.3.5.2

  From the "Field mode" basic screen .................................................................................. 122  

6.3.6

  Quick access "Machine settings" ............................................................................................... 123  

6.4

  Menu Level .................................................................................................................................... 124  

6.4.1

  Short overview ........................................................................................................................... 124  

6.4.2

  Bringing up a Menu Level .......................................................................................................... 125  

6.5

  Main Menu 1 "Settings" ................................................................................................................. 126  

6.6

  Menu 1-1 "Parameters" ................................................................................................................. 127  

6.6.1

  Entering parameters .................................................................................................................. 128  

6.7

  Menu 1-2 "Machine setting" ........................................................................................................... 129  

6.7.1

  Menu 1-3 "Units" ........................................................................................................................ 133  

6.7.2

  Menu 1-4 "Language" ................................................................................................................ 134  

6.7.3

  Menu 1-5 "Display" .................................................................................................................... 135  

6.7.4

  Menu 1-5-1 "Contrast" ............................................................................................................... 136  

6.7.5

  Menu 1-5-2 Beeper .................................................................................................................... 137  

6.7.6

  Beeper limited by time ............................................................................................................... 138  

6

Table of Contents

6.7.7

  Menu 1-5-4 Direction of Rotation ............................................................................................... 139  

6.7.8

  Menu 1-6 Date/time ................................................................................................................... 140  

6.8

  Main Menu 2 Counters .................................................................................................................. 141  

6.8.1

  Machine Data Counter ............................................................................................................... 141  

6.8.1.1

  Deleting the Machine Data Counters (Sets 1 to 3) ........................................................... 142  

6.8.2

  Switching to Customer Data Counters ...................................................................................... 142  

6.9

  Main Menu 3 Maintenance ............................................................................................................ 143  

6.9.1

  Menu 3-1 "Calibration of cutting height" .................................................................................... 144  

6.9.2

  Menu 3-4 „Manual mode“ .......................................................................................................... 147  

6.9.3

  Status display of general sensors (2) ........................................................................................ 149  

6.10

  Main Menu 4 Service ..................................................................................................................... 150  

6.10.1

  Menu 4-1 Diagnostics ............................................................................................................ 151  

6.10.2

  Display of Release Conditions Not Met for Diagnostics ........................................................ 152  

6.10.3

  Display of possible faults for diagnostics ............................................................................... 153  

6.10.4

  Menu 4-1-1 Diagnostics of axle suspension .......................................................................... 154  

6.10.5

  Menu 4-1-3 Diagnostics of spring compensation .................................................................. 157  

6.10.6

  Menu 4-1-4 Diagnostics of cutting height .............................................................................. 163  

6.10.7

  Menu 4-1-5 Diagnostics of hydraulic auger hood (optional) .................................................. 171  

6.10.8

  Menu 4-1-6 Sideshift diagnostics (optional) .......................................................................... 177  

6.10.9

  Menu 4-1-7 Diagnostics front guard flaps (optional) ............................................................. 182  

6.10.10

  Menu 4-1-10 Diagnostics Work ............................................................................................. 187  

6.10.11

  Menu 4-1-11 CAN bus ........................................................................................................... 198  

6.10.12

  Menu 4-1-12 Travelling gear .................................................................................................. 199  

6.10.13

  Menu 4-1-13 Electronics ........................................................................................................ 210  

6.10.14

  Menu 4-1-14 Diesel Engine ................................................................................................... 211  

6.10.15

  Menu 4-1-15 Joystick ............................................................................................................. 214  

6.10.16

  Menu 4-1-16 Control unit console ......................................................................................... 216  

6.10.17

  Menu 4-1-17 Display .............................................................................................................. 218  

6.11

  Menu 4-2 Error list ......................................................................................................................... 219  

6.12

  Menu 4-3 "Service level" ................................................................................................................ 224  

6.13

  Menu 4-4 Information ..................................................................................................................... 225  

6.13.1

  Menu 4-4-1 Joystick ............................................................................................................... 226  

6.13.2

  Menu 4-4-2 Software ............................................................................................................. 227  

6.13.3

  Menu 4-4-3 Machine .............................................................................................................. 229  

6.14

  Menu 5 Basic Screen ..................................................................................................................... 230  

6.14.1

  Error Messages ..................................................................................................................... 231  

6.14.2

  Information message ............................................................................................................. 232  

7   Commissioning................................................................................................................................... 233  

7.1

  Fitting the guard cloths .................................................................................................................. 233  

7.2

  Folding Down Lateral Mowing Units .............................................................................................. 233  

7

Table of Contents

7.2.1

  Description of Installation ........................................................................................................... 235  

7.2.2

  Guard cloths (CRI with upper roller drive) ................................................................................. 236  

7.2.3

  Adjusting the Warning Panel ..................................................................................................... 237  

7.3

  Installation of Cutter Blades ........................................................................................................... 237  

8   Start-up ................................................................................................................................................ 238  

8.1

  Check before Start-up .................................................................................................................... 238  

8.2

  Daily checks ................................................................................................................................... 238  

8.2.1

  On the Basic Machine ................................................................................................................ 239  

8.2.2

  On the mowing units .................................................................................................................. 239  

9   Driving and Transport ........................................................................................................................ 240  

9.1

  Transport / Road Travel ................................................................................................................. 240  

9.2

  Preparation for transport/road travel .............................................................................................. 241  

9.2.1

  Folding Up the Guards ............................................................................................................... 241  

9.2.2

  Moving the Front Mowing Unit To Central Position (with Sideshift Option) ............................... 242  

9.2.3

  Check lock ................................................................................................................................. 243  

9.2.4

  Disable the shut-off valve on the front outrigger ........................................................................ 244  

9.2.5

  Release switch – road/field ........................................................................................................ 244  

9.2.6

  Release switch travelling gear ................................................................................................... 245  

9.3

  Starting the engine ......................................................................................................................... 246  

9.3.1

  Killing the engine ....................................................................................................................... 248  

9.3.2

  Starting with an Auxiliary Battery ............................................................................................... 248  

9.4

  Starting to Drive ............................................................................................................................. 248  

9.4.1

  Setting the Acceleration Behaviour ........................................................................................... 249  

9.4.2

  General on Driving ..................................................................................................................... 249  

9.4.3

  Preventing an overheating of the hydrostatic system ................................................................ 250  

9.4.4

  Driving Forwards ........................................................................................................................ 251  

9.4.5

  Reversing ................................................................................................................................... 252  

9.5

  Cruise Control ................................................................................................................................ 253  

9.5.1

  Saving the Speed for Cruise Control Mode ............................................................................... 253  

9.5.2

  Activating Cruise Control ........................................................................................................... 254  

9.5.3

  Deactivating Cruise Control ....................................................................................................... 254  

9.6

  Stopping ......................................................................................................................................... 255  

9.6.1

  Stopping with the Multi-Function Lever ..................................................................................... 255  

9.6.2

  Stopping with Foot Brakes ......................................................................................................... 256  

9.7

  Parking Brake ................................................................................................................................ 257  

9.8

  Switch off the engine ..................................................................................................................... 258  

9.9

  Switch off the machine ................................................................................................................... 258  

9.10

  Towing ........................................................................................................................................... 259  

9.10.1

  Releasing the holding brake manually ................................................................................... 259  

10   Operation – Mowing Units ................................................................................................................. 260  

8

Table of Contents

10.1

  Intended Use ................................................................................................................................. 260  

10.2

  Operation of Mowing Units ............................................................................................................ 261  

10.3

  Folding Down the Mowing Units .................................................................................................... 262  

10.3.1

  Lowering All Mowing Units from Transport Position to Headland Position ........................... 263  

10.3.2

  Lowering All Mowing Units from Headland Position to Working Position .............................. 263  

10.3.3

  Lowering the Lateral Mowing Units from Transport Position to Headland Position .............. 264  

10.3.4

  Lowering the Lateral Mowing Units from Headland Position to Working Position ................. 264  

10.3.5

  Lowering the Front Mowing Unit from Transport Position to Headland Position ................... 265  

10.3.6

  Lowering the Front Mowing Unit from Headland Position to Working Position ..................... 265  

10.4

  Mowing Unit Drive .......................................................................................................................... 266  

10.4.1

  Switching the Mowing Unit Drives On and Off ....................................................................... 267  

10.4.2

  Switching the Left Mowing Unit Drive On/Off ........................................................................ 267  

10.4.3

  Switching the Right Mowing Unit Drive On/Off ...................................................................... 268  

10.4.4

  Switching the Front Mowing Unit Drive On/Off ...................................................................... 269  

10.4.5

  Switching All Mowing Unit Drives On/Off ............................................................................... 270  

10.5

  Folding up the Mowing Units ......................................................................................................... 271  

10.5.1

  Checking the Lock on the Lateral Mowing Units ................................................................... 272  

10.5.2

  Lifting All Mowing Units from Working Position to Headland Position ................................... 273  

10.5.3

  Folding All Mowing Units from Headland Position to Transport Position .............................. 273  

10.5.4

  Lifting the Lateral Mowing Units from Working Position to Headland Position ...................... 274  

10.5.5

  Folding the Lateral Mowing Units from Headland Position to Transport Position ................. 274  

10.5.6

  Check lock ............................................................................................................................. 275  

10.5.7

  Lifting the Front Mowing Unit from Working Position to Headland Position .......................... 276  

10.5.8

  Lifting the Front Mowing Unit from Working Position to Headland Position .......................... 276  

10.6

  Folding the Front Mowing Unit from Headland Position to Transport Position .............................. 277  

10.7

  Mowing ........................................................................................................................................... 278  

10.8

  Game animal protection ................................................................................................................. 279  

10.8.1

  Moving the guards into the working position ......................................................................... 281  

10.8.2

  Mowing with Individual Mowing Units .................................................................................... 281  

10.8.3

  Quick Stop ............................................................................................................................. 282  

10.8.4

  Fast Direction Change (Fast Reversing) ............................................................................... 282  

10.8.5

  Switching Axle Separation On and Off .................................................................................. 283  

11   Adjusting the mowing units .............................................................................................................. 284  

11.1

  Special Safety Instructions ............................................................................................................ 284  

11.2

  Adjusting the cutting height ............................................................................................................ 285  

11.2.1

  Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................. 285  

11.2.2

  Adjusting the Lifting Height .................................................................................................... 286  

11.2.2.1

  Front mowing unit .......................................................................................................... 286  

11.2.3

  Adjusting the cutting height .................................................................................................... 287  

11.2.3.1

  Lateral Mowing Unit ....................................................................................................... 287  

9

Table of Contents

11.3

  Adjusting the Compensation Springs ............................................................................................ 289  

11.3.1

  Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................. 290  

11.3.2

  Lateral Mowing Unit ............................................................................................................... 291  

11.4

  Adjusting the Tedder Speed .......................................................................................................... 292  

11.4.1

  Lateral Mowing Unit ............................................................................................................... 292  

11.4.2

  Front mowing unit (CV) .......................................................................................................... 293  

11.5

  Adjusting the conditioner plate ...................................................................................................... 294  

11.6

  Adjusting the roller conditioner (optional extra/Big M CRI) ............................................................ 295  

11.6.1

  Adjusting the roller distance ................................................................................................... 295  

11.6.2

  Adjusting the roller pressure .................................................................................................. 296  

11.7

  Setting of the Scraper on the Cross Conveyor (Optional) ............................................................. 297  

11.8

  Adjusting the swath width .............................................................................................................. 298  

11.8.1

  Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................. 298  

11.8.2

  Lateral Mowing Unit ............................................................................................................... 299  

11.9

  Adjusting the track control arm on the lateral mowing units .......................................................... 300  

11.10

  Deflector Plates ......................................................................................................................... 300  

11.10.1

  Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................. 300  

11.11

  Deactivating the axle suspension .............................................................................................. 301  

12   Special Equipment – Mowing Units .................................................................................................. 302  

12.1

  Converting the Tedder Deflector Plate to an Auger-Type Cross Conveyor .................................. 302  

12.1.1

  Removing the tedder deflector plate ...................................................................................... 303  

12.1.2

  Releasing the tension jacks ................................................................................................... 303  

12.1.3

  Removing the tedder deflector plate ...................................................................................... 304  

12.1.4

  Checking the Tines ................................................................................................................ 305  

12.1.5

  Removing the guard .............................................................................................................. 305  

12.1.6

  Installing the auger-type cross conveyor ............................................................................... 306  

12.1.7

  Locking the tension jacks ....................................................................................................... 307  

12.2

  Tensioning the V-belts ................................................................................................................... 307  

12.2.1

  Installing the guard ................................................................................................................ 308  

12.2.2

  Connecting the speed sensor ................................................................................................ 308  

12.2.3

  Removing the floor plates ...................................................................................................... 309  

12.2.4

  Relaying the Lubrication Lines............................................................................................... 311  

12.2.5

  Installation Instructions – Bulge Bags for Big M 400 with BSS ............................................. 312  

12.2.6

  Switching on the auger monitoring mode .............................................................................. 313  

12.2.7

  Converting an Auger-Type Cross Conveyor to a "Tedder deflector plate unit" ..................... 315  

12.3

  Additional Equipment – Mulching Device ...................................................................................... 316  

12.4

  Removing Mowing Units ................................................................................................................ 317  

12.4.1

  Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................. 317  

12.4.2

  Removing of the compensation springs ................................................................................ 318  

12.4.3

  To remove the PTO shaft: ..................................................................................................... 319  

10

Table of Contents

12.4.4

  Removing the Weiste Triangle............................................................................................... 321  

12.4.5

  Attaching the Front Mowing Unit ........................................................................................... 323  

12.4.6

  Removing the Side Mowing Unit............................................................................................ 324  

12.4.7

  Attaching the Lateral Mowing Unit ......................................................................................... 331  

12.4.8

  The remainder of the installation is in reverse order to the removal procedure. ................... 333  

13   Maintenance – Engine ........................................................................................................................ 334  

13.1.1

  Overview of motor .................................................................................................................. 334  

13.2

  Overview of maintenance (MAN) excerpt ...................................................................................... 334  

13.3

  Maintenance Table – Engine ......................................................................................................... 336  

13.4

  Contamination in the engine compartment .................................................................................... 338  

13.5

  Cleaning the Engine Compartment with Compressed Air ............................................................. 338  

13.6

  Engine oil level ............................................................................................................................... 339  

13.6.1

  Engine oil and filter replacement ........................................................................................... 339  

13.7

  Fuel filter/water separator .............................................................................................................. 340  

13.7.1

  Replacing the fuel filter .......................................................................................................... 340  

13.7.2

  Empty the water separator ..................................................................................................... 340  

13.8

  Replacing the fuel filter insert ........................................................................................................ 341  

13.8.1

  Replacing the filter in the hand pump .................................................................................... 342  

13.9

  Replacing Urea Filter Inserts ......................................................................................................... 343  

13.10

  Fuel ............................................................................................................................................ 345  

13.11

  Tanks ......................................................................................................................................... 346  

13.12

  Tanks of urea solution ............................................................................................................... 347  

13.13

  Venting the fuel system ............................................................................................................. 349  

13.14

  Engine coolant ........................................................................................................................... 349  

13.15

  Engine coolant – checks and controls ....................................................................................... 350  

13.16

  Air filter ....................................................................................................................................... 351  

13.16.1

  Safety cartridge ...................................................................................................................... 352  

14   Maintenance – compressed air system ........................................................................................... 353  

14.1

  Compressed-air reservoir .............................................................................................................. 353  

14.1.1

  Checking the compressed air reservoir ................................................................................. 353  

14.1.2

  Checking the drain valve ....................................................................................................... 354  

14.1.3

  Retighten tensioning belts ..................................................................................................... 354  

15   Maintenance – Mowing Units ............................................................................................................ 356  

15.1

  Special Safety Instructions ............................................................................................................ 356  

15.1.1

  Test run .................................................................................................................................. 357  

15.2

  Spare Parts .................................................................................................................................... 357  

15.3

  Maintenance Table – Mowing Units .............................................................................................. 358  

15.4

  Tool box ......................................................................................................................................... 359  

15.5

  Tightening Torques ........................................................................................................................ 359  

15.6

  Tightening Torques (Countersunk Screws) ................................................................................... 360  

11

Table of Contents

15.6.1

  Deviating Torque ................................................................................................................... 360  

15.7

  Opening the Front Guard ............................................................................................................... 361  

15.8

  Eliminating Blockages on the Cross Conveyor.............................................................................. 362  

15.9

  Shear pins on the conditioner ........................................................................................................ 363  

15.10

  Filling Quantities and Lubrication Designations for Gearboxes ................................................. 364  

15.10.1

  Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes) ........................................................ 364  

15.11

  Main gearbox ............................................................................................................................. 365  

15.11.1

  Lateral Mowing Unit ............................................................................................................... 365  

15.12

  Angular gearbox ........................................................................................................................ 366  

15.12.1

  Front Mowing Unit (CV+CRI) ................................................................................................. 366  

15.13

  Input gearbox ............................................................................................................................. 367  

15.13.1

  Front Mowing Unit (CV+CRI) ................................................................................................. 367  

15.14

  Speed gearbox .......................................................................................................................... 368  

15.14.1

  Front mowing unit (CV) .......................................................................................................... 368  

15.15

  Angular gearbox ........................................................................................................................ 369  

15.15.1

  CRI ......................................................................................................................................... 369  

15.15.2

  Bottom part ............................................................................................................................ 369  

15.16

  Gearbox for Top Roller Drive ..................................................................................................... 370  

15.17

  Oil level check and oil change on the cutter bar ........................................................................ 371  

15.17.1

  Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................. 371  

15.17.2

  Aligning the Cutter Bar ........................................................................................................... 371  

15.17.3

  Checking the oil level ............................................................................................................. 372  

15.17.4

  Oil change .............................................................................................................................. 373  

15.18

  Oil level check and oil change on the cutter bar ........................................................................ 374  

15.18.1

  Lateral Mowing Unit ............................................................................................................... 374  

15.18.2

  Checking the oil level ............................................................................................................. 375  

15.18.3

  Oil change .............................................................................................................................. 376  

15.19

  Checking the Cutter Blades and Blade Holder .......................................................................... 378  

15.19.1

  Cutter Blades ......................................................................................................................... 378  

15.19.2

  Blade screw connection ......................................................................................................... 379  

15.19.3

  Blade Quick-Fit Device .......................................................................................................... 380  

15.19.4

  Periodical Inspection of the Leaf Springs .............................................................................. 381  

15.19.5

  Periodical Inspection of the Cutting Discs / Blade Drums ..................................................... 382  

15.19.6

  Abrasion Limit ........................................................................................................................ 383  

15.20

  Blade Changing on Cutting Discs .............................................................................................. 384  

15.20.1

  Blade Screw Connection ....................................................................................................... 385  

15.20.2

  Blade Quick-Fit Device .......................................................................................................... 386  

15.21

  Replacing the linings .................................................................................................................. 387  

15.22

  Rotary hub with shear protection ............................................................................................... 388  

15.22.1

  After Shearing Off .................................................................................................................. 389  

12

Table of Contents

15.22.2

  Repairing the Sheared Off Bearing Unit ................................................................................ 390  

16   Maintenance – Basic Machine ........................................................................................................... 391  

16.1

  Brakes ............................................................................................................................................ 391  

16.2

  Hydraulic system ........................................................................................................................... 392  

16.3

  Maintenance - hydraulic system .................................................................................................... 395  

16.3.1

  System Description Operating and Brake Hydraulics ........................................................... 395  

16.3.2

  Pumps .................................................................................................................................... 395  

16.3.3

  Main block .............................................................................................................................. 396  

16.3.4

  Over-pressure valves ............................................................................................................. 397  

16.3.5

  Adjustable Throttles ............................................................................................................... 397  

16.4

  Hydraulic oil ................................................................................................................................... 398  

16.4.1

  List of Mineral Oils for the Hydraulic System ......................................................................... 398  

HEPG VG 46 ....................................................................................................................................... 398  

16.5

  Hydraulic oil level ........................................................................................................................... 399  

16.6

  Replacing the hydraulic oil filter ..................................................................................................... 400  

16.7

  Transfer gearbox ........................................................................................................................... 401  

16.8

  Air intake and distribution .............................................................................................................. 402  

16.8.1

  Changing / cleaning the fresh air filter ................................................................................... 403  

16.8.2

  Circulation filter ...................................................................................................................... 404  

16.9

  Windscreen washer system ........................................................................................................... 405  

16.10

  Position of Sensors (Right-Hand Side of the Machine) ............................................................. 406  

16.11

  Position of sensors (left side of machine) .................................................................................. 408  

16.11.1

  Adjusting the Sensors ............................................................................................................ 409  

16.11.1.1

  Namur sensor d = 12 mm .............................................................................................. 409  

16.12

  Maintenance - air conditioning system and heating .................................................................. 410  

16.13

  Special Safety Instructions ........................................................................................................ 410  

16.13.1

  Air conditioning components .................................................................................................. 410  

16.13.2

  Refrigerant data sheet R 134a (excerpt) ............................................................................... 411  

16.13.3

  Technical data ....................................................................................................................... 411  

16.13.4

  Refrigerant ............................................................................................................................. 412  

16.13.5

  Manometric switch ................................................................................................................. 412  

16.13.6

  Collector/drier......................................................................................................................... 413  

16.13.7

  Checking refrigerant condition and level ............................................................................... 414  

16.14

  Checking the capacitor .............................................................................................................. 415  

16.15

  Belt drives .................................................................................................................................. 416  

16.15.1

  Fan wheel drive ..................................................................................................................... 417  

16.15.2

  Outrigger arms ....................................................................................................................... 418  

16.15.3

  Drive of mowing unit .............................................................................................................. 420  

16.15.4

  Cross Conveyor Drive ............................................................................................................ 421  

16.16

  Tyres .......................................................................................................................................... 422  

13

Table of Contents

16.16.1

  Checking and maintaining tyres............................................................................................. 423  

16.16.2

  Wheel mounting ..................................................................................................................... 424  

16.16.3

  Retightening the Attachment Bolts on the Outrigger ............................................................. 424  

17   Maintenance – lubrication chart ....................................................................................................... 425  

17.1

  Lubricating the PTO shaft .............................................................................................................. 425  

17.2

  Lubricating the double joints on the main gearbox ........................................................................ 425  

17.3

  Lubrication Chart ........................................................................................................................... 426  

18   Maintenance – electrical system ....................................................................................................... 427  

18.1

  Electrical equipment - technical data ............................................................................................. 427  

18.2

  Battery ............................................................................................................................................ 428  

18.2.1

  Main battery switch ................................................................................................................ 429  

18.2.2

  Charging Batteries ................................................................................................................. 430  

18.2.3

  Quick charge .......................................................................................................................... 430  

18.2.4

  Cleaning the battery ............................................................................................................... 430  

18.2.5

  Check battery ......................................................................................................................... 431  

18.2.6

  Check acid level ..................................................................................................................... 431  

18.2.7

  Measuring Acid Density ......................................................................................................... 432  

18.3

  Fitting the batteries and connecting the poles correctly ................................................................ 433  

18.4

  Three-phase generator .................................................................................................................. 434  

18.5

  Starter ............................................................................................................................................ 435  

18.6

  Control units and fuses .................................................................................................................. 436  

18.6.1

  MR2 engine control ................................................................................................................ 437  

18.6.2

  Cab relay PCB ....................................................................................................................... 437  

18.6.3

  Console Circuit Board ............................................................................................................ 438  

18.6.4

  Cab Circuit Board .................................................................................................................. 439  

18.6.5

  Krone Machine Controller circuit board (KMC1) .................................................................... 440  

19   Maintenance – Central Lubrication................................................................................................... 441  

19.1

  Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 441  

19.2

  Lubricant filling ............................................................................................................................... 442  

19.3

  Fill coupling .................................................................................................................................... 442  

19.4

  Lubricant ........................................................................................................................................ 443  

19.4.1

  Grease types, NLGIClass 2 ................................................................................................... 444  

19.5

  Checking the fill level ..................................................................................................................... 445  

19.6

  Changing the Times of the Lubricating Interval ............................................................................. 446  

19.7

  Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................. 447  

20   Placing in Storage .............................................................................................................................. 449  

20.1

  At the End of the Harvest Season ................................................................................................. 449  

20.2

  Engine area ................................................................................................................................... 449  

20.3

  Before the Start of the New Season .............................................................................................. 450  

20.4

  Friction clutch –ByPy ..................................................................................................................... 451  

14

Table of Contents

20.4.1

  Venting the Friction Clutch on the PTO Shaft ........................................................................ 451  

21   Appendix ............................................................................................................................................. 452  

21.1

  Error Messages ............................................................................................................................. 452  

Pos: 5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

15

Foreword

Pos: 6 /BA/Diese Seite ist bewusst freigelassen worden. @ 1\mod_1201783680373_78.doc @ 54443

Pos: 8.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Vorwort @ 0\mod_1195627720123_78.doc @ 982

2 Foreword

Pos: 8.2 /BA/Vorwort/Selbstfahrer/Verehrter Kunde BiG M 420 @ 49\mod_1286950176328_78.doc @ 463747

Dear Customer

On buying the Self-Propelled High-Performance Mower-Conditioner Big M 420 you have selected a quality product from KRONE.

We are grateful for the confidence you have invested in us in buying this machine.

It is important to read the operating instructions very carefully before you start operating the machine so that the Self-Propelled High-Performance Mower-Conditioner Big M 420 may be used to its maximum capacity.

The contents of this manual are laid out in such a way that you should be able to perform any task by following the instructions step by step. It contains extensive notes and information about maintenance, how to use the machine safely, secure working methods, special precautionary measures and available accessories. It is essential, important and useful for the operational safety, reliability and durability of the Self-Propelled High-Performance Mower-Conditioner

Big M 420, that these notes and information are adhered to.

Pos: 8.3 /BA/Vorwort/Selbstfahrer/Weiteren Verlauf Big M @ 0\mod_1195627075279_78.doc @ 963

Pos: 8.4 /BA/Vorwort/Beachten Sie für Maschine @ 0\mod_1195626904076_78.doc @ 944

Note

Throughout the remainder of these operating instructions, the "Self-Propelled High

Performance Mowing Conditioner "Big M" will also be referred to as the "machine / vehicle".

Please note:

The operating instructions are part of your machine.

Only operate this machine after you have been trained to do so and according to these instructions.

It is essential to observe the safety instructions!

It is also necessary to observe the relevant accident prevention regulations and other generally recognised regulations concerning safety, occupational health and road traffic.

All information, illustrations and technical data in these operating instructions correspond to the latest state at the time of publication.

We reserve the right to make design changes at any time and without notification of reasons.

Should you for any reason not be able to use these operating instructions either wholly or partially, you can receive a replacement set of operating instructions for your machine by quoting the number supplied overleaf.

We hope that you will be satisfied with your KRONE machine.

Maschinenfabrik Bernard Krone GmbH

Spelle

Pos: 9 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

16

Introduction

Pos: 10.1 /BA/Einleitung/Einleitung @ 0\mod_1195562498677_78.doc @ 416

3 Introduction

These operating instructions contain fundamental instructions. These must be observed in operation and maintenance. For this reason, these operating instructions must be read by operating personnel before commissioning and use, and must be available for easy reference.

Follow both the general safety instructions contained in the section on safety and the specific safety instructions contained in the other sections.

Pos: 10.2 /BA/Einleitung/Gültigkeit/Selbsfahrer/BiG M 420 @ 49\mod_1286949685156_78.doc @ 463695

3.1 Validity

Pos: 10.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Kennzeichnung @ 0\mod_1195564622099_78.doc @ 496

3.2

Pos: 10.4 /BA/Einleitung/Kennzeichnung/Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1195563094865_78.doc @ 476

The Operating Instructions apply to all Self-Propelled High Performance Mowing Conditioners

Big M 420.

Identification Plate

1

Pos: 10.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BM 400 0213

Fig. 1

The machine data are located on a nameplate (1). It is located on the lower right side of the machine on the front of the frame.

17

Introduction

Pos: 10.6 /BA/Einleitung/Angaben für Anfrage und Bestellungen_Fahrzeugident-Nr. @ 0\mod_1195565119708_78.doc @ 515

3.3 Information Required for Questions and Orders

Type

Year of manufacture

Vehicle ID number

Note

The entire identification plate represents a legal document and should not be altered or rendered illegible!

Pos: 10.7.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch @ 0\mod_1196401545090_78.doc @ 7728

When asking questions concerning the machine or ordering spare parts, be sure to provide type designation, vehicle ID number and the year of manufacture : To ensure that these data are always available, we recommend that you enter them in the fields above.

Note

Authentic KRONE spare parts and accessories authorised by the manufacturer help to ensure safety. The use of spare parts, accessories and other devices which are not manufactured, tested or approved by KRONE will result in the revoking of the liability for damages resulting thereof.

3.4 Intended Use

Pos: 10.7.2 /BA/Einleitung/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Selbstfahrer/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1195565634240_78.doc @ 536

The Big M II self-propelled high-performance mower-conditioner is a carrier vehicle for three disc mowing units with a mowing conditioner. It is used to cut agricultural stalk and leaf crop.

Three individual mowing units allow the working width to be adapted. Integrated mowerconditioners accelerate the drying process of the mowed crop.

Pos: 10.7.3 /BA/Einleitung/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Nicht bestimmungs gemäss @ 0\mod_1196401324340_78.doc @ 7690

The self-propelled high performance mowing conditioner is intended exclusively for the conventional use in agricultural or similar work (intended use).

Any use of the machine for other purposes is deemed not to be in accordance with intended use. The manufacturer shall not be liable for any resulting damage; the user alone shall bear the risk.

Operation in accordance with intended use also includes observing the operating, maintenance and service instructions specified by the manufacturer.

Unauthorised modifications to the machine may affect the properties of the machine or disrupt proper operation. For this reason, unauthorised modifications shall exclude any liability of the manufacturer for consequential damage.

Pos: 10.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

18

Pos: 10.9 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Maschinenübersicht @ 0\mod_1195565731130_78.doc @ 555

Pos: 10.10 /BA/Einleitung/Maschinenübersicht/BiG M 420 @ 57\mod_1295849441968_78.doc @ 547515

11

10

9 8 7

Introduction

12

Pos: 10.11 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

1 2

Fig.2

1

3

Lateral mowing unit right

Right outrigger arm

3

7 Front mowing unit

9 Lateral mowing unit left

11 Left outrigger arm

13 Cab

13

5 6

4

BM 420 0036

2

4

Operating panel

Engine

8 Work hydraulics valves

10 Main battery switch

12 Shut-off valve for front outrigger

19

Introduction

Pos: 10.12 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten @ 0\mod_1195566374865_78.doc @ 594

All information, illustrations and technical data in these operating instructions correspond to the latest state at the time of publication. We reserve the right to make design changes at any time and without notification of reasons.

Pos: 10.13 /Betriebsanleitung/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Selbstfahrer/Big M 400/Big M 420 Fahrzeug/Mähwerke @ 51\mod_1288855154468_78.doc @ 497525

3.6.1 Technical Data / Vehicle

Transport width/length/height {mm} 3000 / 8180 / 4000

Weight distribution

Running gear

Steering

Tyres/air pressure about 9000 front / 5000 rear

4 wheels

Direct drive provided by radial piston engines

Rear axle steering

Front 750/65 R26 - 1.9 bar (MEGA X BIB)

Rear 580/70 R26 - 1.2 bar (MEGA X BIB)

Front 750/60 R30 - 1.0 bar (CARGO X BIB)

Rear 600/60 R30 - 1.0 bar (CARGO X BIB)

Nm 630 Tightening torque for wheel nuts

Hydrostatic travelling gear

Drive pump

Level I

Level II

0 to 20 km/h continuous (all-wheel drive)

0 to 40 km/h continuous (all-wheel drive)

Connectable axle separation in level 1

Absorption volume 105/75 ccm, pressure

430 bar

Filling quantities Filling quantities {I} Filtered oils

Brand name

Diesel tank

Engine oil

Hydraulic oil

Coolant

Transfer gearbox approx. 700 approx. 40 approx. 80 approx. - approx. 6.0

See chapter

"Engine"

See chapter

"Engine"

See chapter

"Engine"

Gearbox oil synthetic

DIN 51502 –PGLP

ISO VG 220

*

)

Caution: Do not mix with other oils.

Consult customer service before using other oils.

Bio-degradable lubricants

Brand name

HLP 46 HE 46 *

)

20

3.6.2

3.6.3

Pos: 11 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Technical data / CV mowing unit

Working width total/individual {mm}

Transport width {mm}

Number of cutting discs

Number of blade drums

Conditioner system

Speed of the conditioner {rpm}

Technical data / CRI mowing unit

Working width total/individual {mm}

Transport width {mm}

Number of cutting discs

Number of blade drums

Conditioner system

Speed of the conditioner {rpm}

Introduction

9720 / 3140 front / 3520 side

3000 mowing unit

4 / side mowing units - 5 front mowing units

4 / side mowing units - 2 front mowing units

V-shaped prong

700 / 1000

9000 / 3140

3000 mowing unit

5 / mowing unit

2 / mowing unit

Rollers

760

21

Safety

Pos: 12.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/P-T/Sicherheit @ 0\mod_1195566748646_78.doc @ 635

4 Safety

Pos: 12.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbstfahrer/Sicherheit Einführung Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1195566889349_78.doc @ 654

4.1 Introduction

The Big M 400 Self-Propelled High-Performance Mower-Conditioner is equipped with all the necessary safety devices (protective devices). However, it is not possible to eliminate all potential hazards on this machine as this would impair its full functional capability. Hazard warnings are attached to the machine in the relevant areas to warn against any dangers. The safety instructions are provided in the form of so-called warning pictograms. Important information on the position of these safety signs and what they mean is given below!

Pos: 12.3 /BA/Sicherheit/Beschädigte oder unlesbare Aufkleber @ 0\mod_1195567214115_78.doc @ 674

Pos: 12.4 /BA/Sicherheit/Kennzeichnung der Gefahrenhinweise @ 28\mod_1250244370070_78.doc @ 274714

Danger ! - Danger zone of the machine

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

Immediately replace damaged or illegible adhesive labels.

Following repair work, always attach appropriate adhesive safety stickers to all the replaced, modified or repaired components.

Never clean areas carrying an adhesive safety label using a high-pressure cleaner.

Familiarise yourself with the statement of the warning pictograms. The adjacent text and the selected location on the machine provide information on the special danger spots on the machine.

4.2 Identification of the hazard warnings

Danger!

DANGER! - Type and source of the hazard!

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

Measures for hazard prevention

Warning !

WARNING! - Type and source of the hazard!

Effect: Injuries, serious material damage.

Measures for hazard prevention

Caution!

CAUTION! - Type and source of the hazard!

Effect: Property damage

Measures for risk prevention.

Pos: 12.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

22

Safety

Pos: 12.6 /BA/Sicherheit/Nachbestellung/ Anbringung Aufkleber @ 0\mod_1195637337107_78.doc @ 1079

4.2.1

4.2.2

Re-Ordering the Adhesive Safety and Information Labels

Note

Every adhesive safety and information label is assigned an order number and can be ordered directly from the manufacturer or from an authorized dealer (see Section "Contact").

Affixing the Adhesive Safety and Information Labels

Note - Affixing an adhesive label

Effect: Adhesion of the label

The surface for affixing the adhesive label must be clean and free of dirt, oil and grease.

Pos: 12.7 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/Ansprechpartner @ 0\mod_1195569394286_78.doc @ 839

4.2.3 Contact

Pos: 12.8 /Adressen/Adresse Maschinenfabrik KRONE Spelle @ 0\mod_1195568531083_78.doc @ 734

Maschinenfabrik Bernard Krone GmbH

Heinrich-Krone-Strasse 10

D-48480 Spelle (Germany)

Telephone: + 49 (0) 59 77/935-0 (Head Office)

Fax.: + 49 (0) 59 77/935-339 (Head Office)

Fax.: + 49 (0) 59 77/935-239 (Spare parts - domestic)

Fax.: + 49 (0) 59 77/935-359 (Spare parts - export)

Email: [email protected]

Pos: 12.9 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

23

Safety

Pos: 12.10 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Lage der Sicherheitsaufkleber an der Maschine @ 0\mod_1195634967326_78.doc @ 1020

4.3

Pos: 12.11 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Grundmaschine "Front-/ Heckansicht" @ 14\mod_1231774361478_78.doc @ 172491

Position of the Adhesive Safety Stickers on the Machine

4.3.1 Basic machine „front -/ rear view“

Pos: 12.12 /Betriebsanleitung/Sicherheit/Aufkleber/Selbstfahrer/Big M 400/Sicherheitsaufkleber Grundmaschine Front Heck Big M 400 @ 16\mod_1235401826269_78.doc @ 198392

1

2

3

4

5

Fig. 3:

24

6

6

BM 400 0243

1) 2)

Safety

27 002 715 0

Danger of falling!

Do not walk on ladder step.

Order No. 27 002 715 0 (1x)

3)

Before performing maintenance and repair work, switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

Order No. 942 289-0 (1x)

4)

Before parking the machine, secure it with wheel chocks against accidentally rolling away.

Order No. 942 250-0 (1x)

5)

No one is permitted in the swivel range of the tailgate during operation.

Order No. 939 412-2 (1x)

Keep the stipulated safe distance from power transmission lines.

Order No. 942 293-0 (1x)

6)

While parts are moving, never reach into areas where there is a risk of being crushed.

Order No. 942 196-1 (2x)

942 196 -1

Pos: 12.13 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

25

Fig. 4:

26

Safety

Pos: 12.14 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Grundmaschine "linke und rechte Maschinenseite" @ 14\mod_1231774462634_78.doc @ 172514

4.3.2 Basic machine „left and right side hand of machine”

Pos: 12.15 /Betriebsanleitung/Sicherheit/Aufkleber/Selbstfahrer/Big M 400/Sicherheitsaufkleber Grunmaschine rechte/links Seite Big M 400 @ 16\mod_1235403164300_78.doc @ 198417

5

6

1 3 7

5

4

5

6

1 2

3

BM 400 0244

1)

Before starting the machine, read and observe the operating instructions and safety instructions.

Order No. 939 471-1 (1x)

3)

2)

Do not stand within the swivel range!

Order No. 939 469-1 (2x)

5)

The accumulator is subject to gas and oil pressure. Disassemble and repair in strict accordance with the instructions in the technical handbook.

Order No. 939 529-0 (3x)

7)

Danger of burns!

Hot surface, keep sufficient distance.

Order No. 942 210-0 (1x)

6)

When making repairs (welding work), always switch off the engine. Disconnect the main battery switch and remove the two cable plugs from the PLD control unit on the engine.

Order No. 942 405-0 (2x)

Safety

Passengers are not permitted to ride on ladder steps or platforms.

Order No. 942 291-0 (2x)

4)

Before parking the machine, secure it with wheel chocks against unintended rolling.

Order No. 942 250-0 (1x)

Pos: 12.16 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

27

Safety

Pos: 12.17 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Seitenmähwerk links / rechts @ 14\mod_1231774559868_78.doc @ 172537

4.3.3 Lateral mowing unit left / right

Pos: 12.18 /Betriebsanleitung/Sicherheit/Aufkleber/Selbstfahrer/Big M 400/Sicherheitsaufkleber Seitenmähwerke Big M 400_Europa @ 16\mod_1235453769426_78.doc @ 198445

4

1

4

1

1

3 5 5 3

1

4 5 2 3

Fig. 5:

28

3

2

5

4

BM 400 0245

1) a) Caution: some machine parts will stay in operation for an extended period of time before being switched off completely. Do not touch any moving parts of the machine. Wait until they have come to a complete stop. b) Move the protective devices into protective position prior to start-up. c) When the machine is running, keep your distance.

Order No. 939 576-0 (4x)

2)

When the engine is in operation, keep your distance.

Order No. 942 197-1 (2x)

STOP

939 410 2 a) b) c)

3)

Do not touch any moving parts of the machine.

Wait until they have come to a complete stop.

Order No. 939 410-2 (4x)

Safety

942 197-1

4)

While parts are moving, never reach into areas where there is a risk of being crushed.

Order No. 942 196-1 (4x)

Pos: 12.19 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

942 196 -1

5)

Danger due to rotating shaft.

Order No. 939 520-1 (2x)

(with auger - option (4x))

939 520-1

29

Safety

Pos: 12.20 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.doc @ 10648

4.3.4 Front mowing unit

Pos: 12.21 /Betriebsanleitung/Sicherheit/Aufkleber/Selbstfahrer/Big M 400/Sicherheitsaufkleber Frontmähwerk Big M 400_Europa @ 16\mod_1235457123223_78.doc @ 198498

1

1

1

BM 400 0246

Fig. 6

1) a) Caution: some machine parts will stay in operation for an extended period of time before being switched off completely. Do not touch any moving parts of the machine. Wait until they have come to a complete stop. b) Move the protective devices into protective position prior to start-up. c) When the machine is running, keep your distance.

Order No. 939 576-0 (3x)

Pos: 12.22 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

STOP

939 410 2 a) b) c)

942 197-1

30

Pos: 12.23 /BA/Diese Seite ist bewusst freigelassen worden. @ 1\mod_1201783680373_78.doc @ 54443

This page has been left blank deliberately!!

Pos: 12.24 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Safety

31

Safety

Pos: 12.25 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Lage der allgemeinen Hinweisaufkleber an der Maschine @ 0\mod_1195635067920_78.doc @ 1039

4.4

Pos: 12.26 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Grundmaschine "Front-/ Heckansicht" @ 14\mod_1231774361478_78.doc @ 172491

Position of the General Information Labels on the Machine

4.4.1 Basic machine „front -/ rear view“

Pos: 12.27 /Betriebsanleitung/Sicherheit/Aufkleber/Selbstfahrer/Big M 400/Hinweisaufkleber Grunmaschine Front Heck Big M 400_Europa @ 16\mod_1235466901848_78.doc @ 198523

4

3

6

5

11

5

9

2

1

13

11

4 5

9

2

1

12

4

8

4

7 10

BM 400 0247

Fig. 7:

32

1)

27 002 492 0 (2x)

H= 68 beige

4)

942 012-1

942 012 1 (4x)

7)

12V / 24 V

942 570 -0

942 570 0 (1x)

10)

2)

3)

27 002 394 0 (2x) lg.=550 mm

(beige)

5)

924 320 0 (1x) lg.=600 mm (beige)

924 323 0 (1x) lg.=775 mm (green)

27 002 777 0 (1x) lg.=765 mm (beige)

8)

60

12 Volt - Netz

Bei Schweißarbeiten ist der Hauptschalter auszuschalten und die Stecker der

Motorregelung PLD am Motorblock abzuziehen!

942 408-0

942 408 0 (1x) (DE)

942 412 0 (1x) (EN)

942 535 0 (1x) (FR)

11)

939 451 1 (2x)

6)

233 154 0 (1x)

9)

924 685 0 (2x)

12)

Safety

942 574 0 (1x)

13)

40

939 145 1 (1x) 40 km/h

939 218 1 (1x) 25 km/h

Pos: 12.28 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

942 574 -0

924 634 0 (2x) side light

939 180 2 (1x)

33

Safety

Pos: 12.29 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Grundmaschine "linke und rechte Maschinenseite" @ 14\mod_1231774462634_78.doc @ 172514

4.4.2 Basic machine „left and right side hand of machine”

Pos: 12.30 /Betriebsanleitung/Sicherheit/Aufkleber/Selbstfahrer/Big M 400/Hinweisaufkleber Grunmaschine rechte/links Seite Big M 420 Europa @ 58\mod_1296724698533_78.doc @ 553393

1

3

12

2

10

4

12

7

10

3

1

2

8

10

5

7

13

7

9

Fig. 8:

4

11

12

8

10

7

12

7

6 4

BM 400 0248

34

1) 2)

27 002 393 0 (2x) lg.=1250 mm

(green)

4)

60

12 Volt - Netz

27 002 396 0 (2x)

H= 140 anthracite

5)

Bei Schweißarbeiten ist der Hauptschalter auszuschalten und die Stecker der

Motorregelung PLD am Motorblock abzuziehen!

942 408-0

942 408 0 (3x) (DE)

942 412 0 (3x) (EN)

942 535 0 (3x) (FR)

7)

939 451 1 (6x)

10)

24 V

942 571 -0

942 571 0 (1x)

8)

13)

40

939 145 1 (2x) 40 km/h

939 218 1 (2x) 25 km/h

11)

924 634 0 (4x) side light

27 002 474 0 (DE) (1x)

27 002 475 0 (EN) (1x)

13)

Achtung!

Beide Unterlegkeile nur an der Vorderachse verwenden.

Caution!

Let op!

Use both wheel chocks for the front axle only.

Attenzione!

N'utiliser les deux cales de freinage que pour l'essieu avant

Beide wielwiggen uitsluitend onder de vooras gebruiken.

942 287-0

942 287 0 (1x)

Pos: 12.31 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

3)

27 002 392 0 (2x) lg.=1600 mm beige

6)

Safety

942 573 0 (1x)

942 573 -0

9)

942 134 0 (1x)

12)

1.2 bar

942 378 0 (2x) 1.2 bar

27 007 8200 (2x) 1.9 bar

942 183 0 (4x) 1.0 bar

35

Safety

Pos: 12.32 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Seitenmähwerk links / rechts @ 14\mod_1231774559868_78.doc @ 172537

4.4.3 Lateral mowing unit left / right

Pos: 12.33 /Betriebsanleitung/Sicherheit/Aufkleber/Selbstfahrer/Big M 400/Hinweisaufkleber Seitenmähwerke Big M 400 @ 37\mod_1265014058917_78.doc @ 342030

CRi

CV

10

CV

3

2

4 5

3

CRi

CRi

3

3

9

CV

11 CRi

3

Fig. 9:

7

6

CV

3

1

10

CRi

3

2

9 11 CV

4

5

8

3

2 1

CRi

8 3

CRi

4 5

2

1

8

CRi

1

3

8

6

CV

3

10

4

5

7

BM 400 0241_1

36

Safety

1) 2) 3)

27 002 398 0 (2x) (CRi) /(4x) (CV)

H= 50 anthracite

27 002 492 0 (2x) (CRi)

H= 68 beige

4)

27 002 394 0 (2x) (CRi) lg.=550 mm (beige)

27 002 395 0 (2x) (CRi) /(4x) (CV) lg.=440 mm (beige)

5)

255 498 1 (2x) with blade screw connection

139-888

139-889

139 888-0 139 889-0

939 567 1 (2x)

Ø 17,5 mm

939 451 1 (16x) (CRI) / (8x CV)

5)

255 499 2 (2x) with quick blade release min. 14 mm

255 498-1

255 499-2

6) 7) 8)

27 001 275 0 (2x)

9)

Pat. 6, 508, 050

942 427-0

942 427 0 (2x) (US)

27 001 274 0 (2x)

10)

+

+

255 497-0

255 497 0 (2x)

27 004 081 0 (4x)

11)

700

27 004 081 0

1000

942 240 0 (2x)

Pos: 12.34 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

37

Safety

Pos: 12.35 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.doc @ 10648

4.4.4 Front mowing unit

Pos: 12.36 /Betriebsanleitung/Sicherheit/Aufkleber/Selbstfahrer/Big M 400/Hinweisaufkleber Frontmäher Big M 40 @ 14\mod_1231914146511_78.doc @ 172635

CRi

7

6

8

3

4 5

2

8

7

1

Fig. 10:

CV

7

CV

10

CV

6

CV

9

CV

11

CV

12

BM 400 0242

38

1)

27 002 398 0 (1x)

H= 50 anthracite

4)

139-888 139-889

139 888-0 139 889-0

939 567 1 (1x)

6)

939 451 1 (1x)

9)

+

+

255 497-0

255 497 0 (1x) (CV)

Pos: 12.37 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Safety

2) 3)

942 341 0 (1x) lg.= 893 mm beige

27 002 395 0 (3x) lg.=440 mm

(beige)

5)

255 498 1 (2x) bei with blade screw connection

5)

255 499 2 (2x) with quick blade release

Ø 17,5 mm min. 14 mm

255 498-1

7)

924 634 0 (2x) side light

10)

942 625 0 (1x) (CV)

11)

942 626 0 (1x) (CV)

8)

Bei Hangausgleich diese

Position verwenden.

Take this position by using levelling mechanism.

942 404 0

942 404 0 (2x)

12)

700

255 499-2

1000

942 240 0 (1x) (CV)

39

Safety

Pos: 12.38 /BA/Sicherheit/Kennzeichnung von Hinweisen in der Betriebsanleitung Einführungstext @ 0\mod_1195637804826_78.doc @ 1098

4.5 Identifying Symbols in the Operating Instructions

The safety instructions contained in this manual which could result in personal injury if not followed are identified by the general danger sign:

Pos: 12.39 /BA/Sicherheit/Kennzeichnung der Gefahrenhinweise @ 28\mod_1250244370070_78.doc @ 274714

4.6

Pos: 12.40 /BA/Sicherheit/Allgemeine Funktionshinweise @ 0\mod_1196869714452_78.doc @ 15185

Identification of the hazard warnings

Danger!

DANGER! - Type and source of the hazard!

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

Measures for hazard prevention

Warning !

WARNING! - Type and source of the hazard!

Effect: Injuries, serious material damage.

Measures for hazard prevention

Caution!

CAUTION! - Type and source of the hazard!

Effect: Property damage

• Measures for risk prevention.

General function instructions are indicated as follows:

Note!

Note - Type and source of the note

Effect: Economic advantage of the machine

• Actions to be taken

Instructions which are attached to the machine need to be followed and kept fully legible.

Pos: 12.41 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

40

Safety

Pos: 12.42.1 /BA/Sicherheit/Personalqualifikation und-Schulung @ 0\mod_1195639383185_78.doc @ 1136

4.6.1 Personnel Qualification and Training Fehler! Textmarke nicht definiert.

The machine may be used, maintained and repaired only by persons who are familiar with it and have been instructed about the dangers connected with it. The operator must define areas of responsibility and monitoring of personnel. Should personnel lack the required knowledge, they must receive the required training and instruction. The operator must ensure that the contents of these operating instructions have been fully understood by personnel.

Pos: 12.42.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahren bei Nichtbeachtung der Sicherheitshinweise @ 0\mod_1195639434013_78.doc @ 1155

Repair work not described in these operating instructions should only be performed by authorised service centres.

4.6.2 Dangers in Case of Non-compliance with the Safety Instructions

Pos: 12.42.3 /BA/Sicherheit/Sicherheitsbewußtes Arbeiten @ 0\mod_1195639792576_78.doc @ 1174

Failure to follow the safety instructions could result in personal injury and environmental hazards as well as damage to the machine. If the safety instructions are not respected, this could result in the forfeiture of any claims for damages.

Failure to follow the safety instructions could result, for example , in the following hazards:

Endangering of persons due to not protected working areas.

Breakdown of important machine functions

Failure of prescribed methods for repair and maintenance

Endangering of persons due to mechanical and chemical effects

Damage to the environment due to leaking hydraulic oil

Pos: 12.42.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Always observe the safety instructions set out in these operating instructions, all existing accident prevention rules and any internal work, operating and safety rules issued by the operator.

The safety and accident prevention regulations of the responsible professional associations are binding.

The safety instructions provided by the vehicle manufacturer should also be observed.

Observe the applicable traffic laws when using public roads.

Be prepared for emergencies. Keep the fire extinguisher and first aid box within reach. Keep emergency numbers for doctors and fire brigade close to the telephone.

41

Safety

Pos: 12.42.5 /BA/Sicherheit/Sicherheits- und Unfallverhütungs-Vorschriften @ 0\mod_1195638684123_78.doc @ 1193

4.7 Safety Instructions and Accident Prevention Regulations

1 Please follow all generally applicable safety and accident prevention regulations in addition to the safety instructions contained in these operating instructions!

2

3

4

The attached warning and safety signs provide important information for safe operation.

Pay attention to these for your own safety!

When using public roads, make sure to observe the applicable traffic regulations!

Make sure that you are familiar with all equipment and controls as well as with their functions before you begin working with the machine. It is too late to learn this when you are using the machine for work!

The user should wear close fitting clothes. Avoid wearing loose or baggy clothing.

Keep the machine clean to prevent the danger of fire!

5

6

7

8

9

Before starting or moving the machine, make certain that nobody is in the vicinity of the machine! (Watch for children!) Make sure that you have a clear view!

You may carry passengers during operation and transport on the working implement only if they use the passenger seat provided.

Couple implements correctly! Attach and secure implements to specified devices only!

10 When attaching or detaching implements, place the supporting devices in the correct positions!

11 Always attach ballast weights properly to the fixing points provided!

12 Observe permitted axle loads, gross weight and transport dimensions!

13 Check and install transport equipment, such as lighting, warning devices and protective equipment!

14 Actuating mechanisms (ropes, chains, linkage, etc.) for remotely operated devices must be designed in such a way that, in whatever transport and working position, they cannot trigger accidental movements.

15 Ensure that implements are in the prescribed condition for on-road travel and lock them in place in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions!

16 Never leave the driver's seat when the vehicle is moving!

17 Always drive at the correct speed for the prevailing driving conditions! Avoid sudden changes in direction when travelling uphill or downhill or across a gradient!

18 Hitched implements and ballast weights affect the driving, steering and braking response of the machine. Make sure that you are able to brake and steer the machine as required!

19 Take into account the extension radius and/or inertia of an implement when turning corners!

20 Start up implements only when all protective devices have been attached and set in the required position!

21 Keep safety equipment in good condition. Replace missing or damaged parts.

22 Keep clear of the working range of the machine at all times!

23 Do not stand within the turning and swivel range of the implement!

24 Never operate the hydraulic folding frames if anyone is inside the swivel range!

42

Safety

25 Parts operated by external power (e.g. hydraulically) can cause crushing and shearing injuries!

26 Before leaving the mower, lower the front mower onto the ground, firmly step on the parking brake pedal. Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key!

Pos: 12.42.6 /BA/Sicherheit/Sicherheits- und Unfallverhütungs-Vorschriften BiG M 400 @ 0\mod_1199698247366_78.doc @ 33224

27 No one should stand between the mower and the implement unless the vehicle has been secured against rolling by means of the parking brake and/or wheel chocks!

28. Caution: When the front mower P.T.O shaft has been removed, the drive shaft at the front of the machine continues to turn if the engine is running.

Pos: 12.42.7 /BA/Kabine/Einweisersitz / Beifahrersitz/Einweisersitz / Personenbeförderung @ 45\mod_1276767521968_78.doc @ 408886

4.8 Conveying persons, guides, operating personnel

Pos: 12.42.8 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbstfahrer/Selbstfahrende Arbeitsmaschine @ 0\mod_1195643474451_78.doc @ 1232

4.9 Self-propelled working machine

1

The warning flashers and warning beacon must be used in accordance with local traffic laws when using public highways.

2

3

4

5

6

7

Switch on the lighting so that the vehicle can be easily recognised.

Safety equipment.

Always check the machine for driving and operational safety before use.

Hold the hand-grip firmly when climbing in and out of the mower.

It is not permitted to transport people on the platform.

The road safety switch must be in road position during road travel to ensure that all hydraulic functions - except for the steering and brakes – are deactivated.

8

9

Only drive the machine at the permitted speed.

Implements must be in transport position and locked in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for road travel.

10

If the engine is running in an enclosed space, divert the exhaust fumes and ensure sufficient ventilation.

11

When using starting fluid, avoid ignition sources and naked flames. Keep starting fluid clear of batteries and electrical cables.

12

When driving around bends, always take the width of the front mower into account, and also the fact that the rear of the mower will swing out. Ground conditions influence the handling of the mower.

13

Beware of holes, ditches and obstacles, since these could cause the mower to tip over.

This is particularly important on slopes.

Pos: 12.42.9 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Only persons who are guiding the driver or directing the machine may be conveyed on the guide's seat

Persons are not permitted to ride as passengers

43

Safety

Pos: 12.42.10 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbstfahrer/Autopilot @ 0\mod_1195646567591_78.doc @ 1384

4.10 Autopilot

1

2

Autopilot must only be used for its intended purpose. It must only be used in open fields, off public and semi-public roads, away from open areas frequented by people and far away from any persons that could be endangered. They must only be used for their intended purpose: - Automatic guide of the machine by GPS (Global Positioning System).

Before placing the autopilot in service, check the functionality of safety elements that can be checked and make a visual inspection of all the components.

To do this, the user should proceed as follows:

• Check switching off of the autopilot when the steering wheel is moved and the seat switch engages

3

4

• Check for proper operating condition - i.e. free of mechanical damages and leaks

When autopilot is in operation, there must be on one within 50 m of the machine in any direction.

The operator is not permitted to leave the driver's cabin of the machine while autopilot is in operation.

5

6

While the autopilot is in operation, the driver must regularly check the direction in which the machine is moving and its travel path to be able to take over manual control of the machine immediately if obstructions or interruptions come up in the vehicle's path.

After autopilot has been in operation and before leaving the field, autopilot must always be switched off on the autopilot release switch on the console.

7

8

Manipulating safety-related elements of the autopilot is prohibited, as is making changes to the hydraulic, electrical or electronic components.

The autopilot should only be installed by an authorised service centre.

Pos: 12.42.11 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

44

Safety

Pos: 12.42.12 /BA/Sicherheit/Arbeitsgeräte @ 0\mod_1195643623216_78.doc @ 1270

4.11 Implements

1

2

Caution! The flywheel will continue to rotate for some time even after the drive has been disengaged! Keep away from the implement during this time. Do not work on the machine until it has come to a standstill.

Cleaning, lubricating and adjusting the implements must be carried out only when the drive is switched off, the engine switched off and the ignition key removed!

Pos: 12.42.13 /BA/Sicherheit/Hydraulikanlage Mähaufbereiter (BiG M400 / BiG M500) @ 38\mod_1265362557136_78.doc @ 348614

Pos: 12.42.14 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

The hydraulic system is pressurised!

When connecting hydraulic cylinders and engines, make sure that the hydraulic hoses are connected correctly!

When connecting the hydraulic hoses to the mower-conditioner hydraulics, take care that the hydraulic system is depressurised both on the tractor side and on the device side!

When functions are connected hydraulically between the mower-conditioner and the accessory equipment, connecting parts should be identified so that faulty operation is excluded! If the connectors are interchanged, the functions will be reversed (e.g. raising/lowering) - Risk of accident!

Check the hydraulic hose lines at regular intervals and replace them if damaged or worn!

The new hoses must fulfil the technical requirements set by the manufacturer of the implement!

When searching for leaks, use suitable aids to avoid the risk of injury!

Liquids escaping under high pressure (hydraulic oil) can penetrate the skin and cause serious injury! Seek medical help immediately should injuries occur! Danger of infection!

Before working on the hydraulic system, depressurise the system and switch off the engine!

45

Safety

Pos: 12.42.15 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbstfahrer/Batterie @ 0\mod_1195646320763_78.doc @ 1308

4.13 Battery

1

2

3

4

5

Maintenance work on the batteries requires sufficient knowledge and the availability of proper tools!

Keep naked flames, burning matches and spark sources clear of the battery; Risk of explosion!

Never check the charging level of the battery by connecting the two poles with a metal object. Use an acid tester or voltmeter.

Do not charge a frozen battery; Risk of explosion! Warm the battery to 16 °C beforehand.

Battery acid can cause severe injuries by burning your skin and eyes. For this reason, wear suitable protective clothing.

Pos: 12.42.16 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbstfahrer/Kühlsystem @ 0\mod_1195646385154_78.doc @ 1327

4.14 Cooling system

The heated cooling system is pressurised – Risk of burns ! - For this reason, only remove the radiator cap with the engine switched off and after the engine has been able to cool.

Pos: 12.42.17 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Reifen @ 0\mod_1197357995667_78.doc @ 18075

4.15 Tyres

Pos: 12.42.18 /BA/Sicherheit/Reifen @ 0\mod_1195646435716_78.doc @ 1346

1

When working on the tyres, make sure that the implement is safely lowered and secured against rolling (wheel chocks).

Installing wheels and tyres requires adequate knowledge and suitable tools!

Repair work on the tyres and wheels should be done by specially trained personnel using appropriate installation tools only!

Check tyre pressure regularly! Inflate the tyres to the recommended pressures!

Check the wheel nuts periodically! Missing wheel nuts can result in a wheel falling off and the machine tipping over.

Pos: 12.42.19 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbstfahrer/Notausstieg @ 0\mod_1195646495279_78.doc @ 1365

2

3

4

5

Pos: 12.42.20 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

The right hand side window in the cabin is designed for being an emergency exit. In case of an emergency the cabin can be left over the emergency exit. To do this, the right hand side window must be manually unlocked before opening.

46

Safety

Pos: 12.42.21 /BA/Sicherheit/Arbeiten im Bereich von Hochspannungsleitungen @ 11\mod_1223357468516_78.doc @ 145505

4.17 Working in the vicinity of power transmission lines

1

2

3

4

Always take great care when working under or in the vicinity of power transmission lines.

Ensure that when in operation or being transported, the machine cannot exceed a total height of approx. 4m.

If there is any need to travel under overhead lines, the machine operator must request information on the rated voltage and the minimum height of the overhead lines from the overhead line operator.

Always keep the safety distances according to the table.

Rated voltage kV

To 1

Above 1 to 110

Above 101 to 220

Above 220 to 380

Safe distance from overhead lines m

1

2

3

4

Pos: 12.42.22 /BA/Sicherheit/Brandschutzmaßnahmen @ 0\mod_1195646926716_78.doc @ 1423

4.18 Fire preventions

1

2

3

4

5

6

Keep the machine clean to prevent the danger of fire! In particular, remove any crop wound around rotating parts.

The build-up of dust, oil and grass inside the engine compartment is combustible and presents an increased fire hazard. Keep the engine and the engine compartment clean at all times.

The fire hazard can be reduced by removing accumulated crop from the machine several times a day (interval depends on the type of crop) and checking the machine components for overheating. Check for oil leaks or exiting oil and take corrective action. Heed the lubricating instructions.

Frequently check the hydraulic oil lines thoroughly for proper condition and position with sufficient clearance to contact edges that may be sharp.

Check the vicinity of the hot zones of the engine, the exhaust system and pipes and the turbo charger, and remove crop residues.

Take great care when handling fuels. Never fill in fuel in the vicinity of unshielded flames or sparks that may cause ignition. Do not smoke when filling in fuel! Extreme fire hazard.

Pos: 12.42.23 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

47

Safety

Pos: 12.42.24 /BA/Sicherheit/Wartung/Wartung Mäher mit Gasspeicher+ Auswechseln von Arbeitswerkzeugen @ 0\mod_1195647075607_78.doc @ 1442

4.19 Maintenance

Pos: 12.42.25 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbstfahrer/Telefon und Funkgeräte @ 0\mod_1195647114060_78.doc @ 1461

1

2

3

Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing any repairs, maintenance or cleaning! - Remove the ignition key!

Regularly check that nuts and bolts are properly seated and tighten if necessary!

When carrying out maintenance work on a raised mowing unit, always use suitable means to secure it against falling.

When replacing working tools with cutting edges, use suitable tools and gloves!

Oils, greases and filters must be disposed of correctly!

4

5

6

7

8

Always disconnect the power supply before working on the electrical system!

If protective devices and guards are subject to wear, check them regularly and replace them in good time!

When performing electrical welding work on the vehicle and mounted devices, turn the power supply off at main battery switch or disconnect generator cable and battery!

9 Replacement parts must at least comply with the technical requirements set by the manufacturer of the implements! This is guaranteed by original KRONE spare parts!

10 Only use nitrogen for filling pneumatic accumulators - risk of explosion!

4.20 Telephone and radio sets

Telephones and radio equipment not connected to the outside antenna may lead to functional troubles in the vehicle's electronic system, thus jeopardising the operational safety of the vehicle.

Pos: 12.42.26 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/U-Z/Unterlegkeile @ 33\mod_1254202555660_78.doc @ 318451

4.20.1

Pos: 12.42.27 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbstfahrer/Unterlegkeile BM 420 Bild @ 51\mod_1288855584843_78.doc @ 497606

Wheel chocks

1

BM 420 0021

Pos: 12.42.28 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbstfahrer/Unterlegkeile BM 420 Text @ 51\mod_1288856841078_78.doc @ 497662

Fig.11

The machine is equipped with 2 wheel chocks

The wheel chocks (1) are located on the front left and right in the direction of travel behind the platform

The wheel chocks must always be brought along

When parking the machine, always protect it against rolling away with wheel chocks

Fold the wheel chocks completely open and place them tightly against the wheels so the machine cannot roll away

48

Pos: 12.43 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/Batterie-Hauptschalter @ 45\mod_1276841104984_78.doc @ 409039

4.20.2 Main battery switch

Pos: 12.44 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie-Hauptschalter BM 400/420 Bild @ 51\mod_1288857375390_78.doc @ 497689

Safety

Fig.12

Pos: 12.45 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie-Hauptschalter BM 400 Text @ 49\mod_1287041651562_78.doc @ 464476

The main battery switch is used to turn on or interrupt the machine ’s power supply

The main battery switch is on the left rear side as seen in direction of travel

I – Electrical power circuit turned on

Pos: 12.46 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie-Hauptschalter Hinweis @ 49\mod_1287041037031_78.doc @ 464424

II – Electrical power circuit interrupted

Note - Ignition to level 1 or 2

Effect: Battery discharges

• The battery is discharging even when the main battery switch interrupts the electrical power circuit. (Position II)).

Before extended times with no usage, disconnect the electrical power circuit with the main battery switch (position II).

Disconnect cables from battery terminal for winter storage (you may wish to charge or discharge the battery).

49

Safety

Pos: 13 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

50

Cabin

Pos: 14.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/K-O/Kabine @ 0\mod_1195650476560_78.doc @ 1556

5 Cabin

Pos: 14.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Aufstiegsleiter/Aufstiegsleiter zur Fahrerkabine BM 400 @ 0\mod_1195647599076_78.doc @ 1499

5.1 Ladder to driver's cabin

Pos: 14.3 /BA/Kabine/Aufstiegsleiter/Aufstiegsleiter Big M 420 @ 47\mod_1285667878078_78.doc @ 457056

Danger ! - Access to cab

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Do not access or leave (the machine) over ladder during travel.

It is impermissible to carry passengers on ladder steps or platforms.

Always make certain the ladders are clean. Take special care that no grease or other slippery materials accumulates on the ladders.

When leaving the cab, always switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

Pos: 14.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

1

Fig. 13

• Ladder (1) to the driver’s cab

BM 420 0001

51

Cabin

Pos: 14.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Kabinentür öffnen @ 0\mod_1195650425029_78.doc @ 1537

5.2

Pos: 14.6 /BA/Kabine/Tür Öffnen von innen/außen @ 0\mod_1195651571638_78.doc @ 1633

Opening the cabin door

1

BM 400 0182

Fig. 14

• From the outside:

Use the door key to unlock the door lock (1); press in the button (1) and open the door.

Pos: 14.7 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

1

BM 400 0183

Fig. 15

• From the inside:

Lift the door opening lever (1) and open the door.

52

Pos: 14.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Bedienungselemente @ 0\mod_1195651806826_78.doc @ 1652

Pos: 14.9 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/U-Z/Übersicht @ 0\mod_1195651857513_78.doc @ 1671

5.3.1 Overview

Pos: 14.10 /BA/Kabine/Bedienelemente Übersicht Big M 420 @ 57\mod_1295945379640_78.doc @ 548267

Cabin

12

1

2

3

Fig.16

Pos: 14.11 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

2 Steering column

3 Service brake

5 Switch group - roof panel

6 Info centre

9

5 13

10

7

4

11

6

8

BM 420 0035

9 Switch group – air conditioning/heating

10 Interior lighting

12 ISO compartment for radio

13 Side window wiper (right/left) (optional)

53

Cabin

Pos: 14.12 /BA/Kabine/Luft-Komfort-Sitz @ 41\mod_1272347370264_78.doc @ 375755

5.4 Air comfort seat

Danger ! - Brief distraction

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• The driver’s seat must only be adjusted when the machine is stopped.

10

3

2

1

8

9

4

5

6

7

BX500010

Fig. 17

The air-cushioned comfort seat (1) can be individually adapted to the requirements of the driver.

Weight adjustment

In order to prevent health problems, the individual driver’s weight adjustment should be checked and adjusted prior to operation of the machine. The adjustment should be carried out whilst sitting absolutely stationary.

• Pull the lever (6) upwards briefly (position I).

Height adjustment

The height can be adjusted continuously by means of a hydraulic system. In order to prevent damage, actuate the compressor for a maximum of 1 minute.

• Pull the lever (6) upwards completely (position I) to move the driver’s seat (1) up. Press the lever (6) down completely (position II) to move the driver’s seat (1) down. When the upper or lower end position of the height adjustment mechanism is reached, the height will be adjusted automatically in order to ensure a minimum spring travel.

54

Cabin

Horizontal suspension

The shock load in direction of travel through the driver’s seat (1) is cushioned better by the horizontal suspension.

• Swing the lever (5) to the front - the horizontal suspension is active; swing the lever (5) back – the horizontal suspension is switched off.

Longitudinal adjustment

• Pull the locking lever (4) up, and push the driver’s seat (1) forward or backward into the requested position. Permit the locking lever (4) to snap into place; after locking, the driver’s seat must not be movable into any other position.

Seat angle adjustment

• Pull the left key (3) up and at the same time set the angle of the sitting surface by increasing or decreasing the pressure on the seat surface.

Seat depth adjustment

• Pull the right key (2) up and at the same time bring the sitting surface into the required position by pushing forward and backward.

Headrest

Set the headrest in such a way that the upper edges of the head and the headrest are on the same height, if possible.

• Adjust the height of the headrest (10) by pulling out and pressing down across the noticeable snaps.

Lumbar support

• The height as well as the intensity of the arching in the backrest can be adapted individually by turning the hand wheel (9) to the left or right .

Adjustment of the backrest

• Pull the locking lever (7) up to set the inclination of the backrest. Permit the locking lever

(7) to snap into place – after locking, the backrest must not move into a different position any more.

55

Cabin

5.4.1 Setting the left armrest

8

11

BX100520

Fig. 18

Tilt the armrest (8) up or down as requested.

Remove the cover cap (11) to adjust the height of the armrest.

Undo the hexagon nut; move the armrest into the requested position and tighten the hexagon nut again. Press the cover cap (11) onto the hexagon nut again.

1

2

Pos: 14.13 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BX500011

Fig. 19

The right armrest (1) and the multi-function lever are one unit.

Setting the right armrest

• Undo the clamping screw (2); move the armrest (1) into the requested height and tighten the clamping screw (2) again.

56

Pos: 14.14 /BA/Kabine/Schublade für Verbandskasten / Betriebsanleitung BM 500 @ 41\mod_1272347696858_78.doc @ 375780

5.4.3 Drawer for first-aid kit/operating instructions

Cabin

Pos: 14.15 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig.20

The drawer (2) for the first-aid kit and the operating instructions is located below the front of the driver’s seat (1).

57

Cabin

Pos: 14.16 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Einweisersitz @ 52\mod_1289471929875_78.doc @ 504469

5.5

Pos: 14.17 /BA/Kabine/Einweisersitz / Beifahrersitz/Einweisersitz Achtung @ 52\mod_1289472176093_78.doc @ 504495

Guide's seat

DANGER! – Hindrance to driver!

• The guide's seat must only be used while the machine is being guided. Otherwise no persons other than the driver are permitted to remain on the machine or in the driver's cab during operation.

Pos: 14.18 /BA/Kabine/Einweisersitz / Beifahrersitz/Beifahrersitz Bild BM 500 @ 42\mod_1272431803112_78.doc @ 377335

Pos: 14.19 /BA/Kabine/Einweisersitz / Beifahrersitz/Einweisersitzfläche herunterklappen @ 52\mod_1289472477171_78.doc @ 504541

Fig.21

• Before use fold down the guide's seat surface (1).

Pos: 14.20 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/Kühbox @ 42\mod_1272436051831_78.doc @ 377418

5.5.1 Cooler

Pos: 14.21 /BA/Kabine/Kühlbox Bild BM 420 / 500 @ 42\mod_1272436122175_78.doc @ 377518

1

2

3

3

1

4

Pos: 14.22 /BA/Kabine/Kühlbox Text @ 42\mod_1272437167768_78.doc @ 377542

BM 500 0177

Fig.22

The cooler (1) is located under the guide's seat (2) in the cab.

The cooler can be connected to the 12-V socket (3) on the right next to the passenger seat with the 12-V plug (4).

Pos: 14.23 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

58

Pos: 14.24 /BA/Kabine/Notausstieg BM 500 @ 41\mod_1272290080084_78.doc @ 375572

Cabin

2 b

3 c

1

1

Pos: 14.25 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BM 500 0165

Fig.23

In case of an emergency (1), the side window on the RH side in the direction of travel, next to the driver's seat, can be opened as an exit door.

To do this:

Swivel the lever (2) forward until it reaches the locking point

Pull the safety cotter pin (3) and remove it

Open the side window (1) completely

59

Cabin

Pos: 14.26 /BA/Kabine/On-Board- Diagnosestecker (OBD) – Motor @ 41\mod_1272294242256_78.doc @ 375672

5.5.3 OBD Diagnostics Plug (On-Board Plug)

1

Pos: 14.27 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BM 500 0166

Fig.24

The OBD diagnostics plug (1) is located in the cab behind the cover of the operating panel.

60

Pos: 14.28 /BA/Kabine/Lenksäule/Lenksäule und Fußpedale BM 500/BM 420 @ 52\mod_1289480764906_78.doc @ 504895

5.6 Steering Column and Foot Pedals

1

5

2

4

8 3 7

6

10

Cabin

9

Pos: 14.29 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig.25

1 Button for horn

3 Pilot lamp indicator

6

8

9

Full beam indicator light

Release lever for horizontal steering column adjustment

Release lever for horizontal and vertical steering column adjustment

BM 500 0132_1

61

Cabin

Pos: 14.30 /BA/Kabine/Lenksäule/Lenksäulenverstellung @ 52\mod_1289481396328_78.doc @ 505108

5.6.1 Steering Column Adjustment

Danger ! - Loss of control over the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Adjust the steering column only when the machine is at a standstill.

• The steering column (1) is held in vertical position by spring pressure. Before actuating the pedal (2), hold the steering wheel with both hands.

1

3

Pos: 14.31 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

2

BX100300_1

Fig. 26

Horizontal and vertical steering column adjustment

• Use the pedal (2) to release the steering column (1), and adjust to the desired position.

After the pedal (2) has been released, the steering column (1) will be locked.

Horizontal steering column adjustment

• Loosen release lever (3). Move the steering column (1) into the requested position. Lock the release lever (3) again.

62

Pos: 14.32 /BA/Kabine/Lenksäule/Hupe @ 52\mod_1289481326156_78.doc @ 505062

5.6.2 Horn

Pos: 14.33 /BA/Kabine/Lenksäule/Blinklichtschalter @ 52\mod_1289481273359_78.doc @ 505036

1

BX100210_1

Fig. 27

When the push-button (1) is pressed, the horn is sounded.

1

2

Pos: 14.34 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BX100213_1

Fig. 28

Note

In road traffic the change of travelling direction is indicated by a flashing light.

Switch (1) forward - right indicator

Switch (1) backward - left indicator

• Set the switch to neutral position by hand.

The indicator pilot lamp (2) will light up when the indicator has been switched on.

Cabin

63

Cabin

Pos: 14.35 /BA/Kabine/Lenksäule/Fernlicht @ 52\mod_1289481203984_78.doc @ 505010

5.6.4 Full Beam

1

2

Pos: 14.36 /BA/Kabine/Lenksäule/Lichthupe @ 52\mod_1289481134765_78.doc @ 504984

BX100212_1

Fig. 29

Note

Full beam only when dipped beam is turned on.

Turn off full beam when a vehicle is approaching from the opposite direction.

Switch full beam on - press lever (1) down.

Switch full beam off - pull lever (1) up.

When full beam is switched on, the blue pilot lamp (2) will be lit.

1

2

Pos: 14.37 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BX200040_1

Fig. 30

Pull the headlamp flasher lever (1) up.

64

Pos: 14.38 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/Betriebsbremse betätigen @ 49\mod_1286779662750_78.doc @ 463113

5.6.6

Pos: 14.39 /BA/Kabine/Betriebsbremse betätigen Bild BM 420/500 Big X @ 52\mod_1289487058875_78.doc @ 505805

Using the operating brake

1

Pos: 14.40 /BA/Kabine/Betriebsbremse betätigen Text @ 41\mod_1271748511086_78.doc @ 372399

BX100111_1

Fig. 31

In road traffic

Danger ! - Function of service brake is limited.

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

Check the brake function before starting every trip.

Pos: 14.41 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Cabin

65

Cabin

Pos: 14.42.1 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Schaltergruppe Dachkonsole Bild BM 420/500 @ 32\mod_1253263885862_78.doc @ 313346

5.7 Roof Panel Switch Group

1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9 10

Fig.32

Pos: 14.42.2 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Schaltergruppe Dachkonsole Text BM 400/420 @ 48\mod_1286515585281_78.doc @ 461605

1

Working floodlights pointing down the side, and working floodlights pointing at the right and left mowing units

2

3

4

5

Cab roof floodlights

Bottom working floodlight pointing to the front

Mirror adjustment (right outside mirror only)

Rear working floodlights

6

7

Side light/dipped beam

Allround lights (optional)

8

9

Hazard warning flasher

Windshield wipers

10

Windshield washer unit

Pos: 14.42.3 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

66

Pos: 14.42.4 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Beleuchtung @ 0\mod_1195658399935_78.doc @ 1881

5.8 Lighting

Pos: 14.42.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/U-Z/Übersicht @ 0\mod_1195651857513_78.doc @ 1671

5.8.1 Overview

Pos: 14.42.6 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Beleuchtung Übersicht BM 420 @ 47\mod_1285674059968_78.doc @ 457109

Cabin

1 3

6

9

4 7

8

6

7 4

8 9

3

2

5

12

Pos: 14.42.7 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

11 10

Fig.33

4

5

6

7

1

2

3

Working floodlights for mowing unit right

Working floodlights for mowing unit left

Working floodlights, side lower

Working floodlight lower pointing to the front

Working floodlight rear

Cab roof working floodlight

Dipped beam / full beam

8

9

Front parking light (clearance lamp)

Indicators / hazard warning flashers

10 Licence plate lamp

11 a) Brake light b) Indicators / hazard warning flashers c) Tail light / rear parking light (clearance lamp)

12 Allround light (optional)

11

11 a b c

BM 420 0002

67

Cabin

Pos: 14.42.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/Blinker, Warnblinkanlage und Bremslicht @ 48\mod_1286516373468_78.doc @ 461657

5.8.2 Indicator, hazard warning flasher and brake light

Pos: 14.42.9 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Blinker/Bremslicht/Warnblinkanlage/Blinker Hinweis Fahrtrichtungswechsel bei Straßenfahrt mit Blinklicht anzeigen. @ 48\mod_1286516520484_78.doc @ 461683

Note

In road traffic the change of travelling direction is indicated by a flashing light.

Pos: 14.42.10 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Blinker/Bremslicht/Warnblinkanlage/Blinker, Warnblinkanlage und Bremslicht Bild BM 420 @ 48\mod_1286519378578_78.doc @ 461839

12a

12b

10

10

BM 420 0003

Fig.34

Pos: 14.42.11 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Blinker/Bremslicht/Warnblinkanlage/Blinker einschalten @ 48\mod_1286517252328_78.doc @ 461735

5.8.2.1 Switching on the indicator

• Actuate the direction indicator on the steering wheel; the indicators (10, 12b) will flash on one side (right/left).

Pos: 14.42.12 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Blinker/Bremslicht/Warnblinkanlage/Bremslicht @ 48\mod_1286517961515_78.doc @ 461761

5.8.2.2 Brake light

Pos: 14.42.13 /Überschriften/Überschriften 4/U-Z/Warnblinkanlage @ 48\mod_1286518286593_78.doc @ 461813

When the ignition is switched on, the brake lights (12a) will light up as soon as the operating brake is pressed.

5.8.2.3 Switching on the hazard warning flasher

Pos: 14.42.14 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Blinker/Bremslicht/Warnblinkanlage/Warnblinkanlage Bild BM 420 @ 48\mod_1286519469109_78.doc @ 461865

12b

1

10

Fig.35

Pos: 14.42.15 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Blinker/Bremslicht/Warnblinkanlage/Blinker, Warnblinkanlage und Bremslicht BM 400 @ 0\mod_1195658983248_78.doc @ 1921

The switch (1) for the hazard warning flasher is located in roof panel switch group.

BM 420 0004

Actuate the rocker switch (1). The red pilot lamp in the switch (1) will start flashing.

When the hazard warning flasher has been switched on, all indicators (10, 12b) will flash at the same time.

Pos: 14.42.16 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

68

Pos: 14.42.17 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Standlicht / Abblendlicht @ 47\mod_1285679225203_78.doc @ 457241

5.8.3

Pos: 14.42.18 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Standlicht / Abblendlicht Bild BM 420 @ 47\mod_1285679392203_78.doc @ 457267

Side light/dipped beam

I

II

III

1

Cabin

12c

7

11

9

BM 420 0005

Pos: 14.42.19 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Standlicht / Abblendlicht Text @ 48\mod_1286520637718_78.doc @ 461971

Fig.36

The rocker switch (1) for the parking light and the dipped beam is located in the roof panel switch group.

The switch has three positions:

I - Off

II - Parking light

III – Dipped beam

5.8.3.1 Switching on the parking light

• Set the rocker switch (1) to position II:

The following lamps will light up when the parking light is switched on:

9 Front parking light

5.8.3.2 Switching on the dipped beam

• Set the rocker switch (1) to position III.

When dipped beam is turned on, the following are lit:

9 Front parking light

11 Licence plate lamp

Pos: 14.42.20 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Note

The dipped beam can be switched on only when the ignition has been switched on.

69

Cabin

Pos: 14.42.21 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/Arbeitsscheinwerfer @ 48\mod_1286522984234_78.doc @ 462049

5.8.4

Working

Pos: 14.42.22 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer Bild BM 420/500 @ 49\mod_1286531494859_78.doc @ 462569

Fig. 37

Pos: 14.42.23 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer Text BM 400 / 420 / 500 @ 48\mod_1286526713171_78.doc @ 462283

2

3

4

The rocker switch (1,2,3,4) for the working floodlights is located in the roof panel switch group.

1

Working floodlights pointing down the side, and working floodlights pointing at the right and left mowing units

Cab roof floodlights

Bottom working floodlight pointing to the front

Rear working floodlights

It has 2 settings:

I

II

Note

Off

On

Always switch the working floodlights off during road travel!

Pos: 14.42.24 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

70

Pos: 14.42.25 /Überschriften/Überschriften 4/A-E/Arbeitsscheinwerfer seitlich unten und Mähwerke rechts/links @ 48\mod_1286524157656_78.doc @ 462101

5.8.4.1

Working floodlights "down the side and at the right/left mowing units"

Pos: 14.42.26 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer setlich unten und Mähwerke rechts/links Bild BM 420 @ 47\mod_1285681389000_78.doc @ 457398

2

1

I

II

Cabin

3

4

BM 420 0006

Fig. 38

Pos: 14.42.27 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer setlich unten und Mähwerke rechts/linksText BM 400/420 @ 48\mod_1286527090234_78.doc @ 462335

The two working floodlights (2,3,4) can be switched on only when the parking light is switched on.

• Set the rocker switch (1) to position II:

When the rocker switch (1) is turned on, the following are lit:

Pos: 14.42.28 /Überschriften/Überschriften 4/A-E/Arbeitsscheinwerfer Kabine @ 48\mod_1286524163921_78.doc @ 462127

1

Working floodlights for mowing unit right

2

Working floodlights for mowing unit left

3

Working floodlights, side lower

5.8.4.2

Working Cab

Pos: 14.42.29 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer Kabine Bild BM 420/500 @ 49\mod_1286532416343_78.doc @ 462595

2

I

II

6

BM 500 0162

Fig. 39

Pos: 14.42.30 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer Kabine Text BM 420/500 @ 49\mod_1286532654578_78.doc @ 462621

The 6 working floodlights (6) on the cab roof can only be switched on when the parking light is switched on.

• Set the rocker switch (2) to position II:

When the rocker switch (2) is turned on, the following are lit:

6 Cab roof floodlights

Pos: 14.42.31 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

71

Cabin

Pos: 14.42.32 /Überschriften/Überschriften 4/A-E/Arbeitsscheinwerfer unten Front @ 48\mod_1286524169140_78.doc @ 462153

5.8.4.3

Working floodlight Bottom front

Pos: 14.42.33 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer unten Front Bild BM 420 @ 48\mod_1286459618812_78.doc @ 461490

3

II

I

4

Fig. 40

Pos: 14.42.34 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer unten Front Text @ 48\mod_1286528985921_78.doc @ 462439

• Set the rocker switch (3) to position II:

When the rocker switch (3) is turned on, the following are lit:

Pos: 14.42.35 /Überschriften/Überschriften 4/A-E/Arbeitsscheinwerfer Heck @ 48\mod_1286525027906_78.doc @ 462205

4 Working floodlight front (right and left)

5.8.4.4

Working rear

Pos: 14.42.36 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer Heck Bild BM 420 @ 48\mod_1286458699187_78.doc @ 461437

4

II

I

5

4

BM 420 0008

BM 420 0007

Fig.41

Pos: 14.42.37 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer Heck Text BM 400 @ 48\mod_1286529514968_78.doc @ 462491

• Set the rocker switch (4) to position II:

When the rocker switch (4) is turned on, the following are lit:

5 Working floodlight rear

Pos: 14.42.38 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

72

Pos: 14.42.39 /Überschriften/Überschriften 4/P-T/Rundumleuchten optional @ 48\mod_1286524188234_78.doc @ 462179

5.8.5

Allround lights (optional)

Pos: 14.42.40 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Rundumleuchte Bild BM 420 @ 48\mod_1286460128140_78.doc @ 461543

Cabin

13

1

BM 420 0009

Fig.42

Pos: 14.42.41 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Rundumleuchte Text BM 400 @ 49\mod_1286530440406_78.doc @ 462543

Option depends on user’s country

In some countries the allround lights must be switched on in road traffic.

Switch on the allround lights (13)

The switch (1) for the allround lights is located in the roof panel switch group.

Actuate the rocker switch (1). The orange pilot lamp in the switch (1) will light up.

Pos: 14.42.42 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

73

Cabin

Pos: 14.42.43 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Innen-Raumbeleuchtung / Spotlight BM 500 @ 41\mod_1271751084243_78.doc @ 372526

5.8.6 Interior Lighting / Spotlight

1

8 6 6

3

4 7

2 5

BM 500 0146

Fig.43

The interior lighting (1) and spotlight (2) are located on the cab roof.

Overview:

3 = On / Off switch - interior lighting (1)

4 = On / Off switch - spotlight (2)

Note - switch-off delay

After ignition stage II is turned off, interior lighting will stay on for the amount of time set on time relay (5).

The time for switch-off delay can be adjusted with the time relay (5).

To do this:

Open the cover (7) on the cab roof

Move switch (6) S1 and S2 to the desired position (see table)

S1 S2 (s)

Pos: 14.43 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

On Off 2.5 14

Off On 0…2.5

Use a screwdriver to make fine adjustments to the rotary potentiometer (8) of the time relay (5) that controls the switch-off delay (amount of time) to match time intervals t(s).

74

Cabin

Pos: 14.44.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Außenspiegel @ 32\mod_1253519080403_78.doc @ 313745

5.9

Pos: 14.44.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Fahren und Transport/Gefahr- Außenspiegel @ 32\mod_1253519267091_78.doc @ 313770

Outside mirrors

Danger! - Impaired vision

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

Before starting to drive, adjust the mirror so that the rear driving area is fully visible.

Pos: 14.44.3 /BA/Kabine/Spiegel/Außenspiegel links BM 420 @ 49\mod_1286776114734_78.doc @ 462847

5.9.1 Left Outside Mirror

1

Pos: 14.44.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BM 420 0010

Fig.44

• Adjust the left outside mirror (1) manually.

75

Cabin

Pos: 14.44.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Rechter Außenspiegel und Anfahrspiegel BM 400 @ 49\mod_1286776268859_78.doc @ 462873

5.9.2

Pos: 14.44.6 /BA/Kabine/Spiegel/Rechter Außenspiegel und Anfahrspiegel Bild BM 420 @ 49\mod_1286777881171_78.doc @ 463033

Right outside mirror and anti-collision mirror

2

1

3

BM 420 0011

Fig. 45

Pos: 14.44.7 /BA/Kabine/Spiegel/Außenspiegel rechts @ 49\mod_1286777019984_78.doc @ 462951

5.9.2.1 Setting the right outside mirror

Pos: 14.44.8 /BA/Kabine/Spiegel/Anfahrspiegel einstellen @ 49\mod_1286776763796_78.doc @ 462925

5.9.2.2

The right outside mirror (1) is electrically adjustable. The switch (3) is located in the roof panel.

Turn the switch (3) to the right (arrow to the right).

Press the switch (3) up, down and to the side until the outside mirror (1) is set correctly.

Setting the anti-collision mirror

Pos: 14.44.9 /BA/Kabine/Spiegel/Anfahrspiegel Hinweis @ 49\mod_1286776577265_78.doc @ 462899

The anti-collision mirror (2) must be adjusted manually.

Note

Set the anti-collision mirror in such a way that the ground area next to the right front wheel can be checked prior to starting.

Pos: 14.44.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

76

Pos: 14.44.11 /BA/Kabine/Spiegel/Innenspiegel @ 0\mod_1195711607577_78.doc @ 2043

5.10 Inside mirror

BMII-197

Fig. 46:

Adjust the inside mirror manually.

Adjust the inside mirror according to requirements.

Pos: 14.45 /BA/Kabine/Sonnenblende BM 420 / 500 @ 41\mod_1271755875430_78.doc @ 372551

5.11 Sun blind

Pos: 14.46 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

1

BX100101_2

Fig. 47

Adjust the sun blind according to requirements.

Cabin

77

Cabin

Pos: 14.47 /BA/Kabine/Frontscheibenwischer @ 0\mod_1195712885140_78.doc @ 2100

5.12 Windshield wipers

Pos: 14.48 /BA/Kabine/Scheibenwaschanlage – Frontscheibe @ 0\mod_1195713188280_78.doc @ 2119

5.13

Fig. 48:

The rocker switch (1) for the windshield wipers is located in the roof panel.

The switch has three positions:

I - Off

II - Interval

III - Continuous operation

Switching on the windshield wipers

Actuate the rocker switch (1).

Washer system – windshield

Pos: 14.49 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 49:

The rocker switch (1) for the windshield washer system is located in the roof panel.

Switching on the windshield washer system

• Actuate the rocker switch (1).

78

Pos: 14.50.1 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Schalterkonsole BM 500 @ 41\mod_1271762510508_78.doc @ 372627

5.14 Switch panel

Cabin

2

3

4 7

5 6

1

BM 500 0147

Fig. 50

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Pos: 14.50.2 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Hinweis CAN-Diagnosesteckdose / USB-Anschluss Anbringungsort @ 41\mod_1271762668461_78.doc @ 372652

Panel switches

Pilot lamps

Ignition lock

Cigarette lighter

12 V socket

CAN diagnostics socket

USB connection

Note

The CAN diagnostics socket and USB port are located between the driver's seat and the switch panel.

Pos: 14.50.3 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

79

Cabin

Pos: 14.50.4 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Konsolenschalter und Kontrollleuchten BM 420 @ 49\mod_1287066477765_78.doc @ 464845

5.15 Panel Switches and Pilot Lamps

Pos: 14.50.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 51

4

5

6

7

1

2

3

Release switch – road/field

Autopilot release switch (optional)

Release switch – parking brake

Travelling Gear Release Switch

Axle separation key

Switch hydraulic auger hood left (optional)

Switch to fold the front safety flap up and down (front mowing unit optional)

8

9

Switch for hydraulic auger hood right (optional)

Pilot lamp for engine oil pressure

10 Charge indicator lamp

11 Cooling water pilot lamp

80

Pos: 14.50.6 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Betätigung Freigabeschalter @ 0\mod_1195717535303_78.doc @ 2202

5.15.1 Actuating release switches

1

1

Cabin

Pos: 14.50.7 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

2

BX 400 0006

Fig. 52:

Note - Locked release switch

Effect: Release switches cannot be activated.

• To actuate the release switches (1), push the lock (2) forward and press the release switch.

81

Cabin

Pos: 14.50.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Freigabeschalter Straße/Feld @ 0\mod_1196320452967_78.doc @ 6351

5.15.2

Pos: 14.50.9 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Stellung Freigabeschalter bei Straßenfahrt @ 0\mod_1196320338201_78.doc @ 6332

Release switch – road/field

Danger! - Release switches for road travel not in position (I) "Road travel"

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

The road/field release switch must be in position "I" for road travel.

This ensures that only the travelling gear, steering and brakes are activated.

Pos: 14.50.10 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Freigabeschalter Straße/Feld @ 0\mod_1195717693209_78.doc @ 2221

1 II

Pos: 14.50.11 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

I

BM 400 0007

Fig. 53

The road/field release switch (1) is used to switch from road travel to field operation and vice versa.

I - Road travel

II - Field mode

Note

Depending on the position of the "Road/field" release switch, the "Road travel or field mode" basic screen appears in the Info Centre.

82

Pos: 14.50.12 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Freigabeschalter Autopilot / -optional @ 0\mod_1195717962350_78.doc @ 2240

5.15.3 Autopilot release switch / - optional

1 II

Cabin

I

BM 400 0009

Fig. 54:

Actuating the autopilot release switch (1) releases the autopilot function.

Note - Autopilot is not released

• Autopilot is only available in Field mode with the travelling gear turned on

Pos: 14.50.13 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

• The road/field release switch must be active in field operation and the travelling gear release switch must be switched on.

I - Autopilot off

II - Autopilot released

Note - Autopilot is not released

• For further information, please consult the operating instruction "Autopilot Brief

Introduction" included with delivery

83

Cabin

Pos: 14.50.14 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Freigabeschalter Feststellbremse @ 0\mod_1195718259850_78.doc @ 2259

5.15.4 Release switch - holding brake

Pos: 14.50.15 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 55:

Note - Parking brake engaged

Effect: Brake overheating

• Do not drive with the parking brake engaged.

• The holding brake is applied automatically when the ignition is switched off.

84

Cabin

Pos: 14.50.16 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Freigabeschalter Fahrantrieb @ 0\mod_1196319179092_78.doc @ 6293

5.15.5

Pos: 14.50.17 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Ungewolltes bewegen der Maschine @ 0\mod_1196319463264_78.doc @ 6313

Release switch travelling gear

Danger! - Unintentional movement of the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• No persons may be present in the direct hazardous area of the machine when the travelling gear release switch is actuated!

• Always remove the ignition key before leaving the cabin.

To turn off the machine:

Pos: 14.50.18 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Freigabeschalter Fahrantrieb @ 0\mod_1195720600131_78.doc @ 2278

• Activate the parking brake switch; move the travelling gear switch (1) to position off (I).

1 II

Pos: 14.50.19 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

I

BM 400 0010

Fig. 56:

When the travelling gear release switch (1) is actuated, the travelling gear is released .

I - Travelling gear off

II - Travelling gear on

Note - Mower drives cannot be switched on.

• When the travelling gear is switched off (position II), the mowing unit drive cannot be switched on.

85

Cabin

Pos: 14.50.20 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Taste Achstrennung @ 0\mod_1195722759115_78.doc @ 2297

5.15.6 Axle separation key

Pos: 14.50.21 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 57:

Actuating the axle separation key switches axle separation on or off.

Note - Axle separation does not turn on

Axle separation can only be activated in drive level 1 (field mode).

When activating the axle separation, the maximum top speed is 14 km/h (instead of 19 km/h).

If the axle separation is switched when travelling faster than 14 km/h, the electronics prevent the axle separation from being activated. Only after the speed has been reduced to below 14 km/h, are the electronics, the valves, and the axle separation activated.

Actuate axle separation key (1) – axle separation switched on

Actuate axle separation key (1) again – axle separation switched off

86

Pos: 14.50.22 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Kontrollleuchten Bild BM 420 @ 49\mod_1287064818000_78.doc @ 464765

Cabin

1 3

2

BM 420 0014

Pos: 14.50.23 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Kontrollleuchte Motoröldruck @ 41\mod_1271763742977_78.doc @ 372726

Fig.58

5.15.7 Engine Failure Pilot Lamp

Pos: 14.50.24 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Kontrollleuchte Ladekontrollleuchte @ 41\mod_1271763780008_78.doc @ 372751

Caution! - "Engine failure" pilot lamp (1) is lit

Effect: Damage to the machine

• Switch off engine immediately.

• Rectify the fault.

5.15.8 Charge Indicator Lamp

Pos: 14.50.25 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Kontrollleuchte Kühlwasser @ 41\mod_1271763810555_78.doc @ 372776

The charge indicator lamp (2) will light up if the output voltage of the three-phase generator is not sufficient to charge the batteries.

Check the cables and connections on the three-phase generator and on the battery.

Check the V-belt on the three-phase generator.

5.15.9 Pilot Lamp for Cooling Water

Caution! - "Cooling water" pilot lamp (3) is lit

Effect: Damage to the machine

• Switch off engine immediately.

• Rectify the fault.

Pos: 14.50.26 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

87

Cabin

Pos: 14.50.27 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Zündschloss @ 0\mod_1195724199693_78.doc @ 2336

5.15.10 Ignition lock

1

Pos: 14.50.28 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 59:

The ignition lock (1) has four positions:

0 - Off

BM 400 0013

I - Electric circuit for electronics is switched on

II The ignition is switched on

III -Start position

88

Pos: 14.50.29 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/U-Z/Zigarettenanzünder / 12 V Steckdose @ 42\mod_1272437710878_78.doc @ 377567

5.15.11 Cigarette lighter / 12-V socket

Pos: 14.50.30 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Zigarettenanzünder / 12 V Steckdose Achtung @ 42\mod_1272438967737_78.doc @ 377642

Caution! - Hot cigarette lighter!

Pos: 14.50.31 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Zigarettenanzünder / 12 V Steckdose Bild BM 500 @ 42\mod_1272439182175_78.doc @ 377667

Effect: Burns

• Only hold the hot cigarette lighter by the handle.

Never hold onto the cigarette lighter (1) when it is pushed in.

1

2

2

Cabin

BM 500 0178

Pos: 14.50.32 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Zigarettenanzünder / 12 V Steckdose Text @ 0\mod_1195725058068_78.doc @ 2355

Fig.60

Press the cigarette lighter (1) in; when the required temperature is reached the insert will come out by itself.

The socket (2) can be used to connect other power consumers with 12 volts and a maximum of

10 amperes. When the engine has been switched off, the battery will be discharged. Use the specified plug to connect accessory units.

Pos: 14.50.33 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Steckdose 12 V Hinweis BM 500 @ 42\mod_1272440213768_78.doc @ 377745

Note

An additional 12-V socket is located in the driver’s cab on the right next to the passenger seat facing in the direction of travel.

Pos: 14.50.34 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

89

Cabin

Pos: 14.50.35 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Diagnosesteckdose / USB-Anschluss BM 500 @ 41\mod_1271765654040_78.doc @ 372900

5.15.12 Diagnostics Socket / USB Connection

Fig. 61

Pos: 14.50.36 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Hinweis CAN-Diagnosesteckdose / USB-Anschluss Anbringungsort @ 41\mod_1271762668461_78.doc @ 372652

Note

CAN interface (1)

USB connection (2)

The CAN diagnostics socket and USB port are located between the driver's seat and the switch panel.

90

Pos: 14.51 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Cabin

91

Cabin

Pos: 14.52.1 /BA/Kabine/Multifunktionshebel/NEUE Ausführung/Multifunktionshebel BM 420 / 500 NEU Teil 1 ab Bj.2010 @ 41\mod_1271322262987_78.doc @ 370234

5.16.1 In Field Mode Only

2

1

16

24

10

3 15

15

23

13 14

17

16

25

11

9

22

6

12

18a 18b

4

5

7

19

8

20

21

BM 500 0107

Fig.62

1

2

Switch off all mowing unit drives

Retrieve pre-setting "I" cutting height (optional)

3

4

5

6

Retrieve pre-setting "II" cutting height (optional)

To lower left mower: Hold down the "12" key and switch from transport position to headland position; without "12" key from headland position to working position

To lift left mower: Hold down the "12" key and switch from headland position to transport position; without "12" key from working position to headland position

To lower right mower: Hold down the "12" key and switch from transport position to headland position; without "12" key from headland position to working position

7

8

To lift right mower: Hold down the "12" key and switch from headland position to transport position; without "12" key from working position to headland position

Lift front mower: Hold down the "12" key and switch from headland position to transport position; without "12" key from working position to headland position

9 To lift all mowers: with "12" key pressed, lift all mowers from headland position to transport position. Without the "12" key, lift all mowers from working position to headland position.

10 To lower all mowers: with "12" key pressed, lower all mowers from transport position to headland position. Without the "12" key, lower all mowers from headland position to working position.

92

Cabin

Pos: 14.52.2 /BA/Kabine/Multifunktionshebel/NEUE Ausführung/Hinweis die Tasten (5,7 und 8) haben 2 Schaltstufen. @ 41\mod_1271319271175_78.doc @ 369966

Note

The (5, 7 and 8) keys have 2 steps.

When the first step is pressed, the mowing unit is raised stepwise (as long as the key is held down) from working position to headland position.

Pressing the second step one time lifts the mowing unit automatically from working position to headland position.

Pos: 14.52.4 /BA/Kabine/Multifunktionshebel/NEUE Ausführung/Multifunktionshebel BM 420 NEU Teil 2 @ 49\mod_1286948200906_78.doc @ 463561

11 Lower front mower: Hold down the "12" key and switch from transport position to headland position; without "12" key from headland position to working position

12 Additional function for keys "4 to 11"

15 Activation key for Autopilot (optional)

17 Additional function: Mowing units - release

19 Increase engine speed inching until nominal speed is reached

20 Switch from nominal speed to idle speed and vice versa

21 Reduce engine speed inching until idle speed

Pos: 14.52.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

24 Sideshift right (optional)

25 Sideshift left (optional)

93

Cabin

Pos: 14.52.6 /BA/Kabine/Multifunktionshebel/NEUE Ausführung/Multifunktionshebel (Fortsetzung) BM 500 @ 41\mod_1271256276293_78.doc @ 369225

5.16.2 Multi-Function Lever (Continued)

5.16.2.1 Driving

E F

D G

H

J

K

L

M

15

23

17

16

A

Pos: 14.53 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

B

C

BM 500 0108

Fig.63

15 Actuation key for travelling gear

16 Selector switch for acceleration ramp

A Acceleration (in forward travel) / Deceleration (in reverse) / Start travelling gear with actuation key (15) pressed

B - Multi-function lever – central position

C - Acceleration (in reverse) / Deceleration (in forward travel) / Start travelling gear with actuation key (15) pressed

D - Deceleration to 0 km/h / Fast reversing with actuation key (15) pressed (in field operation only)

E - Multi-function lever – central position

F - Switch on cruise control / Save current speed for cruise control – press activation key (15) and rotate multi-function lever in direction F

G - Without (17) key pressed, switch off left mower drive / with (17) key pressed, switch on left mower drive

H - Central position

J - Without (17) key pressed, switch off right mower drive / with (17) key pressed, switch on right mower drive

K - Without (17) key pressed, switch off front mower drive / with (17) key pressed, switch on front mower drive

L - Central position

M - Without (17) key pressed, switch off all mower drives / with (17) key pressed, switch on all mower drives

94

Cabin

Pos: 14.54.1 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanlage/Heizung/Klimatronik / Heizung Übersicht @ 0\mod_1195728661475_78.doc @ 2453

5.17 Klimatronik / heating

5.17.1 Control and display elements

The Klimatronik is a control unit for air conditioning and heating systems in modern vehicle cabs. The driver’s work is made easier through clear, intuitive control of all tasks and optimum climate control in the driver’s cab.

Note

If the electrical power supply to the control unit is interrupted, the control unit automatically performs a self test after power is restored. After the self test is complete, the last setting to be saved appears.

Fig. 64

4

5

6

7

8

Key function key

1

2

Key to switch air conditioning on and off

Key to adjust the desired cab temperature upward.

Alternative: Manual settings "Up"

3

Key to adjust the desired cab temperature downward.

Alternative: Manual settings "Down"

Key to switch the controller on and off

Key to switch the evaporator fan speed Manual / Automatic

Key to switch REHEAT mode on and off (demoisturising the cab air)

Covered key to switch the temperature display to ° Fahrenheit

95

Cabin

LCD function of LCD display

Pos: 14.54.2 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 65

9

Icon indicates REHEAT mode

10

Icon indicates air conditioning

11

Icon indicates fully automatic mode is turned on

12

Bar indicates fan speed in manual mode

13

Icon indicates manual fan mode

14

4-place seven segment display shows setpoint value or error code

15

Icon indicates unit of measure for temperature (°)

16

Indicates the icon for vehicle cab

96

Pos: 14.54.3 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanlage/Heizung/Anlage einschalten @ 0\mod_1195729216365_78.doc @ 2491

5.17.2 Operation

5.17.3 Switching on the System

Cabin

Fig. 66

Press the key

Note

After the system is switched on, the control unit performs a self test and the software version is displayed for about 5 seconds, for example:

Then the operating hours of the air conditioning system are displayed for 5 seconds (for example 6 operating hours).

Then the last saved setting appears in the display.

Pos: 14.54.4 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanlage/Heizung/Einstellen der gewünschten Kabinentemperatur @ 0\mod_1195729761475_78.doc @ 2510

5.17.4 Setting the Desired Cab Temperature

Pos: 14.54.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 67

The set cab temperature is shown in °C, for example 26°C. The control unit is in Automatic mode.

To lower the desired cab temperature to 21°C, for example, press the value appears in the display. (press key 5 x) key until the desired

97

Cabin

Pos: 14.54.6 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanlage/Heizung/Klimabetrieb Ein- / Ausschalten @ 0\mod_1195730018068_78.doc @ 2529

5.17.5 Switch air conditioning On / Off

Pos: 14.54.7 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 68

You can switch on the air conditioning with the key.

Air conditioning is now turned on; icon indicates air conditioning.

The compressor is turned on by the control unit if necessary.

Pressing the icon disappears.

key again turns off air conditioning (compressor is deactivated). The

98

Pos: 14.54.8 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanlage/Heizung/REHEAT - Betrieb Ein- / Ausschalten @ 0\mod_1195733396084_78.doc @ 2548

5.17.6 Switch REHEAT mode On / Off

Cabin

Fig. 69

REHEAT mode = (demoisturising the cab air)

Switch on REHEAT mode with the

The display appears like this:

key.

Pos: 14.54.9 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

REHEAT mode is now turned on. The icon indicates REHEAT mode.

Note

The compressor is permanently turned on. The evaporator fan speed is raised to 100%. If necessary, the control unit turns the heating on to keep room temperature at the setpoint value.

REHEAT mode is automatically limited to 10 minutes.

Pressing the key again turns off REHEAT mode.

The icon no longer appears.

99

Cabin

Pos: 14.54.10 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanlage/Heizung/Manuelles Einstellen der Verdampferlüfterdrehzahl @ 0\mod_1195733653506_78.doc @ 2567

5.17.7 Manual setting of evaporator fan speed

Fig. 70

Pos: 14.54.11 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Switch on manual evaporator fan speed with the key.

The manual setting for fan speed is now active. The currently set fan speed appears in bar display (full bar display = 100%). The AUTO icon no longer appears.

Fan flashes for 5 seconds. During this time the fan speed can be increased with the key or lowered with the key in increments of 10%.

Note

The lowest fan speed that can be set is 30% (three bars are displayed).

Pressing the and

key twice reactivates AUTO mode. The

icons are no longer displayed.

Auto icon appears ; the

100

Pos: 14.54.12 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanlage/Heizung/Umschalten der Temperaturanzeige in ° Fahrenheit @ 0\mod_1195734049209_78.doc @ 2586

5.17.8 Switching the Temperature Display to ° Fahrenheit

Cabin

8

Fig. 71

The current set-point temperature is shown in ° Celsius.

Press and hold the covered key (8) and press the

Fahrenheit.

key as well. The display switches to °

The current set-point temperature is shown in ° Fahrenheit.

Pos: 14.54.13 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanlage/Heizung/Anzeige von Störungen im Display @ 0\mod_1195734281959_78.doc @ 2605

Pressing the (8) key and

5.17.9

key again switches the display back to ° Celsius.

Showing Faults in the Display

Error code (F0)´

Fig. 72

Error in room temperature sensor is indicated by flashing indicator ( F0 ).

Note

The control unit has recorded an error in the room temperature sensor. Controller is no longer ready for operation.

Cause of sensor fault:

Short circuit or interruption in sensor line, plug connection on the sensor or control unit , temperature sensor defective. The controller will not be ready for operation again until the error is eliminated. Then the sensor fault no longer appears.

Note

If a sensor fault occurs, the controller continues working with the setting that was valid before the fault was recorded.

101

Cabin

Error code (FI)

Pos: 14.55 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig 73

Error in blow-out temperature sensor is indicated by flashing indicator (F1).

Note

The control unit has recorded an error in the blow-out temperature sensor. The control is no longer ready for operation.

Cause of sensor fault:

Short circuit or interruption in sensor line, plug connection on the sensor or control unit , temperature sensor defective. The controller will not be ready for operation again until the error is eliminated. Then the sensor fault no longer appears.

Note

If a sensor fault occurs, the controller continues working with the setting that was valid before the fault was recorded.

102

Pos: 14.56 /BA/Kabine/Verstellbare Lüfterdüsen BM 500 @ 42\mod_1272517641193_78.doc @ 378245

5.18 Adjustable Fan Nozzles

1

1

1

3

Pos: 14.57 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig.74

Fan nozzles (1), adjustable

Note

Set the fan nozzles in such a way that the panes do not mist up.

Cabin

1

BM 500 0184

103

Cabin

Pos: 14.58 /BA/Kabine/Radioeinbau @ 0\mod_1195735722428_78.doc @ 2644

5.19 Radio

1

Pos: 15 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BM 400 0215

Fig. 75:

1

ISO compartment for radio

Note

Telephones and radio equipment not connected to the outside antenna may lead to functional troubles in the vehicle's electronic system, thus jeopardising the operational safety of the vehicle.

104

===== Ende der Stückliste =====

Cabin

105

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/F-J/Info-Center „EasyTouch“ @ 0\mod_1195737815318_78.doc @ 2663

6

Pos: 1.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/U-Z/Übersicht @ 0\mod_1195651857513_78.doc @ 1671

Info centre "EasyTouch"

6.1.1 Overview

Pos: 1.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Info-Center Easy Touch Übersicht @ 0\mod_1195737934803_78.doc @ 2682

III

I

II

V

IV

Fig. 76

• I = Display

II = Keys

III = Keys

1 to

8

8 (1 - 8)

to D

D

(A - D)

Pos: 1.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

• V = Menu key

BM 400 0099

106

Pos: 1.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Allgemeine Beschreibung der Tasten_Drehpoti_Menütaste @ 0\mod_1195738501881_78.doc @ 2701

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 77

The Info Centre informs you about the current actions and the current operating condition of the machine. You can use the Info Centre to make settings for the machine and start or stop actions. Its main components are:

Keys 1-8

Keys 1-8 are used to activate the softkeys located in the right column (IV). For the assignment of the keys, see the illustration. If there is no softkey next to the key, it has no function.

Keys A-D

The keys A-D are used to activate the softkeys located in the line just above them (V). For the assignment of the keys, see the illustration. If there is no softkey above the key it has no function.

Rotary potentiometer (1)

The rotary potentiometer has two functions:

1

The rotary potentiometer can be turned to change settings and to select the desired menu in the menu level.

2

Pressing the rotary potentiometer activates and saves the settings.

Menu key (2)

You can use the key with the rotary potentiometer to call or close the menu level or to go to the preceding menu level. Holding the key down slightly longer takes you back to the basic screen.

1

107

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.7.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Display Beschreibung @ 0\mod_1195739127068_78.doc @ 2740

I

II III IV

5 6

VI

7 8

V

B C D BM 400 0114

Fig. 78

Display (screen display)

The display is divided up into the following sections:

Status line (I):

• Time, number of errors, status display of mowing units

Information section:

Engine information (II)

Travelling gear information (III)

Settings (IV and V)

Drive information (VI) (only in Field mode basic screen)

Pos: 1.7.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Informationsbereich BiG M 420 @ 51\mod_1288087964968_78.doc @ 477728

6.2 Information Section

Basic screen "Road travel" Field mode basic screen

100

75

50

25

0

100

75

50

25

0

Pos: 1.7.3 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig.79

After the ignition is turned on, depending on the position of the “Road / field” release switch, the basic screen “Road travel” or “Field mode” appears in the display.

108

Pos: 1.7.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Statuszeile BiG M 400 @ 0\mod_1195740052740_78.doc @ 2785

6.2.1 Status line (I)

I 15:36 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0102

Fig. 80

Pos: 1.7.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

= Error – at least one error occurred. The number of errors present appears before the icon.

= Central lubrication (lit briefly when switching from Road basic screen to Field basic screen).

Headland Position

Lateral mowing unit left

Front mowing unit Lateral mowing unit right

Drive off drive on Drive off drive on Drive off drive on

Working position

Folded up

109

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.7.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Motordaten BiG M 420 @ 51\mod_1288091299562_78.doc @ 477837

6.2.2 Motor Data (II) Information Section

II

1080

UPM

2

0

100

75

50

25

0

20 40

R

60 80 100

70°C

1

B

Fig.81

1080

C D

5 6

7 8

BM 500 0106

Road mode: 850 - 1650 rpm

0

Field mode: 850 - 1900 rpm

20 40 60 80 100

Engine capacity as %

Pos: 1.7.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Motordaten Teil2 BM420/500 @ 51\mod_1288091611546_78.doc @ 477863

Cooling water temperature display - if the cooling water temperature reaches the critical range, the background of the cooling water temperature display changes to red.

Fuel gauge (1 diesel fuel / 2 urea solution)

R

Reserve indicator (appears in the display if the diesel fuel or urea solution is less than

10% of the tank capacity)

Pos: 1.7.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

110

Pos: 1.7.9.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Fahrantriebsdaten (III)/Infobereich Fahrantriebsdaten (III) Bild BM 400 @ 29\mod_1251200813705_78.doc @ 281322

6.2.3 Information section of the travelling gear data (III)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

III

0.0

4

0.0

N km/h

5 6

7 8

B C D BM 400 0116

Fig. 82

Pos: 1.7.9.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Fahrantriebsdaten (III)/Tempomat @ 29\mod_1251199726596_78.doc @ 281172

Cruise control active; the number after the icon is the saved speed for Cruise control operation in km/h.

Pos: 1.7.9.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Fahrantriebsdaten (III)/Fahrgeschwindigkeit @ 29\mod_1251199875752_78.doc @ 281197

Travelling speed

Road mode: 0 - 40 km/h

Pos: 1.7.9.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Fahrantriebsdaten (III)/Beschleunigungsrampe @ 29\mod_1251199880768_78.doc @ 281222

Acceleration ramp

Cruise control inactive

Field mode: 0 - 19 km/h

1 = Lowest acceleration ramp

Pos: 1.7.9.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Fahrantriebsdaten (III)/Fahrtrichtung @ 29\mod_1251199885768_78.doc @ 281247

Direction of travel

2 = ...

3 = ...

= Highest acceleration ramp

Pos: 1.7.9.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Fahrantriebsdaten (III)/Antriebsart @ 29\mod_1251199893346_78.doc @ 281272

= Forward travel

Type of drive

= Neutral (stopped) = Reverse travel

Axle sep. active

(only possible in Field mode)

Parking brake is applied

Emergency mode; allows the driver to drive the vehicle out of the danger zone even if there are serious drive problems.

Pos: 1.7.9.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Fahrantriebsdaten (III)/Bergab - Modus @ 29\mod_1251199904408_78.doc @ 281297

Downhill mode

The Downhill mode symbol indicates to the driver that the speed of the machine is automatically restricted to 40 km/h when travelling downhill.

Pos: 1.7.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

111

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.7.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Einstellungen @ 0\mod_1195800021723_78.doc @ 2862

6.2.4 Information section of settings (IV and V)

I

II III IV

5 6

VI

V

B C D

Fig. 83

(see Chapter "Settings").

Pos: 1.7.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Antriebsdaten BiG M 400 @ 0\mod_1195801418567_78.doc @ 2886

6.2.5 Drive data information section (VI)

7 8

BM 400 0114

Pos: 1.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

5 6

VI

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0105

Fig. 84

Drive information appears only in the "Field mode" basic screen.

1100

Speed of drive left

1100

Speed of drive front

1100

Speed of drive right

880

Speed auger left

880

Speed auger right

112

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.9.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Schnellzugrifftasten am Grundbild @ 0\mod_1195803032020_78.doc @ 2907

6.3 Quick Access Keys in the Basic Screen

The quick access keys can be used to perform functions directly from the basic screen or to bring up the appropriate submenu.

Pos: 1.9.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulisch einstellbare Schnitthöhe Seite 1/2 Bild BiG M 420 @ 51\mod_1288093015437_78.doc @ 477966

6.3.1 Quick access "Hydraulically adjustable cutting height" (optional)

100

75

50

25

0

Fig. 85

Pos: 1.9.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulisch einstellbare Schnitthöhe Seite 1/2 Text BiG M 400/420 @ 51\mod_1288092208171_78.doc @ 477914

Appears only in basic screen "Field mode".

key brings up hydraulically adjustable cutting height.

Submenu "Hydraulically adjustable cutting height" appears.

1.

= saved values of pre-setting I

2. = saved values of pre-setting II

3. = current values of cutting height

You can use the

A and B

B keys to save pre-settings for cutting height.

I = Save pre-setting for Cutting height I

II = Save pre-setting II cutting height

Pos: 1.9.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

113

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.9.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulisch einstellbare Schnitthöhe Seite 2/2 BiG M 400/420 @ 46\mod_1283247964984_78.doc @ 447877

Activating keys 1-8 sets the inclination of the mowing units.

Fig. 86

Inclination Mowing units lateral left

Front mowing unit

Mowing units lateral right

Mowing unit all reduce

Key 5 Key Key Key 7 increase

Key 6 Key Key Key 8

Note

If All Mowing Units is selected, the inclination for the front mowing unit is set first. Then the lateral mowing units are automatically adjusted to the value of the front mowing unit.

key brings up the basic screen.

Pos: 1.9.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

114

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.9.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulisch einstellbare seitliche Federentlastung T1 BM400/420 @ 51\mod_1288093469796_78.doc @ 477992

6.3.2 Quick access "Hydraulically adjustable lateral spring compensation" (ground pressure)

(optional)

Appears only in basic screen "Field mode"

Lateral spring compensation can be used to adjust the ground pressure of the lateral mowing units to local conditions. In order to protect the sward, the load on the lateral mowing units must be relieved so that they do not jump when mowing, yet do not leave any brush marks on the ground.

Note

To set the pressure, lower both lateral mowing units to the ground and set the front axle to working position.

Pos: 1.9.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulisch einstellbare seitliche Federentlastung T2 Bild BM 420 @ 51\mod_1288094888453_78.doc @ 478070

100

75

50

25

0

Fig. 87

Pos: 1.9.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulisch einstellbare seitliche Federentlastung T3 BM 400/420 @ 51\mod_1288093474375_78.doc @ 478018

5 or

6

6 key brings up hydraulically adjustable lateral spring compensation.

Submenu "Hydraulically adjustable lateral spring compensation" appears.

(1) = saved values of pre-setting I

(2) = saved values of pre-setting II

(3) = current values of spring compensation

You can use the

A and

B

B keys to save pre-settings (I and II) for hydraulically adjustable lateral spring compensation (ground pressure).

I = Save pre-setting I

II = Save pre-setting II

key for

key for

Pos: 1.9.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

brings up pre-setting (I).

brings up pre-setting (II).

115

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.9.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulisch einstellbare seitliche Federentlastung T4 BM 400/420 @ 51\mod_1288093635187_78.doc @ 478044

Note

Different lateral mower weights for mowing units with roller conditioner and swath grouping

(BSS) Effect: Different group pressure.

With option "Mowing units with roller conditioner and swath grouping", the weight of the right mowing unit is greater than the weight of the left mowing unit. This is caused by the movement of the drive. Accordingly the compensation pressure must be set about 5 bar higher for the right mowing unit.

Pos: 1.9.12 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 88:

Activating keys 1-4 increases or reduces the pressure of the lateral mowing units.

Pressure Mowing units lateral left Mowing units lateral right reduce

Key Key increase

Key

High compensation pressure =

Lower compensation pressure =

Key lower ground pressure higher ground pressure

116

Pos: 1.9.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Kundendaten-Zähler @ 29\mod_1251274559046_78.doc @ 282105

6.3.3 Quick access "Customer Data Counter"

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 89

Appears in basic screen "Road mode and field mode" brings up the customer counter. the

B

key under softkey

Customer record (1)

Status display (2)

Counter stopped

A counter is activated

10

Freely usable numeric input field (for example to assign several different cultivated areas to the customer record)

Counter (active counters are highlighted colour)

= operating hour counter (h)

= working hours counter (h)

= surface counter (ha)

= kilometre counter (km)

= fuel consumption (l)

• (3)= absolute fuel consumption

• (4)= current average consumption (l/h)

Pos: 1.9.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Kundendaten-Zähler Infozeile @ 29\mod_1251277121718_78.doc @ 282418

Info line (5) (display information of the counter which is currently active)

Pos: 1.9.15 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Counter is activated

5.1 Display of the activated customer counter (e.g. Client 1).

5.2 Selected surface counter.

117

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.9.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Kundendatensatz (1) ändern bzw. neuanlegen @ 9\mod_1219756639600_78.doc @ 122535

6.3.4 Changing a customer record (1) or creating a new one

5 6

Pos: 1.9.17 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

1

7 8

2

B C D

BM4000109_1

Fig. 90

A total of 30 customer records can be created. Select the customer record you want to modify; select a free customer record to create a new entry with the and keys.

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting. The entry box is highlighted in colour.

Pressing the rotary potentiometer opens an alphanumeric input field.

You can change the customer record or enter a new one with the rotary potentiometer.

(To accept the desired alphanumeric value, press the rotary potentiometer.)

Note

Selecting the "ESC" symbol (1) and confirming causes the program to exit the input field without saving the entries or changes. Selecting the "Enter" symbol (2) and confirming causes the program to accept and save the entry or change. the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back

118

Pos: 1.9.18 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Zähler ein- bzw. ausschalten @ 9\mod_1219756842585_78.doc @ 122557

6.3.4.1 Switching the counter on or off

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.9.19 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 91 the and

6 keys to turn the counter on key brings up the basic screen.

and off .

119

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.9.20 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Kundenzähler löschen @ 29\mod_1251278493296_78.doc @ 282523

6.3.4.2 Delete customer counter

10

Only the counters of the selected cultivated area in the selected customer record (in the example shown here, the tenth cultivated area) are deleted.

Fig. 92 key (the information message “Delete?” appears)

Pos: 1.9.21 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

• Confirm the deletion process by pressing the key located under the softkey

• Abort the deletion process by pressing the key B located under the softkey

Note

Repeat deletion of the counters for each previously created cultivated area as necessary.

120

Pos: 1.9.22 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulische Achsfederung Straßenfahrt BM 420 @ 51\mod_1288095443500_78.doc @ 478096

6.3.5 Quick access "Hydraulic axle suspension"

6.3.5.1 From the "Road travel" basic screen

Info centre "EasyTouch"

100

75

50

25

0

Pos: 1.9.23 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 93

When travelling on public roads, the front axle must be lowered to reach a transport height of max. 4 m.

key lowers axle suspension with inching.

121

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.9.24 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulische Achsfederung Grundbild Bild BM 420 @ 51\mod_1288095909859_78.doc @ 478148

6.3.5.2 From the "Field mode" basic screen

100

75

50

25

0

Fig. 94

Pos: 1.9.25 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulische Achsfederung Grundbild Text BM 400/420 @ 51\mod_1288095723421_78.doc @ 478122 key brings up the "Hydraulic axle suspension" submenu.

The "Hydraulic axle suspension" menu appears.

key for

key to the or

6

key for

lifting axle suspension. (inching)

approaching mowing position. (inching)

lowering axle suspension. (inching)

= Sensor B20 axle suspension

= Sensor alive (axle suspension is located under the working position)

= Sensor not alive (axle suspension is located above the working position)

key brings up the basic screen.

Pos: 1.9.26 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

122

Pos: 1.9.27 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Einstellungen Maschine BM 420 @ 51\mod_1288096085453_78.doc @ 478174

6.3.6 Quick access "Machine settings"

Info centre "EasyTouch"

100

75

50

25

0

Fig. 95

Appears in basic screen "Road mode and field mode"

Pos: 1.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165 the key brings up menu level "Machine setting".

The "Machine settings" menu appears.

Note

For more information, see chapter "Machine settings"

123

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Menüebene Kurzüberblick @ 46\mod_1283255150984_78.doc @ 447983

6.4 Menu Level

1

2

3 3-1

3-4

4 4-1

4-2

4-3

4-4 4-4-1

4-4-2

4-4-3

5

Pos: 1.12 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 96

4-1-1

4-1-3

4-1-4

4-1-5

4-1-6

4-1-7

4-1-10

4-1-11

CAN

4-1-12

1-1

1-2

1-3

1-4

1-5

1-6

März

24

Montag

4-1-13

4-1-14

4-1-15

4-1-16

4-1-17

1-1-10

1-5-1

1-5-2

1-5-4

BM 4000018_2

124

Pos: 1.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Menüebene aufrufen @ 0\mod_1196058555821_78.doc @ 3161

6.4.2 Bringing up a Menu Level

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 97

• You can bring up a menu level with the

The display indicates the menu level.

The menu level is divided into five main menus: key on the rotary potentiometer.

= Main menu 1 "Settings"

= Main menu 2 "Counters"

= Main menu 3 "Maintenance"

= Main menu 4 "Service"

Pos: 1.14 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

= Main menu 5 "Basic screen"

• You can close the menu level that was called with on the rotary potentiometer.

125

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.15.1 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Hauptmenü „Einstellungen“ @ 0\mod_1196059117696_78.doc @ 3200

6.5 Main Menu 1 "Settings"

Pos: 1.15.2 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 98

The main menu level is active.

Select main menu 1 with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows menu level 1 "Settings".

The main menu, "Settings", is divided up into six menus:

= Menu 1-1 "Parameters"

= Menu 1-2 "Machine setting"

= Menu 1-3 "Units"

= Menu 1-4 "Language"

= Menu 1-5 "Display"

= Menu 1-6 "Date/time"

126

Pos: 1.15.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-1 Parameter Big M 400 / 500/Menü 1-1 Parameter BiG M 400 @ 9\mod_1219816874593_78.doc @ 122840

6.6 Menu 1-1 "Parameters"

Info centre "EasyTouch"

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0019_1

Fig. 99:

Main menu 1 "Settings" appears:

Select menu 1-1 "Parameters" with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display indicates the menu level "Parameters".

The "Parameter" menu is divided into two sub-menus:

Pos: 1.15.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

= Menu 1-1-10 "Work parameters"

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired menu.

Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the parameters of the selected menu to be displayed or the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

127

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.15.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-1 Parameter Big M 400 / 500/Eingabe von Parametern @ 41\mod_1271221822261_78.doc @ 368585

6.6.1 Entering parameters

Fig. 100

Note

As long as data is being read, the current process can be stopped by pressing the key next to the

softkey.

Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the input field.

You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the desired value.

When you press the rotary potentiometer, you exit the input field and the value that was entered is applied.

Note

To apply the default setting values, press the

5

key next to the softkey.

• To jump back to the screen that was previously displayed, press the 7 key next to the softkey.

Pos: 1.15.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Note

For additional information on the individual parameters, please refer to the parameter list in appendix "Parameter List".

128

Pos: 1.15.7 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-2 Einstellung Maschine Big M 400/Menü 1-2 Einstellung Maschine BM 420 @ 51\mod_1288096604859_78.doc @ 478200

6.7 Menu 1-2 "Machine setting"

Info centre "EasyTouch"

CV

50 cm

Semi

Fig. 101

Main menu 1 "Settings" appears:

• Select main menu 1-2 "Machine setting" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows menu level "Machine setting".

Pos: 1.15.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Menüerkärung für Seite 1 bis 2 @ 51\mod_1288100713546_78.doc @ 478278

The "Machine setting" menu is divided into 2 pages:

Explanation of menu for pages 1 to 2:

Pos: 1.15.9 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-2 Einstellung Maschine Big M 400/Menü 1-2 Menüerkärung Tasten Einstellung Maschine @ 28\mod_1250603053175_78.doc @ 275901

key to bring up the previous page of the "Machine setting" menu.

key to bring up the next page of the "Machine setting" menu. key brings up the basic screen.

You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting. The selection box is highlighted in colour.

Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the selection box.

You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the desired value.

Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you from the selection box

Pos: 1.15.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

129

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.15.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Einstellmöglichkeiten (Seite1/2) @ 51\mod_1288102352765_78.doc @ 478408

Setting options (page 1/2)

Pos: 1.15.12 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-2 Einstellung Maschine Big M 400/Menü 1-2 (Seite 1a) BiG M 400/420 @ 46\mod_1283260105593_78.doc @ 448172

Fig. 102

1) Select between

CV = tines conditioner and

CRI= roller conditioner

2) Setting for lifting mechanism, front axle on headland

Pos: 1.15.13 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Front axle can only be raised in manual mode.

Semi

The semi-automatic lifting mechanism moves the front axle into the operating position as soon as at least one mowing unit drive is connected.

Auto Automatic lifting:

The automatic lifting mechanism moves the front axle into the operating position,

• as soon as at least one mowing unit drive is connected or

• a mowing unit is lowered from the headland position into the operating position. In addition, the automatic lifting mechanism lifts the front axle again as soon as the

"lift all mowing units" function is actuated on the multi-function lever.

130

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos : 1. 15.14 / BA/I nf o-Cent er/Haupt menü 1 Eins tell ung en/1- 2 Ei nst ellung M aschi ne Big M 400/Menü 1-2 ( Seit e 1b/ 3) Bi G M 400 @ 46\ mod_1283258564343_78. doc x @ 448146

CV

50

cm

Semi

Pos : 1. 15.15 / BA/-----Seit enumbruc h------ @ 0\ mod_1196175311226_0. doc @ 4165

Pic. 103

3) Spring compensation setting (optional) hydraulically adjustable spring compensation switched on.

hydraulically adjustable spring compensation switched off.

4) Adjust overcut in cm / inch

5) Selection of mowing unit additional equipment (optional)

Both augers selected

Only right hand auger selected

Only left hand auger selected

No auger selected

Hay hood selected

6) Switch hydraulically adjustable cutting height on and off (optional) hydraulically adjustable cutting height switched on.

hydraulically adjustable cutting height switched off.

131

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.15.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Einstellmöglichkeiten (Seite2/2) @ 51\mod_1288101813937_78.doc @ 478356

Setting options (page 2/2)

Pos: 1.15.17 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-2 Einstellung Maschine Big M 400/Menü 1-2 Bild Fahrhebel NEU @ 41\mod_1271332044018_78.doc @ 370842

10 9

BM 500 0130

Fig.104

Pos: 1.15.18 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-2 Einstellung Maschine Big M 400/Menü 1-2 (Seite 2/3) Text BM 400/420/500 @ 51\mod_1288100911312_78.doc @ 478304

1) Setting time / distance control

The following descriptions refer to function (9,10) "Raise/lower all mowing units" on the multifunction lever.

Time control (determines the delay time of lifting or lowering the lateral mowing units to the front mowing unit)

Distance control (determines the distance still to be covered before the lateral mowing units are raised or lowered to the front mowing unit).

2) Input field: Delay time to raise lateral mowing units.

3) Input field: Delay time to lower lateral mowing units.

4) Input field: Distance to be covered before lifting lateral mowing units.

5) Input field: Distance to be covered before lowering lateral mowing units.

Pos: 1.15.19 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

132

Pos: 1.15.20 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Menü 1-3 „Einheiten“ @ 0\mod_1197532786335_78.doc @ 24301

6.7.1 Menu 1-3 "Units"

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.15.21 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 105

Main menu 1 "Settings" appears:

Select menu 1-3 "Units" with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display indicates the selected measuring units. The currently set measuring unit is highlighted in colour.

= Anglo-American units active

= English/American units active

= Metric (SI) units

= Metric (SI) units inactive

Setting the measuring units:

You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting.

Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied. (The selection box is highlighted in colour.)

133

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.15.22 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Menü 1-4 „Sprache“ @ 0\mod_1197534666632_78.doc @ 24320

6.7.2 Menu 1-4 "Language"

Fig. 106

Main menu 1 "Settings" appears:

Select menu 1-4 "Language" with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows the language selection.

Set language

(1) = currently set language

(2)= shows the selected language

You can select the language you want with the rotary potentiometer.

To confirm the selection, press the rotary potentiometer.

Pos: 1.15.23 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165 the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

Note

The selected language will be active after the machine is restarted (ignition off and on again)

134

Pos: 1.15.24 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Menü 1-5 „Display“ @ 9\mod_1219818725062_78.doc @ 122955

6.7.3 Menu 1-5 "Display"

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.15.25 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM4000225

Fig. 107

Main menu 1 "Settings" appears:

Select menu 1-5 "Display" with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows menu level 1-5 "Display".

The "Display" menu is divided into two sub-menus:

= menu 1-5-1 "Contrast"

= menu 1-5-2 "Beeper"

= menu 1-5-4 "Direction of Rotation" the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

135

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.15.26 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Menü 1-5-1 „Kontrast“ @ 9\mod_1219844730062_78.doc @ 124157

6.7.4 Menu 1-5-1 "Contrast"

Fig. 108

You can adjust the brightness of the display in the "Contrast" Diagnostics menu.

Menu 1-5 "Display" is active.

Select menu 1-5-1 "Contrast" with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

The "Contrast" setting appears.

= Day design

= Night design

The value after the symbols /

Setting and saving the brightness

indicates the set brightness value.

Pos: 1.15.27 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

The higher the value after the

/ symbols the greater the brightness of the display.

You can use the rotary potentiometer to make the desired selection. (The selection box is highlighted in colour.)

Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the selection box. (The selection box is highlighted in colour.)

Turning the rotary potentiometer increases or reduces the value.

Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you from the selection box. the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

136

Pos: 1.15.28 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Menü 1-5-2 Beeper @ 41\mod_1271226151715_78.doc @ 368686

6.7.5 Menu 1-5-2 Beeper

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.15.29 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Pic. 109

The acoustic signal (beeper) for alarm messages, information messages and for pressing a key can be activated and deactivated in this menu. For alarm messages and information messages the duration of the tone can be set additionally.

Menu 1-5 "Display" is active.

Select menu 1-5-2 "Beeper" with the rotary potentiometer

Press the rotary potentiometer

The display indicates the beeper settings.

= Alarm Message

= Information message

= Key pressed

Beeper function

= Beeper inactive

Activate / deactivate beeper

= Beeper active = Beeper limited by time

Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the selection box. (The selection box is highlighted in colour)

You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the desired function

Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you from the selection box

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back

137

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.15.30 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Menü 1-5-2 Beeper zeitlich begrenzen @ 41\mod_1271228361090_78.doc @ 368764

6.7.6 Beeper limited by time

Pos: 1.15.31 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 110

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the selection box. (The selection box is highlighted in colour.)

You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting (

Press the rotary potentiometer (a new input field appears).

).

Press the rotary potentiometer to jump to a new input field. (The input box is highlighted in colour.)

Press the rotary potentiometer. (The input box is highlighted in colour.)

You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the desired value.

Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you from the selection box.

138

Pos: 1.15.32 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Menü 1-5-4 Drehrichtung @ 9\mod_1219834882312_78.doc @ 123583

6.7.7 Menu 1-5-4 Direction of Rotation

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 111

The direction of rotation of the rotary potentiometer for scrolling can be changed in this menu.

The rotary potentiometer is set in the factory so that turning it to the left scrolls down and turning it to the right scrolls up (as indicated by the blue arrow) (1).

Menu 1-5 "Display" is active.

Select menu 1-5-4 "Direction of rotation" with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows a list for which the direction of rotation can be changed for the rotary potentiometer.

key to change the direction of rotation for the parameter list

Pos: 1.15.33 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

key to change the direction of rotation for input fields. the or 6 key to change the direction of rotation for menus.

Note

The blue arrow (1) indicates the direction of rotation for the rotary potentiometer to scroll down.

key under the softkey brings up the basic screen.

To apply the default setting values, press the key under the softkey.

139

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.15.34 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Menü 1-6 „Datum/Uhrzeit“ @ 0\mod_1197537588241_78.doc @ 25174

6.7.8 Menu 1-6 Date/time

Pos: 1.16 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 112

Main menu 1 "Settings" appears:

Select menu 1-6 "Date/time" with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows the date and the time.

To set date/time

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to highlighted in colour. select the desired setting. The entry box is

Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the input field.

Set the desired date/time with the rotary potentiometer.

Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you from the selection field.

• Pressing takes you one menu level back.

140

Pos: 1.17.1 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 2 Zähler/Hauptmenü 2 „Zähler“ @ 0\mod_1197538825007_78.doc @ 25234

6.8 Main Menu 2 Counters

Info centre "EasyTouch"

6.8.1

Pos: 1.17.2 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 113

You can bring up a menu level with the

Press the rotary potentiometer. key on the rotary potentiometer.

Select main menu 2 "Counter" with the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows various counters.

Counter level (sets)

= total bale counter (cannot be deleted)

= counter level 1 (can be deleted)

= counter level 2 (can be deleted)

= counter level 3 (can be deleted)

Machine Data Counter

Counter (active counters are highlighted colour)

= operating hour counter (h)

= working hours counter (h)

= surface counter (ha)

= odometer (both road and field mode)

= fuel consumption (l)

141

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.17.3 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 2 Zähler/Hauptmenü 2 Löschen der Maschinendatenzähler @ 0\mod_1197539919085_78.doc @ 25253

6.8.1.1

Deleting the Machine Data Counters (Sets 1 to 3)

Fig. 114

Machine data for counter levels (sets) 1 to 3 can be deleted in this menu.

You can bring up a menu level with the key on the rotary potentiometer.

Select main menu 2 "Counter" with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows various counters. deleted. the key for or the key to select the counter level (1) to be key under the softkey deletes all counters in a set. (Only the counters of sets 1 to 3 can be deleted.)

6.8.2

key under the

Switching to Customer Data Counters softkey brings up the basic screen

Pos: 1.18 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

• Pressing softkey menu. brings up the "Customer data counter"

For more information, see Section "Customer Data Counters"

142

Pos: 1.19.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3/Hauptmenü 3 „Wartung“ BiG M 400 @ 46\mod_1283264566453_78.doc @ 448281

6.9 Main Menu 3 Maintenance

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.19.2 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 115

You can bring up a menu level with the key

Press the rotary potentiometer. on the rotary potentiometer.

Select main menu 3 "Maintenance" with the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows menu level 3 "Maintenance".

The main menu “Maintenance” is divided up into two menus:

=Menu 3-1 "Calibration of cutting height"

= Menu 3-2 „Manual mode“ the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

143

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.19.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-1/Menü 3-1 „Kalibrierung Schnitthöhe“ BiG M 400 @ 46\mod_1283265079671_78.doc @ 448307

6.9.1 Menu 3-1 "Calibration of cutting height"

Danger! - Unexpected switching on of drives

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Travelling gear release switch must be switched off.

• Observe the following instructions very precisely!

The sensors have been adjusted to record cutting height in the factory. Heavy demand and the setting of components may cause an offset in the cutting pattern of the right / left and front mowing unit. If this happens, the sensors must be recalibrated.

Note

Perform calibration on an even and solid surface.

Switch off the travelling gear release switch

You can use the

C

"Hydraulic axle suspension" key to move from the basic screen to mowing position. (See chapter "Quick Access to Hydraulic Axle Suspension".)

Use the multi-function lever to move the 3 mowing units into working position (float setting).

144

Adjust all mowing units to 0°.

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.19.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 116

To do this:

You can bring up a menu level with the key on the rotary potentiometer.

Select main menu 3 "Maintenance" with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

Select menu 3-1 "Calibration of cutting height" with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows the cutting height setting.

145

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.19.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-1/Menü 3-1 Alle Mähwerke auf 0° einstellen ausrichten @ 46\mod_1283317596765_78.doc @ 448365

Aligning the Mowing Units

Fig. 117

Front mowing unit:

• Place a manual spirit level centred on the cutter bar.

• Use

1 or

Lateral mowing unit right:

2 key to align the cutter bar horizontally.

• Place a manual spirit level centred on the cutter bar.

• Use

3 or

4

Lateral mowing unit left:

• key to align the cutter bar horizontally.

Place a manual spirit level centred on the cutter bar.

Pos: 1.19.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165 or

6

6 key to align the cutter bar horizontally.

1 2

Loosen the angle of rotation sensors on the right and left mowing unit and set them in the oblong hole until a value (1) of about 2900 mV to 3100 mV appears in the display

(calibration screen).

Screw the angle of rotation sensors tightly into place.

Save sensor value (2) for inclination 0°

Note

Turn the rotary potentiometer to jump to the appropriate input field (2) (the input field is highlighted in colour).

Press the rotary potentiometer. (The input box is highlighted in colour.)

When you press the rotary potentiometer again, the value (1) for inclination 0° is applied in the input field (2).

The sensor for the front mowing unit is not adjustable. However, the value must be accepted at this point.

146

Pos: 1.19.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-4/BM 400/Menü 3-4 „Handbetrieb“ BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283322224656_78.doc @ 448391

6.9.2 Menu 3-4 „Manual mode“

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.19.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 118

Under this menu item, mowing units can be lowered (inching) from transport into headland position and further into working position with the display. Or raised from working position into headland position and further into transport position.

Note

Lifting/lowering the mowing units is inching, which means there is no float position for lower mowing units.

You can bring up a menu level with the key on the rotary potentiometer.

Select main menu 3 "Maintenance" with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

• Select menu 3-4 "Manual mode" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display indicates Manual mode.

147

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.19.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-4/BM 400/Menü 3-4 Symbolerklärung @ 0\mod_1197552930351_78.doc @ 26011

Explanation of symbols:

Pos: 1.19.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 119

= raise front mowing unit inching with the

= lower front mowing unit inching with the key. key.

= fold down left mowing unit inching from transport position to headland position with the key.

= fold down right mowing unit inching from transport position to headland position with the key.

= lower left mowing unit inching from headland position to working position with the key.

5

= lower right mowing unit inching from headland position to working position with the key.

6

= raise left mowing unit inching from working position to transport position with the key.

7

= raise right mowing unit inching from working position to transport position with the key.

8

148

Pos: 1.19.11 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Statusanzeige der allgemeinen Sensoren (2) @ 0\mod_1197556508007_78.doc @ 26092

6.9.3 Status display of general sensors (2)

Pos: 1.19.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-4/BM 400/Menü 3-4 Sensor B14_15_48_49 @ 9\mod_1219909987241_78.doc @ 124321

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 120

= Sensor B15 position mowing unit left

= Sensor B14 position mowing unit right

= Sensor B49 position transport position mowing unit left

= Sensor B48 position transport position mowing unit right

Pos: 1.19.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Statusanzeige der allgemeinen Sensoren @ 0\mod_1197556322007_78.doc @ 26073

Pos: 1.19.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Aufrufen Grundbild/Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197556942913_78.doc @ 26130

= Broken cable sensor

= Sensor alive

= Sensor not alive

= Sensor short circuit key brings up the basic screen.

Pos: 1.20 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

149

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-1/Hauptmenü 4 Service @ 0\mod_1197557899632_78.doc @ 26358

6.10 Main Menu 4 Service

Pos: 1.21.2 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 121

You can bring up a menu level with the

key o

n the rotary potentiometer.

Select main menu 4 "Service" with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows menu level 4 "Service".

The main menu "Service" is divided up into four menus:

= Menu 4-1 "Diagnostics"

= Menu 4-2 "Error list"

= Menü 4-3 "Fitter's section (passwordprotected")

= Menu 4-4 "Information" the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

150

Pos: 1.21.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-1/Menü 4-1 „Diagnose“ BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283322738812_78.doc @ 448447

6.10.1 Menu 4-1 Diagnostics

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Pic. 122

Main menu 4 "Service" is called.

Select main menu 4-1 with the rotary potentiometer

Press the rotary potentiometer

The display shows menu level 4-1 "Diagnostics".

The "Diagnostics" main menu is divided into thirteen menus:

= Menu 4-1 "Front axle"

= Menu 4-1-3 "Spring compensation"

= Menu 4-1-4 "Cutting height"

= Menu 4-1-5 "Swath hood"

= Menu 4-1-6 "Levelling system"

= Menu 4-1-7 “Front guard flaps"

= Menu 4-1-10 "Work"

= Menu 4-1-11 "CAN bus"

= Menu 4-1-12 “Traction drive"

= Menu 4-1-13 "Electronics"

= Menu 4-1-14 "Diesel engine"

= Menu 4-1-15 "Joystick"

= Menu 4-1-16 "Control unit console"

= Menu 4-1-17 "Terminal"

Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back

151

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-1/Menü 4-1 Anzeige nicht erfüllter Freigabebedingungen für die Diagnose @ 0\mod_1197560595085_78.doc @ 26530

6.10.2 Display of Release Conditions Not Met for Diagnostics

5 6

Pos: 1.21.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0120

Fig. 123

Menu field (I) shows conditions that have not yet been met but which must be met to be able to perform diagnostics. An appropriate remedy must be found in each case.

2000

RPM

Diesel engine speed not at 2000 rpm

GO

Diesel engine has not been started

STOP

Diesel engine is not off

V > 0

Speed of vehicle is not correct

Switch the axle separation release switch on or off

Switch the release switch autopilot on or off

Switch the travelling gear release switch on or off

Switch the road/field release switch on or off

Turn release switch for parking brake on or off

Seat switch (driver's seat is unoccupied)

Open or close door

152

Pos: 1.21.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-1/Menü 4-1 Anzeige möglicher Störungen für die Diagnose BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197877645252_78.doc @ 29595

6.10.3 Display of possible faults for diagnostics

Info centre "EasyTouch"

5 6

Pos: 1.21.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

7 8

B C D

Fig. 124:

The faults listed below may appear in menu field (I).

BM 400 0121

ADM1

= Error CAN to ADM 1

BEK

= Error CAN to CU

DIOM

= Error CAN to DIOM

= Error CAN to Joystick

KMC1

= Error CAN to KMC1

SD

= Error CAN to SD

153

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.9.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-1/Menü 4-1-1 „Diagnose Achsfederung“ BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283323788093_78.doc @ 448535

6.10.4 Menu 4-1-1 Diagnostics of axle suspension

Fig. 125

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

Select menu 4-1-1 "Diagnostics of axle suspension" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Axle suspension diagnostics appears.

The "Axle suspension" diagnostics menu is divided into 2 pages.

Page 1: Sensor test

Page 2: Actuator test

Pos: 1.21.9.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.doc @ 26549

Menu control for pages 1 to 2:

Note

Pos: 1.21.9.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.doc @ 26587

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics" key to bring up the next page of the menu.

B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 1.21.9.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

154

Pos: 1.21.9.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-1/Sensor B20 Achsfederung @ 0\mod_1197610185837_78.doc @ 26645

Sensor Test (page 1/2)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 126

Status display of general sensors (2)

= Sensor B20 axle suspension

Pos: 1.21.9.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Statusanzeige der allgemeinen Sensoren @ 0\mod_1197556322007_78.doc @ 26073

= Broken cable sensor

= Sensor alive

= Sensor not alive

= Sensor short circuit

Pos: 1.21.9.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/2) @ 0\mod_1197610625431_78.doc @ 26684

Actuator test (page 2/2)

Pos: 1.21.9.8 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 1.21.9.9 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755

CAUTION!

Pos: 1.21.9.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Note

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

Pos: 1.21.9.11 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

155

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.9.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-1/Aktorentest Achsfederung BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197611281618_78.doc @ 26741

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the “Axle suspension” function.

1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0041

Fig. 127

(1) Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 1.21.9.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 1.21.9.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-1/Tabelle Achsfederung BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197611724790_78.doc @ 26779

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to axle suspension.

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y19 Main

Y15 Lifting axle suspension

Y16 Lowering axle suspension

5 6

Pos: 1.21.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

156

Pos: 1.21.11.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-3/Menü 4-1-3 „Diagnose Federendtlastung" @ 46\mod_1283325482906_78.doc @ 448591

6.10.5 Menu 4-1-3 Diagnostics of spring compensation

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 128

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

Select menu 4-1-3 "Diagnostics of

Press the rotary potentiometer. spring compensation" with the rotary potentiometer.

Spring compensation diagnostics appears.

The "Spring compensation" diagnostics menu is divided into 3 pages.

Page 1: Sensor Test

Page 2: Actuator test

Page 3: Actuator test

Pos: 1.21.11.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.doc @ 26549

Menu control for pages 1 to 3

Note

Pos: 1.21.11.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.doc @ 26587

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics" key to bring up the next page of the menu.

B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 1.21.11.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

157

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.11.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-3/Sensortest Federentlastung (2) (Seite 1/3) @ 0\mod_1197617848837_78.doc @ 28267

Sensor test spring compensation (2) (page 1/3)

Pos: 1.21.11.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 129:

The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the spring compensation function. green

Sensor inactive transparent

Sensor not OK red

Description

B44

Spring compensation left

B45

Spring compensation right

158

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.11.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/3) @ 0\mod_1197618444025_78.doc @ 28286

Actuator test (page 2/3)

Pos: 1.21.11.8 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 1.21.11.9 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for

Pos: 1.21.11.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722 the actuator test, need to be realised.

Note

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

Pos: 1.21.11.11 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

159

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.11.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-3/Aktorentest Federentlastung (2/3) @ 0\mod_1197618876212_78.doc @ 28305

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Spring compensation” function.

Fig. 130

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2.

Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 1.21.11.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Pos: 1.21.11.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Tabelle Aktoren Hauptventile_Zusatsventil1+2 BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197619057915_78.doc @ 28325

Actuator turned on

Note

The status displays described here apply to all actuators related to valves (main valve, additional valve1 and additional valve2).

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y19 Main

Y30 Additional valve 1

Y41 Additional valve 2

Pos: 1.21.11.15 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

5 6

160

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.11.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 3/3) @ 0\mod_1197620396431_78.doc @ 28345

Actuator test (page 3/3)

Pos: 1.21.11.17 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 1.21.11.18 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755

CAUTION!

Pos: 1.21.11.19 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Note

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

Pos: 1.21.11.20 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

161

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.11.21 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-3/Aktorentest Federentlastung (3/3) @ 0\mod_1197621399243_78.doc @ 28384

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Spring compensation” function.

1 2

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0045

Fig. 131

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2.

Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 1.21.11.22 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 1.21.11.23 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-3/Tabelle Aktoren Federentlastung @ 0\mod_1197620752884_78.doc @ 28364

Note

The status displays described here apply to all actuators related to spring compensation.

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y31 Spring compensation right

Y42 Spring compensation left

Pos: 1.21.12 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

162

Pos: 1.21.13.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Menü 4-1-4 Diagnose Schnitthöhe Bild BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283328540437_78.doc @ 448674

6.10.6 Menu 4-1-4 Diagnostics of cutting height

4-1-4

Info centre "EasyTouch"

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0052_1

Fig. 132

Pos: 1.21.13.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Menü 4-1-4 Diagnose Schnitthöhe Text BM 400/500 @ 30\mod_1251361156886_78.doc @ 284896

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

Select menu 4-1-4 "Diagnostics of cutting height

Press the rotary potentiometer.

Cutting height diagnostics appears.

" with the rotary potentiometer.

The "Cutting height" diagnostics menu is divided into 4 pages.

Page 1: Sensor test

Page 2: Actuator test

Page 3: Actuator test

Page 4: Actuator test

Pos: 1.21.13.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.doc @ 26549

Menu control for pages 1 to 4

Note

Pos: 1.21.13.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.doc @ 26587

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics" key to bring up the next page of the menu.

B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 1.21.13.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

163

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.13.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Sensortest Schnitthöhe (2) (Seite 1/4) BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283329291171_78.doc @ 448702

Sensor test cutting height (2) (page 1/4)

Pos: 1.21.13.7 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 133

The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the function of the cutting height.

green

Sensor inactive transparent

Sensor not OK red

Description

B43 Cutting height – front mowing unit

B42 Cutting height – right lateral mowing unit

B41 Cutting height – left lateral mowing unit

164

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.13.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/4) @ 0\mod_1197622785056_78.doc @ 28464

Actuator test (page 2/4)

Pos: 1.21.13.9 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 1.21.13.10 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for

Pos: 1.21.13.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722 the actuator test, need to be realised.

Note

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

Pos: 1.21.13.12 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

165

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.13.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Der Aktortest dient zum Testen, der an der Maschine für die Funktion „Schnitthöhe“, verbauten Aktore @ 30\mod_1251366727948_78.doc @ 285519

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Cutting height” function.

Pos: 1.21.13.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Aktorentest Schnitthöhe (2/4) Bild BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283339395546_78.doc @ 449317

1

2

5 6

7 8

B C D BM 400 0047_1

Fig. 134

Pos: 1.21.13.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Anzeige Spannung/Stromfluss @ 30\mod_1251367035870_78.doc @ 285544

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2.

Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 1.21.13.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Pos: 1.21.13.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Tabelle Aktoren Hauptventile_Zusatsventil1+2 BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197619057915_78.doc @ 28325

Actuator turned on

Note

The status displays described here apply to all actuators related to valves (main valve, additional valve1 and additional valve2).

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y19 Main

Y30 Additional valve 1

Y41 Additional valve 2

Pos: 1.21.13.18 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

5 6

166

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.13.19 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 3/4) @ 0\mod_1197622875243_78.doc @ 28484

Actuator test (page 3/4)

Pos: 1.21.13.20 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 1.21.13.21 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for

Pos: 1.21.13.22 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722 the actuator test, need to be realised.

Note

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

Pos: 1.21.13.23 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

167

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.13.24 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Der Aktortest dient zum Testen, der an der Maschine für die Funktion „Schnitthöhe“, verbauten Aktore @ 30\mod_1251366727948_78.doc @ 285519

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Cutting height” function.

Pos: 1.21.13.25 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Aktorentest Schnitthöhe (3/4) Bild BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283340117671_78.doc @ 449399

1

2

2

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0048_1

Fig. 135

Pos: 1.21.13.26 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Anzeige Spannung/Stromfluss @ 30\mod_1251367035870_78.doc @ 285544

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2.

Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 1.21.13.27 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 1.21.13.28 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Tabelle Aktoren Schnitthöhe 3/4 @ 46\mod_1283340572046_78.doc @ 449425

Note

The status displays described here apply to all Actuators related to cutting height.

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y34 Cutting height right 1

Y36 Cutting height right 2

Y37 Cutting height – front mowing unit 1

5 6

Y38 Cutting height – front mowing unit 2

Pos: 1.21.13.29 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

7 8

168

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.13.30 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 4/4) @ 0\mod_1197622923400_78.doc @ 28504

Actuator test (page 4/4)

Pos: 1.21.13.31 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 1.21.13.32 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for

Pos: 1.21.13.33 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722 the actuator test, need to be realised.

Note

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

Pos: 1.21.13.34 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

169

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.13.35 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Der Aktortest dient zum Testen, der an der Maschine für die Funktion „Schnitthöhe“, verbauten Aktore @ 30\mod_1251366727948_78.doc @ 285519

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Cutting height” function.

Pos: 1.21.13.36 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Aktorentest Schnitthöhe (4/4) BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283341098734_78.doc @ 449481

1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0049_1

Fig. 136

Pos: 1.21.13.37 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Anzeige Spannung @ 30\mod_1251373725917_78.doc @ 286274

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 1.21.13.38 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 1.21.13.39 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Tabelle Aktoren Schnitthöhe 4/4 @ 46\mod_1283341654625_78.doc @ 449507

Note

The status displays described here apply to all Actuators related to cutting height.

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y39 Cutting height – left lateral mowing unit 1

Y34 Cutting height – left lateral mowing unit 2

Pos: 1.21.14 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

170

Pos: 1.21.15.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-5/Menü 4-1-5 Diagnose hydraulische Schneckenhaube Bild BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283344002875_78.doc @ 449562

6.10.7 Menu 4-1-5 Diagnostics of hydraulic auger hood (optional)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 137

Pos: 1.21.15.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-5/Menü 4-1-5 Diagnose hydraulische Schneckenhaube Text BM 400/500 @ 30\mod_1251376875502_78.doc @ 287117

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

Select menu 4-1-5 "Diagnostics of hydraulic auger hood" with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

Diagnostics for the hydraulic auger hood appears.

The "Diagnostics of hydraulic auger hood" diagnostics menu is divided into 3 pages.

Page 1: Sensor Test

Page 2: Actuator test

Page 3: Actuator test

Pos: 1.21.15.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.doc @ 26549

Menu control for pages 1 to 3

Note

Pos: 1.21.15.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.doc @ 26587

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics" key to bring up the next page of the menu.

B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 1.21.15.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

171

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.15.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-5/Sensortest hydraulische Schneckenhauben (2) (Seite 1/3) BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197628159400_78.doc @ 28695

Sensor test - hydraulic auger hoods (2) (page 1/3)

Pos: 1.21.15.7 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 138

The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the hydraulic auger hoods function.

Switch Switch activated green

Switch not activated transparent

Description

S2

Hydraulic auger hoods left

S5

Hydraulic auger hoods right

172

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.15.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/3) @ 0\mod_1197618444025_78.doc @ 28286

Actuator test (page 2/3)

Pos: 1.21.15.9 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 1.21.15.10 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for

Pos: 1.21.15.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722 the actuator test, need to be realised.

Note

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

Pos: 1.21.15.12 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

173

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.15.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-5/Der Aktortest /Testen, Funktion „hydraulische Schneckenhauben“ @ 30\mod_1251378341908_78.doc @ 288297

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

"Hydraulic auger hoods" function.

Pos: 1.21.15.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-5/Aktorentest hydraulische Schneckenhaube (2/3) Bild BM 400 @ 30\mod_1251378923174_78.doc @ 288847

1

5 6

2

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0055

Fig. 139

Pos: 1.21.15.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Anzeige Spannung/Stromfluss @ 30\mod_1251367035870_78.doc @ 285544

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2.

Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 1.21.15.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Pos: 1.21.15.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Tabelle Aktoren Hauptventile_Zusatsventil1+2 BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197619057915_78.doc @ 28325

Actuator turned on

Note

The status displays described here apply to all actuators related to valves (main valve, additional valve1 and additional valve2).

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y19 Main

Y30 Additional valve 1

Y41 Additional valve 2

Pos: 1.21.15.18 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

5 6

174

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.15.19 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 3/3) @ 0\mod_1197620396431_78.doc @ 28345

Actuator test (page 3/3)

Pos: 1.21.15.20 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 1.21.15.21 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755

CAUTION!

Pos: 1.21.15.22 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Note

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

Pos: 1.21.15.23 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

175

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.15.24 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-5/Der Aktortest /Testen, Funktion „hydraulische Schneckenhauben“ @ 30\mod_1251378341908_78.doc @ 288297

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

"Hydraulic auger hoods" function.

Pos: 1.21.15.25 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Anzeige Spannung/Stromfluss @ 30\mod_1251367035870_78.doc @ 285544

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2.

Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 1.21.15.26 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-5/Aktorentest hydraulische Schneckenhauben (3/3) Bild BM 400 @ 30\mod_1251379241424_78.doc @ 289052

1

2

5 6

7 8

B C D BM 400 0056

Fig. 140

Pos: 1.21.15.27 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 1.21.15.28 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-5/Tabelle Aktoren hydraulische Schneckenhauben BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197631161806_78.doc @ 28755

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the hydraulic auger hood.

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y32 Auger hoods right

Y33 Auger hoods left

3

Pos: 1.21.16 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

176

Pos: 1.21.17.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-6/Menü 4-1-6 Diagnose Hangausgleich @ 46\mod_1283347867062_78.doc @ 449617

6.10.8 Menu 4-1-6 Sideshift diagnostics (optional)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 141

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

Select menu 4-1-6 "Diagnostics sideshift

Press the rotary potentiometer.

Sideshift diagnostics appears.

" with the rotary potentiometer.

The "Sideshift" diagnostics menu is divided into 3 pages.

Page 1: Sensor Test

Page 2: Actuator test

Page 3: Actuator test

Pos: 1.21.17.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.doc @ 26549

Menu control for pages 1 to 3

Note

Pos: 1.21.17.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.doc @ 26587

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics" key to bring up the next page of the menu.

B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 1.21.17.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

177

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.17.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-6/Sensortest Hangausgleich (2) (Seite 1/3) @ 0\mod_1197632068728_78.doc @ 28816

Sensor Test – Sideshift (2) (page 1/3)

Fig. 142

The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the sideshift function.

Switch Switch activated green

Switch not activated transparent

Description

S73

Sideshift

Pos: 1.21.17.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/3) @ 0\mod_1197618444025_78.doc @ 28286

Actuator test (page 2/3)

Pos: 1.21.17.7 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 1.21.17.8 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755

CAUTION!

Pos: 1.21.17.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Note

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

Pos: 1.21.17.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

178

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.17.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-6/Aktorentest Hangausgleich (2/3) @ 0\mod_1197632300884_78.doc @ 28836

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Sideshift” function.

1

5 6 2

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0059

Fig. 143

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2.

Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 1.21.17.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Pos: 1.21.17.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Tabelle Aktoren Hauptventile_Zusatsventil1+2 BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197619057915_78.doc @ 28325

Actuator turned on

Note

The status displays described here apply to all actuators related to valves (main valve, additional valve1 and additional valve2).

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y19 Main

Y30 Additional valve 1

Y41 Additional valve 2

Pos: 1.21.17.14 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

5 6

179

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.17.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 3/3) @ 0\mod_1197620396431_78.doc @ 28345

Actuator test (page 3/3)

Pos: 1.21.17.16 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 1.21.17.17 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755

CAUTION!

Pos: 1.21.17.18 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Note

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

Pos: 1.21.17.19 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

180

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.17.20 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-6/Aktorentest Hangausgleich (3/3) @ 0\mod_1197632459321_78.doc @ 28856

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

"Sideshift" function.

1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0060

Fig. 144

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 1.21.17.21 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 1.21.17.22 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-6/Tabelle Aktoren Hangausgleich (3/3) @ 0\mod_1197873505393_78.doc @ 29515

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the sideshift.

Valve Icon Description Turn on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y28 Sideshift left

Y29 Sideshift right

Pos: 1.21.18 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

181

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.19.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-7/BM 400/Menü 4-1-7 Diagnose Frontschutzklappen @ 46\mod_1283348927000_78.doc @ 449807

6.10.9 Menu 4-1-7 Diagnostics front guard flaps (optional)

CAN

Pic. 145

The "Diagnostics" main menu 4 is called.

• Select menu 4-1-7 “Diagnostics front guard flaps" with the rotary potentiometer

• Press the rotary potentiometer

Front guard flaps diagnostics appears.

The diagnostics menu “Front guard flaps” is divided into 3 pages.

Page 1: Sensor test

Page 2: Actuator test

Page 3: Actuator test

Pos: 1.21.19.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.doc @ 26549

Menu control for pages 1 to 3

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

Pos: 1.21.19.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.doc @ 26587

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics" key to bring up the next page of the menu.

B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 1.21.19.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

182

Pos: 1.21.19.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-7/BM 400/Sensortest Frontschutzklappen (2) (Seite 1/3) @ 46\mod_1283348928359_78.doc @ 449833

Sensor test front guard flaps (2) (page 1/3)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 146

The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the function of the front guard flaps.

Switch Switch activated green

Switch not activated transparent

Description

S8 Front guard flaps

Pos: 1.21.19.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/3) @ 0\mod_1197618444025_78.doc @ 28286

Actuator test (page 2/3)

Pos: 1.21.19.7 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 1.21.19.8 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for

Pos: 1.21.19.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722 the actuator test, need to be realised.

Note

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

Pos: 1.21.19.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

183

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.19.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-7/BM 400/Aktorentest Frontschutzklappen (2/3) @ 46\mod_1283348924562_78.doc @ 449755

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the function of the “Front guard flaps”.

1

5 6 2

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0262

Fig. 147

1. Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2. Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 1.21.19.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Pos: 1.21.19.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Tabelle Aktoren Hauptventile_Zusatsventil1+2 BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197619057915_78.doc @ 28325

Actuator turned on

Note

The status displays described here apply to all actuators related to valves (main valve, additional valve1 and additional valve2).

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y19 Main

Y30 Additional valve 1

Y41 Additional valve 2

Pos: 1.21.19.14 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

5 6

184

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.19.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 3/3) @ 0\mod_1197620396431_78.doc @ 28345

Actuator test (page 3/3)

Pos: 1.21.19.16 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 1.21.19.17 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755

CAUTION!

Pos: 1.21.19.18 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Note

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

Pos: 1.21.19.19 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

185

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.19.20 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-7/BM 400/Aktorentest Frontschutzklappen (3/3) @ 46\mod_1283348925843_78.doc @ 449781

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the function of the “Front guard flaps”.

1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0263

Fig. 148

1. Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 1.21.19.21 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 1.21.19.22 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-7/BM 400/Tabelle Aktoren Frontschutzklappen (3/3) @ 46\mod_1283348929593_78.doc @ 449859

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the front guard flaps.

Valve Symbol Description Switch on the actuator

Switch off the actuator

Y43 Front guard flaps 1

Y44 Front guard flaps 2

Pos: 1.21.20 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

186

Pos: 1.21.21.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Menü 4-1-10 Diagnose Arbeit BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283351935531_78.doc @ 450048

6.10.10 Menu 4-1-10 Diagnostics Work

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 149

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

Select menu 4-1-6 "Diagnostics work" with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

Work diagnostics appears.

The "Work" diagnostics menu is divided into 6 pages.

Page 1: Sensor Test

Page 2: Sensor Test

Page 3: Actuator test

Page 4: Actuator test

Page 5: Actuator test

Page 6: Actuator test

Pos: 1.21.21.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.doc @ 26549

Menu control for pages 1 to 6

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

Pos: 1.21.21.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.doc @ 26587

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics" key to bring up the next page of the menu.

B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 1.21.21.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

187

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.21.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Sensortest Arbeit (2) (Seite 1/6) BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197876567174_78.doc @ 29575

Sensor test work (2) (page 1/6)

Pos: 1.21.21.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 150

The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the work function. green

Sensor inactive transparent

Sensor not OK red

Description

B10

Suction return air filter

B33

Hydraulic tank filling level

188

Pos: 1.21.21.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Sensortest Arbeit (2) (Seite 2/6) @ 9\mod_1219915289585_78.doc @ 124432

Sensor test work (2) (page 2/6)

2 2

5 6

7

BM 400 0063_1

8

B C

Fig. 151

Sensor designation:

D

= Sensor B11 speed – front mowing unit

= Sensor B12 speed – right lateral mowing unit

= Sensor B13 speed – left lateral mowing unit

= Sensor B14 position – right lateral mowing unit

= Sensor B15 position – left lateral mowing unit

= Sensor B28 speed – right auger

= Sensor B29 speed – left auger

= Sensor B49 position transport position mowing unit left

Pos: 1.21.21.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Überschrift Statusanzeige der allgemeinen Sensoren (2) @ 0\mod_1197884083518_78.doc @ 29633

= Sensor B48 position transport position mowing unit right

Status display of general sensors (2)

Pos: 1.21.21.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Statusanzeige der allgemeinen Sensoren @ 0\mod_1197556322007_78.doc @ 26073

= Broken cable sensor

= Sensor alive

= Sensor not alive

= Sensor short circuit

Pos: 1.21.21.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Info centre "EasyTouch"

189

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.21.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 3/6) @ 0\mod_1197884281565_78.doc @ 29671

Actuator test (page 3/6)

Pos: 1.21.21.12 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 1.21.21.13 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for

Pos: 1.21.21.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722 the actuator test, need to be realised.

Note

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

Pos: 1.21.21.15 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

190

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.21.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Aktorentest Arbeit (3/6) @ 0\mod_1197884924049_78.doc @ 29747

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

"Work" function.

1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0064

Fig. 152

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 1.21.21.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 1.21.21.18 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Tabelle Aktoren Arbeit Hinweis @ 46\mod_1283405898156_78.doc @ 450075

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the work.

Pos: 1.21.21.19 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Tabelle Aktoren Arbeit (3/6) @ 0\mod_1197885546643_78.doc @ 29807

Valve Icon Description Turn on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y19 Main

Y22 Lateral mowing unit right lift

Y23 Lateral mowing unit right lower

5 6

Y27 Lateral mowing unit right fold down

7 8

Pos: 1.21.21.20 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

191

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.21.21 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 4/6) @ 0\mod_1197884308393_78.doc @ 29690

Actuator test (page 4/6)

Pos: 1.21.21.22 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 1.21.21.23 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for

Pos: 1.21.21.24 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722 the actuator test, need to be realised.

Note

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

Pos: 1.21.21.25 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

192

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.21.26 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Aktorentest Arbeit (4/6) @ 0\mod_1197885483846_78.doc @ 29787

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

"Work" function.

1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0065

Fig. 153

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 1.21.21.27 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 1.21.21.28 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Tabelle Aktoren Arbeit Hinweis @ 46\mod_1283405898156_78.doc @ 450075

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the work.

Pos: 1.21.21.29 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Tabelle Aktoren Arbeit (4/6) @ 0\mod_1197885035893_78.doc @ 29767

Valve Icon Description Turn on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y24 Lateral mowing unit left lift

1

Y25 Lateral mowing unit left lower

Y26 Lateral mowing unit left fold down

5 6

Pos: 1.21.21.30 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

193

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.21.31 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 5/6) @ 0\mod_1197884337908_78.doc @ 29709

Actuator test (page 5/6)

Pos: 1.21.21.32 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 1.21.21.33 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for

Pos: 1.21.21.34 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722 the actuator test, need to be realised.

Note

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

Pos: 1.21.21.35 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

194

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.21.36 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Aktorentest Arbeit (5/6) @ 0\mod_1197886146908_78.doc @ 29827

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

"Work" function.

1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0066

Fig. 154

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 1.21.21.37 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 1.21.21.38 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Tabelle Aktoren Arbeit Hinweis @ 46\mod_1283405898156_78.doc @ 450075

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the work.

Pos: 1.21.21.39 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Tabelle Aktoren Arbeit (5/6) @ 0\mod_1197886205518_78.doc @ 29847

Valve Icon Description Turn on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y20 Lateral mowing unit left lift

1

Y21 Lateral mowing unit left lower

Pos: 1.21.21.40 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

195

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.21.41 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 6/6) @ 0\mod_1197884374705_78.doc @ 29728

Actuator test (page 6/6)

Pos: 1.21.21.42 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 1.21.21.43 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for

Pos: 1.21.21.44 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722 the actuator test, need to be realised.

Note

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

Pos: 1.21.21.45 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

196

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.21.46 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Aktorentest Arbeit (6/6) BM 420 @ 51\mod_1288160544875_78.doc @ 478521

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

"Work" function.

1

D716 KMC1 Lastspg. 12V313560 mV

D717 KMC1 Lastspg. 12V413560 mV

Y8

Y9

STOP

Y10

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 420 0017

Fig. 155

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 1.21.21.47 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 1.21.21.48 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Tabelle Aktoren Arbeit Hinweis @ 46\mod_1283405898156_78.doc @ 450075

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the work.

Pos: 1.21.21.49 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Tabelle Aktoren Arbeit (6/6) BM 420 @ 51\mod_1288160770328_78.doc @ 478547

Valve Icon Description Turn on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y8 Front mowing unit drive

Y9 Side mowing unit drive, right

Y10 Side mowing unit drive, left

5 6

Pos: 1.21.22 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

197

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.23 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-11/Menü 4-1-11 „CAN-Bus“ BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283409945937_78.doc @ 450128

6.10.11 Menu 4-1-11 CAN bus

CAN

Pos: 1.21.24 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 156

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

Select menu 4-1-11 "CAN bus" with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

Diagnostics CAN bus appears.

CAN bus user: active inactive or disconnected from CAN bus

Name

Joystick

CU

SmartDrive

DIOM

Terminal

KMC1

ADM1

198

Pos: 1.21.25.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 400/Menü 4-1-12 Fahrantrieb BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283429065437_78.doc @ 450260

6.10.12 Menu 4-1-12 Travelling gear

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 157

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

Select menu 4-1-12 "Drive" with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

Drive diagnostics appears.

The "Travelling Gear" diagnostics menu is divided into 4 pages.

Page 1: Sensor Test

Page 2: Actuator test

Page 3: Actuator test

Page 4: Actuator test

Pos: 1.21.25.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.doc @ 26549

Menu control for pages 1 to 4

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

Pos: 1.21.25.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.doc @ 26587

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics" key to bring up the next page of the menu.

B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 1.21.25.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

199

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.25.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Fahrantrieb-Schalter (1) (Seite 1/4) @ 30\mod_1251718644413_78.doc @ 295583

Travelling gear switch (1) (page 1/4)

Pos: 1.21.25.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 400/Fahrantrieb-Schalter (1) Bild BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283429105500_78.doc @ 450286

Fig. 158

Pos: 1.21.25.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Fahrantrieb-Schalter (1) BM 400/BM 500 @ 0\mod_1197893098455_78.doc @ 30395

= Road/Field release switch not activated

= Road/Field release switch activated

= Release switch travelling gear not activated.

= Travelling gear release switch activated

= Parking brake release switch not activated.

= Parking brake release switch activated

= Key axle separation not activated.

= Key axle separation activated

Pos: 1.21.25.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

200

Pos: 1.21.25.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Fahrantrieb (2) (Seite 1/4) @ 30\mod_1251720587648_78.doc @ 295633

Travelling gear (2) (page 1/4)

Pos: 1.21.25.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 400/Fahrantrieb-Schalter (1) Bild BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283429105500_78.doc @ 450286

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 159

Pos: 1.21.25.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Fahrantrieb (2) BM 400/ BM 500 @ 41\mod_1271236251527_78.doc @ 368967

• Direction of travel; the number after the symbol is the current travel speed.

=

Cruise control active; the number after the icon is the saved speed for Tempomat operation in km/h.

=

Cruise control inactive

Type of drive

=

Axle separation active (only possible in Field mode)

=

Parking brake is applied

=

Emergency mode; allows the driver to drive the vehicle out of the danger zone even if there are serious drive problems..

Pos: 1.21.25.12 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

D 025 Downhill mode

201

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.25.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Sensortest Fahrantrieb (3) (Seite1/4) @ 30\mod_1251716592773_78.doc @ 295533

Drive sensor test (3) (page1/4)

Pos: 1.21.25.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 400/Sensortest Fahrantrieb (3) Tabellen BM 400 @ 41\mod_1271236003152_78.doc @ 368942

Pos: 1.21.25.15 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 160

The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the travelling gear function.

Description Sensor Sensor

OK gre en

Sensor not OK red

Sensor unknown transparent

Flush valve temperature B5

B7

B22

B25

B38

B39

Sensor Switch activated green

B40

K43

Switch not activated yellow

High pressure

Braking pressure

Brake tank pressure

Pivoting angle pump front axle

Pivoting angle pump, rear axle

Switch unknown transparent

Description

Brake pedal switch

Travelling gear switch

Description inactive

D 017 Power limitation

202

Pos: 1.21.25.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Sensortest Fahrantrieb (4) (Seite1/4) @ 30\mod_1251721794976_78.doc @ 295683

Drive sensor test (4) (page1/4)

Pos: 1.21.25.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 400/Fahrantrieb-Schalter (1) Bild BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283429105500_78.doc @ 450286

Fig. 161

Pos: 1.21.25.18 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Beschreibung der Zeile (4) @ 41\mod_1271234519480_78.doc @ 368865

D018 = SD transmiss. Status (1 OK) (2 not OK)

D019 = drive level (1= drive level 1) (2=drive level 2)

D023 = Safety signal ( OK) ( not OK)

D700 = Saf. IO Toggle analogue val. to digital

Pos: 1.21.25.19 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Info centre "EasyTouch"

203

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.25.20 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/4) @ 0\mod_1197622785056_78.doc @ 28464

Actuator test (page 2/4)

Pos: 1.21.25.21 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 1.21.25.22 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for

Pos: 1.21.25.23 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722 the actuator test, need to be realised.

Note

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

Pos: 1.21.25.24 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

204

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.25.25 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 400/Aktorentest Fahrantrieb (2/3) BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197900763705_78.doc @ 31005

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Travelling gear” function.

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0069

Fig. 162

Pos: 1.21.25.26 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 1.21.25.27 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 400/Tabelle Aktoren Fahrantrieb (2/3) BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197901026377_78.doc @ 31025

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the travelling gear.

Valve Icon Description Turn on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y5 Axle separation

Y6 1/2 absorption volume front axle

Y7 1/2 absorption volume rear axle

5 6

Pos: 1.21.25.28 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

205

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.25.29 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 3/4) @ 0\mod_1197622875243_78.doc @ 28484

Actuator test (page 3/4)

Pos: 1.21.25.30 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 1.21.25.31 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for

Pos: 1.21.25.32 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722 the actuator test, need to be realised.

Note

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

Pos: 1.21.25.33 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

206

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.25.34 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Aktortest dient zum Testen, für die Funktion „Fahrantrieb“, verbauten Aktoren @ 30\mod_1251713178148_78.doc @ 295483

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Travelling gear” function.

Pos: 1.21.25.35 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 400/Aktorentest Fahrantrieb (3/3) Bild BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283430681187_78.doc @ 450341

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0070_1

Fig. 163

Pos: 1.21.25.36 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 1.21.25.37 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Hinweis Statusanziege Gültigkeit Fahrantrieb @ 30\mod_1251708457351_78.doc @ 295123

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the travelling gear.

Pos: 1.21.25.38 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 400/Tabelle Aktoren Fahrantrieb (3/3) BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197901795565_78.doc @ 31095

Valve Icon Description Turn on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Brake light reversing lights

Y45

Stop valve front axle

5 6

Y46

Stop valve rear axle

7 8

Pos: 1.21.25.39 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

207

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.25.40 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 4/4) @ 0\mod_1197622923400_78.doc @ 28504

Actuator test (page 4/4)

Pos: 1.21.25.41 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test

The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuating the actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components against unintentional lowering

• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators

• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zone

Pos: 1.21.25.42 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for

Pos: 1.21.25.43 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722 the actuator test, need to be realised.

Note

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

Pos: 1.21.25.44 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

208

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.25.45 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Aktortest dient zum Testen, für die Funktion „Fahrantrieb“, verbauten Aktoren @ 30\mod_1251713178148_78.doc @ 295483

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Travelling gear” function.

Pos: 1.21.25.46 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 400/Aktorentest Fahrantrieb (4/4) BM 400 Bild @ 46\mod_1283433331343_78.doc @ 450396

Fig. 164

Pos: 1.21.25.47 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 1.21.25.48 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Hinweis Statusanziege Gültigkeit Fahrantrieb @ 30\mod_1251708457351_78.doc @ 295123

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the travelling gear.

Pos: 1.21.25.49 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 400/Tabelle Aktoren Fahrantrieb (4/4) BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283435088921_78.doc @ 450448

Valve Symbol Description Switch on the actuator

Switch off the actuator

Y1 Front axle backward

Y2 Front axle forward

Y3 Rear axle backward

5 6

Y4 Rear axle forward

7 8

Pos: 1.21.26 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

209

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.27.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-13/Menü 4-1-13 „Elektronik“ Bild BM 400 @ 30\mod_1251724003570_78.doc @ 295789

6.10.13 Menu 4-1-13 Electronics

Fig. 165

Pos: 1.21.27.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-13/Menü 4-1-13 „Elektronik“ Text @ 0\mod_1197903920096_78.doc @ 31372

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

Select menu 4-1-13 "Electronics" with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

Pos: 1.21.27.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.doc @ 26549

Electronics diagnostics appears.

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 1.21.27.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-13/Menü 4-1-13 Elektronik Bild Seite 1 und 2 BM 400 @ 30\mod_1251722625366_78.doc @ 295708

Fig. 166

Pos: 1.21.27.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-13/Menü 4-1-13 Elektronik Text blättern @ 0\mod_1197904126361_78.doc @ 31410

• The symbol identifies diagnostic values that lie within a valid range.

• The symbol identifies diagnostic values that do not lie within a valid range.

Pos: 1.21.27.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Mit Drehpoti Menüebene zurück @ 29\mod_1251353619073_78.doc @ 283963

To scroll forward, use the key. To scroll backward, use the

B key.

Pos: 1.21.28 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

210

Pos: 1.21.29.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Menü 4-1-14 Dieselmotor (1/3) BM 420 Bild @ 51\mod_1288164875390_78.doc @ 478655

6.10.14 Menu 4-1-14 Diesel Engine

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig.167

Pos: 1.21.29.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Menü 4-1-14 Dieselmotor (1/3) BM 400/420/500 Text @ 30\mod_1251727027851_78.doc @ 296193

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

Select menu 4-1-14 "Diesel engine" with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

"Diesel engine diagnostics" appears.

Pos: 1.21.29.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Dieselmotor (Seite 1/3) BM 420/500 @ 30\mod_1251781350349_78.doc @ 296265

Diesel engine page 1

= Engine speed

= Engine cooling water temperature

= Engine oil pressure

= Cooling water level

Pos: 1.21.29.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Menüsteuerung der Seiten 1 bis 3 @ 30\mod_1251782549208_78.doc @ 296311

Menu control of pages 1 to 3

Pos: 1.21.29.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Menüsteuerung (1/2) BM 400/420/500 @ 30\mod_1251781668115_78.doc @ 296290 key for

B

key for

causes the next maintenance interval to be displayed.

causes diesel engine diagnostics to be displayed. causes the next page to be displayed. causes the previous page to be displayed.

Pos: 1.21.29.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

211

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.29.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Dieselmotor (Seite 2u3) Bild BM 420 @ 51\mod_1288167586843_78.doc @ 478707

Diesel engine pages 2 and 3

D210

69 °C

B36

D208 D209

l/h P

2.10

bar

B34

3285 mV

D203 Motorauslastung Drz.

70 %

D202 Motorauslastung Max.

16 %

5

7

6

8

V

13.20

bar

13,35 V

B C D

BM 420 0019

Fig.168

Page 2

Pos: 1.21.29.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Dieselmotor Seite 2 Symbolerklärung BM 420/500 @ 30\mod_1251784530161_78.doc @ 296365

Page 3

= Current fuel consumption

= Charge air temperature

P

Pos: 1.21.29.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Dieselmotor Seite 2 Motorauslastung @ 51\mod_1288171090031_78.doc @ 478802

= Charge air pressure

Pos: 1.21.29.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Dieselmotor Seite 2 Sensoren B34 B36 BM 400/420 @ 51\mod_1288178194437_78.doc @ 478829

Engine capacity, speed

Maximum engine capacity

Sensor Sensor OK green

B34

B36

Pos: 1.21.29.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Dieselmotor Seite 3 Symbolerklärung @ 30\mod_1251787777771_78.doc @ 296525

Sensor not OK red

B

V

= Fuel pressure

= Electrical voltage

= Exhaust temperature

Pos: 1.21.29.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Harnstofflösung AdBlue @ 41\mod_1271238591840_78.doc @ 369019

C

1

D

606 °C

70 %

55 °C

5 6

7 8

BM 420 0020

Description

Diesel tank fuel level

Air intake

Urea solution

Filling level

Temperature

Pos: 1.21.29.13 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

212

Pos: 1.21.29.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Menü Dieselmotor Wartungsintervall @ 30\mod_1251790172458_78.doc @ 296638

Pos: 1.21.30 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig.169

Info centre "EasyTouch"

causes diesel engine diagnostics to be displayed.

213

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.31 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-15/Menü 4-1-15 Joystick (1/2) Fendt @ 41\mod_1271397831477_78.doc @ 371180

6.10.15 Menu 4-1-15 Joystick

5 6

Pos: 1.21.32 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

7 8

B C D

BM 500 136

Fig.170

The key functions of the joystick can be checked in the Joystick Diagnostics menu.

Note

When bringing up the "Joystick" Diagnostics menu, the diesel engine must be stopped. No functions are performed when the joystick is activated in the "Joystick" Diagnostics menu.

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

Select menu 4-1-15 "Joystick" with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

"Joystick Diagnostics" appears. the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

214

Pos: 1.21.33 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-15/Menü 4-1-15 Joystick (2/2) FENDT @ 41\mod_1271397833149_78.doc @ 371205

Menu control:

Info centre "EasyTouch"

5 6 5 6

B C D

7 8

BM 500 136

B C D

7 8

BM 500 137

Fig.171

Pos: 1.21.34 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

key under the

softkey brings up the "Work" menu.

softkey to bring up the next page of the "Joystick" menu.

key under the

"Joystick" menu.

softkey to bring up the previous page of the

A representation of the joystick appears in the display. If a function is activated on the joystick, the status of the function that is performed appears in the display.

Possible status display of the activated key

Key not activated

Key activated

Broken cable

Short circuit

215

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.35 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-16/Menü 4-1-16 „Bedieneinheit Konsole“ (1/2) Bild BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283492169265_78.doc @ 450591

6.10.16 Menu 4-1-16 Control unit console

4-1-16

1

5 6 5 6

2

7 8 7 8

B C D

BM 400 0081

B C D

BM 400 0082_1

Fig. 172

Pos: 1.21.36 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-16/Menü 4-1-16 „Bedieneinheit Konsole“ (1/2) @ 0\mod_1197963604168_78.doc @ 31756

Both the release switches and the keys on the console can be checked for their functionality in the "Control unit console" Diagnostics menu.

Note

When bringing up the "Control unit console" Diagnostics menu, the diesel engine must be stopped. No functions are performed in the "Control unit console" Diagnostics menu when the release switches or keys are activated.

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

Select menu 4-1-16 "Control unit console" with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

Control unit console diagnostics appears.

Pos: 1.21.37 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

216

Pos: 1.21.38 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-16/Menü 4-1-16 Bedienkonsole Freigabeschalter (2/2) BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283492678718_78.doc @ 450617

1

5 6

2

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0082_1

Pic. 173

Release switch (1) activated inactive Release switch

Road/field

Autopilot

Parking brake

Foot pedal

Traction drive

Axle separation

Swath hood

Seat switch

Door switch

Front guard flaps (optional)

Pos: 1.21.39 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-16/Anzeige der Spannungen Konsole @ 30\mod_1251791240708_78.doc @ 296666

Display of voltages (2)

Display (voltage – ignition stage 1)

Display (voltage – ignition stage 2)

Display (voltage – electronics)

Display (fixed voltage regulator)

Pos: 1.21.40 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Info centre "EasyTouch"

217

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.41 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-17 /Menü 4-1-17 „Display“ @ 0\mod_1197973595090_78.doc @ 31795

The "Display" diagnostics menu is used to check key functions , the rotary potentiometer and the key next to the rotary potentiometer.

Pos: 1.21.42 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 174

Note

When bringing up the "Display" Diagnostics menu, the diesel engine must be stopped. No functions are performed when keys are activated in the "Display" Diagnostics menu.

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

Select menu 4-1-17 "Display" with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

"Display diagnostics" appears.

A representation of the display appears in the display. If a function is activated on the display, the status of the function that is performed appears in the display.

Possible status display of the activated key

Key not activated

Key activated the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

218

Pos: 1.21.43.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Menü 4-2 „Fehlerliste“ @ 31\mod_1251804579052_78.doc @ 298124

6.11 Menu 4-2 Error list

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 175

The main menu level is active.

Select main menu 4-2 with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

The "Error list" appears.

= Current error

= Fault storage

= Current error, diesel engine

= Error storage, diesel engine

Current errors

The display shows the fault list with the current faults. The time, status, error number and designation are shown.

• Status

C = Error has come (Come)

G = Error has gone (Gone)

A = Error acknowledged

Pos: 1.21.43.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Durch Drücken der Taste 7 bzw. 8 für Softkey die allgemeinen Infomeldungen aufrufen. @ 31\mod_1251798076490_78.doc @ 297679

• The general information messages are displayed by pressing the key 7 or 8 for softkey

Pos: 1.21.43.3 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

219

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.43.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Fehlerspeicher @ 31\mod_1251804762302_78.doc @ 298179

Error Storage

Fig. 176

• To display error storage, activate the

B key under the softkey.

Error storage is arranged chronologically. The date, time, status, error numbers, and designation are shown.

• Status

C = Error has come (Come)

G = Error has gone (Gone)

A = Error acknowledged

Pos: 1.21.43.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Menüsteuerung Pfeile erklären @ 31\mod_1251803909068_78.doc @ 298009

Menu control:

= Activating the key allows you to scroll up.

Pos: 1.21.43.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

=

=

=

Activating the key allows you to scroll up one line at a time.

Activating the

6

key allows you to scroll down one line at a time.

Activating the

8

key allows you to scroll down one page at a time.

220

Pos: 1.21.43.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/aktuelle Fehler Dieselmotor @ 31\mod_1251804983474_78.doc @ 298224

Current diesel engine errors

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.43.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 177

• To display current errors of the diesel engine, press the

C key under the softkey.

The display shows the error list with the current errors of the diesel engine. Error codes are displayed with a sequential number.

Menu field (1) indicates the number of alarms present.

221

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.43.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Fehlerspeicher Dieselmotor @ 31\mod_1251805083974_78.doc @ 298269

Diesel engine error storage

Fig. 178

Pos: 1.21.43.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

• To display diesel engine error storage, activate the

.

D key under the softkey

The display shows the error storage of the diesel engine. Error codes, the status, date and time are indicated with a sequential number.

Menu field (1) indicates the number of alarms present.

Status

1 = Error set

2 = Error deleted

• You can use the scroll up.

7 for to scroll to the end of the list and the 8 key for to

• To display current errors, use the

A key under the softkey. the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

222

Pos: 1.21.43.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Infomeldungen Allgemein/Service Bild @ 31\mod_1251805475755_78.doc @ 298888

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 179

General information messages

Pos: 1.21.43.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Status der Allgemeinen-Infomeldungen @ 31\mod_1251808882552_78.doc @ 298912

Service information messages

General information messages

The general information message is arranged chronologically. The date, time, status, error numbers, and designation are shown.

Status:

C = Error has come

G = Error has gone

A = Error acknowledged

Pos: 1.21.43.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Status der Service-Infomeldungen @ 31\mod_1251809979693_78.doc @ 299120

Service information messages

Service information messages are arranged chronologically. The date, time, error number and designation are shown.

Pos: 1.21.43.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Menüsteuerung Pfeile erklären @ 31\mod_1251803909068_78.doc @ 298009

Menu control:

= Activating the key allows you to scroll up.

= Activating the key allows you to scroll up one line at a time.

= Activating the

6

key allows you to scroll down one line at a time.

=

Pos: 1.21.43.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Blätern über die Tasten A bis D @ 31\mod_1251809467021_78.doc @ 298956

Activating the

8

key allows you to scroll down one page at a time.

Activating the key brings up the basic screen

By pressing the key B you get back to menu “Error list”

• By

Pos: 1.21.43.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Mit Drehpoti Menüebene zurück @ 29\mod_1251353619073_78.doc @ 283963

Pos: 1.21.44 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

223

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.45 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-3/Menü 4-3 „Serviceebene“ @ 0\mod_1197981326387_78.doc @ 32370

6.12 Menu 4-3 "Service level"

Pos: 1.21.46 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 180

The main menu level is active.

Select main menu 4-3 with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

The "Service level" is protected by a password and is accessible only to the Krone service staff.

the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

224

Pos: 1.21.47.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Menü 4-4 „Information“ @ 0\mod_1197981647856_78.doc @ 32390

6.13 Menu 4-4 Information

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.47.2 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 181

The main menu level is active.

Select main menu 4-4 with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows menu level 4-4 "Information".

The main menu, "Settings", is divided up into three menus:

= Menu 4-4-1 "Joystick"

= Menu 4-4-2 "Software"

= Menu 4-4-3 "Machine" the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

225

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.47.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Menü 4-4-1 „Joystick“ Fendt @ 41\mod_1271398876524_78.doc @ 371280

6.13.1 Menu 4-4-1 Joystick

Pos: 1.21.47.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig.182

The main menu "Information" is active.

Select menu 4-4-1 "Joystick" with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

"Joystick information" appears. the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

226

Pos: 1.21.47.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Menü 4-4-2 „Software“ Bild BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197984085700_78.doc @ 32447

6.13.2 Menu 4-4-2 Software

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 183

Pos: 1.21.47.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Menü 4-4-2 „Software“ Text BM 400/500 @ 31\mod_1251872307697_78.doc @ 299807

The main menu "Information" is active.

Select menu 4-4-2 "Software" with the rotary potentiometer

Press the rotary potentiometer

"Software information" appears. The display shows the software versions of the various controllers.

Pos: 1.21.47.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Seite 1 BM 400 @ 31\mod_1251867821525_78.doc @ 299652

Page 1

= Terminal

Note

If the versions of resources and DLLs do not match for the terminal, the version numbers appear in red.

= SmartDrive

Pos: 1.21.47.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

= KMC1

Note

If the KMC1 software is not designed for your machine type, the version numbers appear in red.

B key or turning the rotary potentiometer causes the second page to be displayed on the rotary potentiometer

227

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.21.47.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Menü 4-4-2 Seite (1/2/3/4) Bild BM 400 @ 31\mod_1251866857510_78.doc @ 299627

1 2

B

3

C

4

D

5 6

7 8

BM 400 0094

1 2

B

3

C

4

D

5 6

7 8

BM 400 0095

1 2

B

3

C

4

D

5 6

7 8

BM 400 0096

Fig. 184

Pos: 1.21.47.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Seite 2 BM 400/500 @ 31\mod_1251868059010_78.doc @ 299677

Page 2

= Joystick

= CU

Pos: 1.21.47.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Seite 3 BM 400 @ 31\mod_1251868241056_78.doc @ 299702

Page 3

C key or turning the rotary potentiometer causes the third page to be displayed on the rotary potentiometer.

= ADM1 displayed on the rotary potentiometer.

Pos: 1.21.47.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Seite 4 BM 400/500 @ 31\mod_1251868464775_78.doc @ 299727

Page 4

Pos: 1.21.47.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Mit Drehpoti Menüebene zurück @ 29\mod_1251353619073_78.doc @ 283963

= DIOM the key or turning the rotary potentiometer causes the first page to be displayed on the rotary potentiometer.

Pos: 1.21.47.14 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

228

Pos: 1.21.47.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Menü 4-4-3 Maschine @ 0\mod_1197985621606_78.doc @ 32485

6.13.3 Menu 4-4-3 Machine

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.22 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 185

The main menu "Information" is active.

Select menu 4-4-3 "Machine" with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

"Machine information" appears. The display shows machine information.

229

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.23 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Menü 5 Grundbild/Menü 5 „Grundbild“ BM 420 @ 51\mod_1288180564656_78.doc @ 478969

6.14 Menu 5 Basic Screen

100

75

50

25

0

Pos: 1.24 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 186

The main menu is active.

Select menu 5 "Machine" with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

The "Basic screen" is displayed.

230

Pos: 1.25 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Fehlermeldungen @ 39\mod_1268635505910_78.doc @ 360426

Pos: 1.26 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Menü 5 Grundbild/Fehlermeldung @ 39\mod_1268635725222_78.doc @ 360450

Info centre "EasyTouch"

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0113_1

Fig. 187

If an error occurs on the machine, the error message appears in the display. The error message and the fault code are displayed.

• The error message can be confirmed with the key under softkey .

Pos: 1.27 /BA/Bedienung /Falscher Umgang mit Fehlermeldungen @ 39\mod_1268149789980_78.doc @ 358355

• The acoustic signal can be turned off with the B key under the softkey .

Note

For a list of error messages, error description and possible cause of error and remedy of error, see Appendix A – Error Messages.

CAUTION! –Wrong handling with error messages, identification of faults and defects on the machine

Effect: serious subsequent damages to the machine

• If an error message occurs or if a fault or a defect is recognized on the machine, the machine has to be stopped and gears and motor have to be switched off

Before continuing with work, eliminate the cause of the problem immediately •

Pos: 1.28 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

231

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 1.29 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/Menü 5 Grundbild/Infomeldung @ 0\mod_1197986377200_78.doc @ 32543

Pos: 2 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 188

If one or several conditions are not met to carry out an action, the information message will be displayed in the information section of settings (IV). The information message and the information code are displayed.

Acknowledging the information message

The error message can be confirmed with the key under softkey .

232

Commissioning

===== Ende der Stückliste =====

Pos: 1.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/A-E/Erstinbetriebnahme @ 0\mod_1196314201498_78.doc @ 5855

7 Commissioning

Pos: 1.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Fehlende Schutztücher @ 0\mod_1196314289764_78.doc @ 5874

Pos: 1.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Schutztücher montieren @ 35\mod_1257494335719_78.doc @ 329260

Danger! - Missing guard cloths

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.

• The machine may be taken into operation only after all the safety devices have been installed.

7.1

Pos: 1.4 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420/Schutztücher montieren @ 0\mod_1196314517108_78.doc @ 5913

Fitting the guard cloths

The lateral mowing units must be folded down to be able to install the guard cloths.

Pos: 1.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Seitliche Mähwerke abklappen @ 0\mod_1196407512074_78.doc @ 7929

7.2 Folding Down Lateral Mowing Units

Pos: 1.6 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420/Vorraussetzung Mähwerke abklappen BM 400 @ 0\mod_1196314613655_78.doc @ 5974

Pos: 1.7 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 189

Prerequisites:

• The main battery switch (1) must be in position I (closed).

Release switch (3) "Parking brake" must be in position II (engaged).

Release switch (4) "Travelling gear" must be in position I (off).

Starting the engine.

Release switch (1) "Road/Field" must be in position II (Field mode).

233

Commissioning

Pos: 1.8 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Absenken des Mähwerks in Arbeitsstellung BiGM400 @ 0\mod_1196315401623_78.doc @ 5993

Danger! - Lowering mowing unit into working position

Pos: 1.9 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420/Mähwerke absenken BM 420 Bild @ 49\mod_1287043334531_78.doc @ 464528

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Do not lower the mowing units until you are absolutely sure that neither persons, animals nor objects are in the swivel range of the mowing units.

4

6

12

BM 420 0013

Fig. 190

Pos: 1.10 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420/Mähwerke absenken BM 400/420 Text @ 49\mod_1287045101250_78.doc @ 464583

Using the (4, 6) keys with (12) key pressed on the multi-function lever, lower the lateral mowing unit from transport position to headland position.

Press the (4,6) keys on the multi-function lever again to lower the lateral mowing units from headland position to working position.

Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

Pos: 1.11 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

234

Pos: 1.12 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Montagebeschreibung @ 0\mod_1196317382342_78.doc @ 6137

7.2.1

Pos: 1.13 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Unvorhergesehene Inbetriebnahme @ 0\mod_1196317459889_78.doc @ 6156

Description of Installation

Danger! - Accidental start-up of machine and rolling.

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

Pos: 1.14 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420/Darstellung Schutztuchmontage Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196317641342_78.doc @ 6175

Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back.

3

Commissioning

3

1

Fig. 191

1

2

3

Side guard cloths

Front guard cloths

Mowing Unit

2

1 1

2 1

BM 400 0195

235

Commissioning

7.2.2

Fig. 192:

Fit the guard cloths (1) to the mowing unit (5) using the enclosed strip (2), washer (3) and bolt

(4).

Note

The hem of the guard cloths should always face the inside.

Guard cloths (CRI with upper roller drive)

Pos: 1.15 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Abb. 193

236

258 622

150

150 232 163

BMII-329_1

Pos: 1.16 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420/Warntafeln einstellen @ 0\mod_1196318422373_78.doc @ 6236

7.2.3 Adjusting the Warning Panel

Commissioning

1

2

3

BM 400 0148

Fig. 194

Pos: 1.17 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Einbau der Mähklingen @ 0\mod_1196318620905_78.doc @ 6255

• Before transporting the vehicle on public roads, make sure that the rear warning signs (1) are fitted to the outside.

Mount the rear reflectors (2) on the lamp support (3). •

Note

The rear reflectors are on the left side of the machine in the storage compartment with the hardware required to mount them.

7.3

Pos: 1.18 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Unvorhergesehene Inbetriebnahme @ 0\mod_1196317459889_78.doc @ 6156

Installation of Cutter Blades

Danger! - Accidental start-up of machine and rolling.

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

Pos: 1.19 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420/Einbau der Mähklingen @ 0\mod_1196318744030_78.doc @ 6274

Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back.

The lateral mowing units must be folded down to be able to install the cutter blades.

See chapter on initial start-up "Folding Down Lateral Mowing Units".

To install cutter blades:

See the chapter on maintenance of mowing units "Blade Changing on Cutting Discs with Blade

Screw Connection" and "Blade Changing on Cutting Discs with Quick Blade Release"

Pos: 2 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

237

Start-up

Pos: 3.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/F-J/Inbetriebnahme @ 0\mod_1196327075811_78.doc @ 6375

8 Start-up

Pos: 3.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Prüfungen vor Inbetriebnahme @ 0\mod_1196327145451_78.doc @ 6394

8.1

Pos: 3.3 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Einstellarbeiten Selbsfahrer @ 0\mod_1196327276045_78.doc @ 6432

Check before Start-up

Danger! - Unexpected movement of the machine

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Setting tasks must only be performed when the drive is switched off and the engine is at a standstill!

Switching off the engine

Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back

Remove the ignition key.

Switch off the main battery switch.

Pos: 3.4 /BA/Inbetriebnahme/Big M 400/500/Tägliche Prüfungen @ 0\mod_1196327023811_78.doc @ 6451

8.2 Daily checks

Pos: 3.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

To perform daily tests, the lateral mowing units and the front mowing unit must be in working position.

Note - Daily checks

Effect: Ensures the safety of the machine and extends the machine’s service life

Regular performance of daily checks on the machine will ensure its safety and significantly extend the machine’s service life.

238

Pos: 3.6 /BA/Inbetriebnahme/Big M 400/500/An der Grundmaschine @ 0\mod_1196328443623_78.doc @ 6475

8.2.1 On the Basic Machine

Before starting up the machine, lubricate thoroughly.

Check the safety equipment and replace if necessary.

Check the fuel level

Make certain screws are in place and tight.

Clean the engine compartment and intake sieve

Check battery for cuts and breaks

Check the tyre pressure

Test of pilot lamps

Test of light function

Check the brakes for function

Check the oil level on

• Engine

Start-up

Pos: 3.7 /BA/Inbetriebnahme/Big M 400/500/An den Mähwerken BM 400 @ 0\mod_1196328709561_78.doc @ 6515

For further information about how tasks are designed, please refer to chapter

"Maintenance of Basic Machine" and "Maintenance – Engine".

8.2.2 On the mowing units

• Always check the mowing units for damaged, missing or worn blades, retaining bolts, leaf springs and cutting discs/blade drum before starting operation; replace any parts that are damaged, missing or worn!

Make certain screws are in place and tight. •

• Check safety devices and guard cloths for wear and damage and replace if necessary.

Check oil level on:

Main gearbox for lateral mowing units

Angular gearbox/front mower

Input gearbox/front mower (CV/CRI)

Speed gearbox/front mower (CV)

Angular gearbox/front mower (CRI)

Gearbox for top roller drive (optional)

Cutter bar/front mower (CV/CRI)

Cutter bar / lateral mowing units

For further information about how tasks are designed, please refer to chapter

"Maintenance – Mowing Units".

Pos: 4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

239

Driving and Transport

Pos: 5.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/F-J/Fahren und Transport @ 0\mod_1196330049217_78.doc @ 6553

9

Pos: 5.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Transport Straßenfahrt @ 0\mod_1196330270405_78.doc @ 6572

Driving and Transport

9.1 Transport / Road Travel

Pos: 5.3 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Zum Transport müssen die Mähwerke hochgeklappt sein. @ 0\mod_1196330402389_78.doc @ 6591

The mowing units must be folded up for transport.

Pos: 5.4 /BA/Sicherheit/Fahren und Transport/Gefahr Straßenfahrt,Mitfahren,Fahrverhalten BM 400 @ 0\mod_1196330503498_78.doc @ 6611

Danger! - Road travel, passengers and handling

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

The following conditions must be met for road travel:

The mowing units must be in transport position.

Move the side guards of the front mowing unit right and left to transport position.

The "Road / Field" release switch must be in position I (road travel).

The "Travelling gear" release switch must be in position II (travelling gear on).

Close the shut-off valve on the front outrigger.

When driving on public roads, the provisions of the Road Traffic Licensing Regulations must be adhered to (lighting, identification).

To meet the requirements to maintain sufficient distance from overhead power lines the total height of the machine must not exceed 4 m (13 ft).

When driving on public roads, lower the front axle to achieve a transport height of max. 4 m.

Do not ride as a passenger on the ladders or platform.

Never drive with an engaged parking brake.

Always adapt the travelling speed of the machine on road and field to the given conditions.

When driving down hills, on inclines or through obstacles, adjust driving behaviour to prevailing driving conditions.

Note that the machine swings out when cornering.

Pos: 5.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

240

Driving and Transport

Pos: 5.6 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Vorbereitung für die Transport- /Straßenfahrt @ 0\mod_1196330928139_78.doc @ 6630

9.2 Preparation for transport/road travel

Pos: 5.7 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Schutze hochklappen @ 0\mod_1196331136248_78.doc @ 6733

9.2.1

Fold up the guards on the mowing units.

Lower the hydraulic axle suspension. (See Info Centre chapter "Quick Access to

Hydraulic Axle Suspension".)

Fold up the mowing units. (See chapter "Operation – Mowing Units" (Transport Position).)

Move the front mowing unit to centre position. (with sideshift option)

Make certain the lock has engaged.

Close the shut-off valve on the front outrigger.

The "Road / Field" release switch must be in position (I) (road travel).

The "Travelling gear" release switch must be in position (II) (travelling gear on).

Folding Up the Guards

Caution! - Effect: Damage to the machine

Check every time before transport to make certain the outer side guards (2) of the lateral mowing units right/left have automatically folded up into transport position.

If they have not, repeat the process for folding up the lateral mowing units. It may be necessary to move the outer side guards into transport position manually before the lateral mowing units are folded up.

2

2

Pos: 5.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

1

1

BM 400 0196

Fig. 195

Always move the side guard (1) of the front mowing unit from the right and left sides to the transport position before road travel.

241

Driving and Transport

Pos: 5.9 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Frontmähwerk in Mittelstellung bringen BM 420 @ 49\mod_1286974134093_78.doc @ 464223

9.2.2 Moving the Front Mowing Unit To Central Position (with Sideshift Option)

24

25

Pos: 5.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BM 420 0012

Fig.196

Activate the (24,25) keys on the multi-function lever to move the front mowing unit to central position.

Note

The front mower is in central position as soon as the arrow (1) is aligned to the centre of the top link (2).

242

Pos: 5.11 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Verriegelung prüfen BM 400 @ 13\mod_1226329022901_78.doc @ 165463

Driving and Transport

Danger! - Check lock

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.

In transport position the lateral mowing units must be folded back and locked mechanically into vertical position. In addition the mowing units must be raised as far as the stop device. Once folded back check the position of the mowing units.

Pos: 5.12 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

1

BM 400 0147_1

Fig. 197

The sensors (1) on the ratchets (right and left-hand side of machine) detect whether the mechanical interlocks of the lateral mowing units are properly engaged in transport position.

If they are not, an error message appears when driving in Road mode, either "1414 Mowing unit right not in transport position" or "1415 Mowing unit left not in transport position".

If one of the error messages above appears, stop the machine immediately and correct the error (see also the list of errors in the Appendix).

243

Driving and Transport

Pos: 5.13 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Absperrhahn am Frontausleger sperren @ 0\mod_1196333122498_78.doc @ 6832

9.2.4 Disable the shut-off valve on the front outrigger

B

1

A

BMII-285

Pos: 5.14 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Freigabeschalter Straße/Feld @ 0\mod_1196320452967_78.doc @ 6351

Fig. 198:

• Set the shut-off valve (1) on the front to the closed position (position B). The shut-off valve is located under the front guard.

9.2.5 Release switch – road/field

Pos: 5.15 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Freigabeschalter Straße/Feld in Position bringen @ 0\mod_1196333385858_78.doc @ 6851

1 II

Pos: 5.16 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

I

Fig. 199

Set the road safety switch to "Road travel" position. (Position I)

BM 400 0007

244

Pos: 5.17 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Freigabeschalter Fahrantrieb @ 0\mod_1196319179092_78.doc @ 6293

9.2.6 Release switch travelling gear

Pos: 5.18 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Freigabeschalter Fahrantrieb in Position bringen @ 0\mod_1196333615201_78.doc @ 6870

1 II

Driving and Transport

Pos: 5.19 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

I

BM 400 0010

Fig. 200

• Move the "Travelling gear" release switch to position (II) (travelling gear on).

245

Driving and Transport

Pos: 5.20 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Motor anlassen @ 0\mod_1196338713030_78.doc @ 6889

9.3 Starting the engine

Pos: 5.21 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Motor nicht in geschlossenen Räumen laufen lassen. @ 0\mod_1196343428061_78.doc @ 6915

Pos: 5.22 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Motor starten Vorraussetzung BM 400 Bild @ 41\mod_1271921531365_78.doc @ 373705

Danger! - Do not allow the engine to run in enclosed areas.

Effect: Danger, toxic exhaust!

Only start the engine from the driver's seat.

Always make certain there is no one in the danger zone of the machine.

Activate the horn.

Never allow the engine to run in closed rooms without an extraction unit.

Ensure sufficient ventilation.

Fig. 201

Pos: 5.23 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Motor starten Vorraussetzung BM 400/500 Text @ 0\mod_1196344454826_78.doc @ 6976

Prerequisites:

• The main battery switch must be in position I (closed).

• Release switch (3) "Parking brake" must be in position II (engaged).

• Release switch (1) "Road/Field" must be in position II (Field mode).

• Release switch (4) "Travelling gear" must be in position I (off).

Pos: 5.24 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

246

Pos: 5.25 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Motor anlassen @ 0\mod_1196344545436_78.doc @ 6995

Starting the engine.

Driving and Transport

BMII-187

Fig. 202:

The following conditions must be met to start the machine:

• The main battery switch must be in position I (closed).

Note

"Parking brake" release switch must be in position II (engaged).

"Travelling gear" release switch must be in position I (off).

Never activate the starter for longer than 20 seconds. Release the ignition key as soon as the engine is running.

Pos: 5.26 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Anlassvorgang Motor wiederholen @ 0\mod_1196344716561_78.doc @ 7014

If the starting process needs to be repeated:

• Switch off the ignition and wait for at least 2 minutes.

• Repeat the starting process.

After the engine is started the "Engine fault" control light shines briefly. Check immediately whether this pilot lamp goes out. If not, switch off the engine at once and remove the fault.

The job computer carries out internal system check.

After the ignition is switched on, depending on the position of the "Road / field" release switch, the basic screen "Road travel" or "Field mode" appears in the display.

At lower temperatures:

In the cold season let the engine run at idling speed for a few minutes after starting.

Always use a so-called “winter diesel” fuel for operation in cold seasons at temperatures below 10 °C (50 °F).

Pos: 5.27 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

247

Driving and Transport

Pos: 5.28 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Abwürgen des Motors @ 0\mod_1196345072451_78.doc @ 7033

9.3.1 Killing the engine

Pos: 5.29 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Starten mit einer Hilfsbatterie @ 0\mod_1196345290139_78.doc @ 7052

Caution! - Killing the engine

Effect: Damage to the machine

• If an engine at operating heat stalls, immediately restart the engine to avoid an excessive heat accumulation at functionally important parts. Allow the engine to run at idle speed for approx. 1 to 2 minutes before finally turning it off.

9.3.2

Pos: 5.30 /BA/Sicherheit/Batterie/Batteriegase sind hochexplosiv Version 2 @ 0\mod_1196345356733_78.doc @ 7071

Starting with an Auxiliary Battery

Danger! - Battery gases are highly explosive

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

Keep ignition sources and naked flames away from the battery.

Note the correct polarity when disconnecting and connecting the battery.

Pos: 5.31 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/kalte Jahreszeit @ 0\mod_1196345438248_78.doc @ 7090

The machine can be started with an additional 12-V battery in the cold season. The auxiliary battery must be connected in parallel with the machine batteries.

Pos: 5.32.1 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Anfahren @ 0\mod_1196345912842_78.doc @ 7109

9.4 Starting

Pos: 5.32.2 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Danger! - Starting to Drive

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

Do not ride as a passenger on the ladders or platform.

Never drive with an engaged parking brake.

Always adapt the travelling speed of the machine on road and field to the given conditions.

When driving down hills, on inclines or through obstacles, adjust driving behaviour to prevailing driving conditions.

Note that the machine swings out when cornering.

248

Pos: 5.32.3 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Beschleunigungsverhalten einstellen Fahrhebel NEU @ 41\mod_1271309857175_78.doc @ 369255

9.4.1 Setting the Acceleration Behaviour

Driving and Transport

Fig.203

Four different acceleration stages can be selected while driving with the selector switch acceleration ramp (2) attached to the multi-function lever (1).

With constant operation of the multi-function lever (1) in a direction and at a constant engine speed, the driving speed will increase slowest in acceleration stage I and fastest in acceleration stage IV.

Pos: 5.32.4 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Allgemeines zum Fahren Hecklenkung @ 0\mod_1196346869123_78.doc @ 7252

• Move the selector switch (2) to the desired acceleration stage.

9.4.2 General on Driving

BM 400 149

Fig. 204:

Observe the following instructions when driving:

Pos: 5.32.5 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Allgemeines zum Fahren abhängig vom Lenkprogramm BM 500 @ 32\mod_1253254046175_78.doc @ 313095

Pos: 5.32.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Handling the machine requires a certain amount of practice because of the rear steering.

The machine handles differently in level I and II.

In the case of an error message in the Info centre immediately stop and remove the error.

If you cannot rectify the fault inform the customer service or your KRONE dealer.

Driving behaviour depends on the steering program

249

Driving and Transport

Pos: 5.32.7 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Überhitzen des Hydrostatsystems vermeiden @ 0\mod_1196347119983_78.doc @ 7271

9.4.3 Preventing an overheating of the hydrostatic system

Pos: 5.32.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

If the hydrostatic system is overheated, an acoustic warning signal occurs and an optical warning symbol appears on the display. Switch off the engine and establish cause of overheating.

Then improve the effectiveness of the hydrostatic travelling gear by selecting a lower speed, which will reduce the oil temperature.

Note

When the travelling gear has been killed, never wait longer than 5 seconds to reset the driving lever to “neutral”; subsequently select a lower speed.

The drive moment which acts on the drive wheels depends on the oil pressure in the hydrostatic drive system. If the pressure requirement becomes higher than the pressure in the hydrostatic system, the pressure relief valve will open and the self-propelled high performance mower-conditioner will reduce speed or not move.

As soon as the required drive moment decreases (this is achieved by selecting a lower speed), the self-propelled high performance mower-conditioner will drive on again.

250

Pos: 5.32.9 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Vorwärtsfahren Fahrhebel NEU @ 41\mod_1271311435596_78.doc @ 369305

Driving and Transport

Pos: 5.32.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig.205

Starting forwards from standstill

After the engine is started and the travelling gear is released, the gearbox is in the neutral position.

Press the activation button for the travelling gear (2) and keep it pressed.

Move the multi-function lever (1) to the front, the machine starts to move forwards and accelerates.

If you release the multi-function lever (1), it returns automatically to the central position

(0); the speed remains constant.

If you move the multi-function lever (1) to the rear while travelling, the machine decelerates; it is braked until is comes to a stop by friction.

251

Driving and Transport

Pos: 5.32.11 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Rückwärtsfahren Fahrhebel NEU @ 41\mod_1271312002784_78.doc @ 369355

9.4.5 Reversing

Pos: 5.32.12 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig.206

Starting in reverse from standstill

After the engine is started and the travelling gear is released, the gearbox is in the neutral position.

Note

Press the activation button for the travelling gear (2) and keep it pressed.

Move the multi-function lever (1) to the rear; the machine starts to move in reverse and accelerates.

If you release the multi-function lever (1), it returns automatically to the central position

(0); the speed remains constant.

If you move the multi-function lever (1) forward during travel, the machine decelerates. It is braked until it comes to a stop by friction.

An acoustic warning signal sounds when reversing.

252

Driving and Transport

Pos: 5.32.13 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Tempomat Fahrhebel NEU @ 41\mod_1271312183893_78.doc @ 369410

9.5 Cruise

The cruise control can be activated only when travelling forwards. When the cruise control is activated, the machine is accelerated or decelerated with the set acceleration stage to the speed stored for the cruise control mode.

9.5.1 Saving the Speed for Cruise Control Mode

The speed is saved for the operating mode (road/field) the machine is currently in. One speed can be saved for road and field mode each.

Fig.207

Accelerate the machine to the desired speed.

While travelling press the activation button for the travelling gear (2) and keep it pressed, move the multi-function lever (1) to the right and back to the middle position.

The momentary travelling speed is stored.

The stored speed (1) is displayed in the display of the Info centre in the travelling gear data Info area.

253

Driving and Transport

9.5.2 Activating Cruise Control

9.5.3

Pos: 5.32.14 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig.208

• While driving, move the multi-function lever (2) to the right without the activation key. The saved speed is reached and the

Centre display.

Deactivating Cruise Control

icon for cruise control becomes active in the Info

The cruise control is deactivated by overriding the multi-function lever, operating the operating brake and switching off the travelling gear.

If you switch into "Road/field" mode, the display switches to the value that is saved for the currently selected operating mode (field or road speed).

254

Driving and Transport

Pos: 5.32.15 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Anhalten Fahrhebel NEU @ 41\mod_1271312895643_78.doc @ 369460

9.6 Stopping

9.6.1

The machine can be brought to a stop either with the multi-function lever or with the foot brake.

Stopping with the Multi-Function Lever

Fig.209

Stopping from forward travel:

If you move the multi-function lever (1) to the rear during forward travel, the machine decelerates. It is braked until is comes to a stop.

Note - Alternative

If you move the multi-function lever (1) to the left during forward travel, the machine decelerates. It is braked until is comes to a stop.

Stopping from reverse travel:

Pos: 5.32.16 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig.210

If you move the multi-function lever (1) forward during reverse travel, the machine decelerates.

It is braked until is comes to a stop.

255

Driving and Transport

Pos: 5.32.17 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Anhalten mit Fußbremsen @ 0\mod_1196350380076_78.doc @ 7512

9.6.2 Stopping with Foot Brakes

Danger!

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• The brake function must be checked before the start of every trip.

The footbrake must take effect beginning with the first third of pedal travel.

Check the brake linings regularly

Pos: 5.32.18 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BM 400 0228

Fig. 211:

Brake the machine slightly:

Depress the foot brake slightly

When you release the brake pedal, the machine accelerates and returns to its original driving speed.

Brake the machine strongly (braking to avoid accident):

• Press the foot brake forcefully downwards.

The machine immedialety comes to a complete stop.

256

Pos: 5.32.19 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/Feststellbremse @ 6\mod_1214898864996_78.doc @ 96776

9.7

Pos: 5.32.20 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Feststellbremse @ 0\mod_1196350787826_78.doc @ 7531

Parking Brake

Danger! - Leaving the Cab

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

Before leaving the cab, always apply the parking brake.

Release the parking brake each time before starting to drive.

Driving and Transport

Pos: 5.32.21 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 212:

Note - Parking brake engaged

Effect: Brake overheating

• Do not drive with the parking brake engaged.

I - Parking brake released

II - Parking brake engaged

257

Driving and Transport

Pos: 5.32.22 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Motor abstellen @ 0\mod_1196351418608_78.doc @ 7571

9.8 Switch off the engine

Fig. 213:

Pos: 5.32.23 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Maschine abstellen @ 0\mod_1196352108780_78.doc @ 7590

Note - Effect: Longer service life

Before finally switching off allow the engine 1 - 2 min. to run in the lower idling range so all important parts of the engine can cool down.

• Turn the ignition key (1) to position “0”.

9.9 Switch off the machine

Pos: 5.32.24 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Danger! - Leaving the machine

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.

• Move the mowing units into transport position.

Move the "Road/Field" release switch to the road position.

Apply the holding brake.

Move the "Travelling gear" release switch to position I (off).

Switch off the engine.

Remove the ignition key.

If necessary, fit wheel chocks in place.

258

Driving and Transport

Pos: 5.32.25 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Abschleppen @ 35\mod_1256130365838_78.doc @ 326611

9.10 Towing

Pos: 5.32.26 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Abschleppen @ 0\mod_1196352293795_78.doc @ 7609

Caution!

Only move machine out of the danger zone. Never tow over longer distances.

Pos: 5.32.27 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Feststellbremse manuell lösen @ 0\mod_1196352596201_78.doc @ 7628

If the machine no longer builds up the oil pressure for releasing the parking brake, then the parking brake must be released manually.

9.10.1

Pos: 5.32.28 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Unvorhergesehene Inbetriebnahme @ 0\mod_1196317459889_78.doc @ 6156

Releasing the holding brake manually

Danger! - Accidental start-up of machine and rolling.

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back.

Pos: 5.32.29 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Unterlegkeile anbringen @ 0\mod_1196352858998_78.doc @ 7647

Pos: 5.32.30 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Feststellbremse lösen Bild BM 420 @ 58\mod_1297059948584_78.doc @ 554750

Fitting wheel chocks

• Place wheel chocks (1) on both sides in front of or behind (according to slope) the driving wheels (front axle).

Always place the wheel chocks (1) so that the machine cannot roll away.

Fold the wheel chocks (1) open completely and place then close up against the drive wheels.

2 2

1

BM 420 0039

Pos: 5.32.31 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Feststellbremse lösen @ 0\mod_1196353036858_78.doc @ 7666

Fig.214

The spring (1) must be set on a block to release the parking brake.

To do this:

• Loosen the nuts (2)

• Set the spring (1) to block.

• Tighten the nuts (2) and counter.

Note - Towing

• Switch on the ignition, so that the indicator (hazard warning flasher) and brake lights function.

Switch the road/field release switch into the road travel position.

Increased steering and braking forces must be applied with the engine switched off.

Pos: 6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

259

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 7.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/A-E/Bedienung- Mähwerke @ 0\mod_1196403531183_78.doc @ 7808

10

Pos: 7.2.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch @ 0\mod_1196401545090_78.doc @ 7728

Operation – Mowing Units

10.1 Intended Use

Pos: 7.2.2 /BA/Einleitung/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/EasyCut/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch (Mehrzahl) @ 0\mod_1196403327543_78.doc @ 7789

Pos: 7.2.3 /BA/Einleitung/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Nicht bestimmungs gemäss @ 0\mod_1196401324340_78.doc @ 7690

The disc mowers are designed solely for normal agricultural use (intended use).

Any use of the machine for other purposes is deemed not to be in accordance with intended use. The manufacturer shall not be liable for any resulting damage; the user alone shall bear the risk.

Operation in accordance with intended use also includes observing the operating, maintenance and service instructions specified by the manufacturer.

Pos: 7.2.4 /BA/Einleitung/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Vertraut mit Maschine @ 0\mod_1196402755699_78.doc @ 7770

Unauthorised modifications to the machine may affect the properties of the machine or disrupt proper operation. For this reason, unauthorised modifications shall exclude any liability of the manufacturer for consequential damage.

The disc mower must be used, maintained and repaired only by personnel who are acquainted with the machine and have been informed of the dangers involved.

The applicable accident prevention regulations and all other generally recognised safety, health and road traffic regulations must be observed.

Pos: 7.3 /BA/Bedienung /Falscher Umgang mit Fehlermeldungen @ 39\mod_1268149789980_78.doc @ 358355

CAUTION! –Wrong handling with error messages, identification of faults and defects on the machine

Effect: serious subsequent damages to the machine

• If an error message occurs or if a fault or a defect is recognized on the machine, the machine has to be stopped and gears and motor have to be switched off

Before continuing with work, eliminate the cause of the problem immediately

Pos: 7.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

260

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 7.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Bedienung der Mähwerke @ 0\mod_1196404785480_78.doc @ 7850

10.2 Operation of Mowing Units

Pos: 7.6 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Ausheben_Senken_Anklappen der Mähwerke @ 0\mod_1196404051855_78.doc @ 7827

Danger!

No one is permitted in the danger zone when lifting, lowering or folding up mowing units, or when turning on drives.

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.

• Do not lift, lower or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that neither persons, animals nor objects are in the swivel range of the mowing unit.

Pos: 7.7 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Bedienung der Mähwerke Bild BM 500 @ 41\mod_1271766652336_78.doc @ 372975

3 1

2

BM 500 0151

Pos: 7.8 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Bedienung der Mähwerke Text @ 0\mod_1196406980386_78.doc @ 7910

Fig.215

Operation of mowing units is divided into three areas.

The operating panel contains switches that are needed to operate the mowing units. (for example "Road/Field" release switch)

The multi-function lever combines all functions needed to operate the mowing units. (this includes lifting, lowering, folding up, switching to working position, transport position or headland position and turning on the mowing unit drives)

Pos: 7.9 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

All settings/specifications for automatic sequences are stored in the Info Centre. (for example time/path control, overcut, automatic cleaning time)

For further information, please refer to the Chapter "Info Centre".

261

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 7.10 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Mähwerke abklappen @ 31\mod_1252577545091_78.doc @ 306348

10.3 Folding Down the Mowing Units

Pos: 7.11 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Ausheben_Senken_Anklappen der Mähwerke @ 0\mod_1196404051855_78.doc @ 7827

Danger!

No one is permitted in the danger zone when lifting, lowering or folding up mowing units, or when turning on drives.

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.

• Do not lift, lower or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that neither persons, animals nor objects are in the swivel range of the mowing unit.

Pos: 7.12 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420/Vorraussetzung Mähwerke abklappen BM 500 @ 41\mod_1272284555131_78.doc @ 375446

Pos: 7.13 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig.216

Prerequisites:

The main battery switch (1) must be in position I (closed).

Release switch (3) "Parking brake" must be in position II (engaged).

Release switch (4) "Travelling gear" must be in position I (off).

Start the engine.

Release switch (1) "Road/Field" must be in position II (Field mode).

262

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 7.14.1 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Alle Mähwerke/Neuer Fahrhebel/Alle Mähwerke von Transportstellung in die Vorgewendestellung absenken BM 500 @ 41\mod_1271323130846_78.doc @ 370287

10.3.1 Lowering All Mowing Units from Transport Position to Headland Position

Fig.217

• Using the (10) key with (12) key pressed on the multi-function lever, lower all mowing units simultaneously from transport position to headland position.

Pos: 7.14.2 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Hinweis entsprechende Tasten solange gedrückt halten @ 31\mod_1252644434480_78.doc @ 306500

Note

Hold the relevant keys down until small movements are no longer visible on the mowing units.

Pos: 7.14.3 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Alle Mähwerke/Alle Mähwerke von Vorgewendestellung in die Arbeitsstellung absenken BM 500 @ 31\mod_1252581339326_78.doc @ 306398

10.3.2 Lowering All Mowing Units from Headland Position to Working Position

• Using the (10) key without (12) key pressed on the multi-function lever, lower all mowing units simultaneously from headland position to working position.

Headland position can be activated by briefly pressing the "10" key.

The lateral mowing units are then lowered to the working position depending on the set mode

(time / distance control).

The mowing units are lowered in the following order.

Front mowing unit: always immediately (without delay) lateral right/left mowing units: delayed according to the setting in the info centre

Settings can only be made in the info centre. See Info Centre chapter "Machine Setting"

Pos: 7.15 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

263

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 7.16.1 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Seitliche Mähwerke/Neuer Fahrhebel/Seitliche Mähwerke von Transport- in die Vorgewendestellung absenken BM 500 @ 41\mod_1271323535518_78.doc @ 370338

10.3.3 Lowering the Lateral Mowing Units from Transport Position to Headland Position

Fig.218

Using the (4) keys with (12) key pressed on the multi-function lever, lower the left mowing unit from transport position to headland position.

Using the (6) keys with (12) key pressed on the multi-function lever, lower the right mowing unit from transport position to headland position.

Pos: 7.16.2 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Hinweis entsprechende Tasten solange gedrückt halten @ 31\mod_1252644434480_78.doc @ 306500

Note

Hold the relevant keys down until small movements are no longer visible on the mowing units.

Pos: 7.16.3 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Seitliche Mähwerke/Neuer Fahrhebel/Seitliche Mähwerke von Vorgewendestellung in die Arbeitsstellung absenken @ 41\mod_1271323611862_78.doc @ 370363

10.3.4 Lowering the Lateral Mowing Units from Headland Position to Working Position

Pos: 7.17 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig.219

Using the (4) keys on the multi-function lever, lower the left mowing unit from headland position to working position.

Using the (6) keys on the multi-function lever, lower the right mowing unit from headland position to working position.

264

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 7.18.1 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Frontmähwerk/Neuer Fahrhebel/Frontmähwerke von Transportstellung in die Vorgewendestellung absenken BM 500 @ 41\mod_1271324333831_78.doc @ 370414

10.3.5 Lowering the Front Mowing Unit from Transport Position to Headland Position

Fig.220

• Using the (11) keys with (12) key pressed on the multi-function lever, lower the front mowing unit from transport position to headland position.

Pos: 7.18.2 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Hinweis entsprechende Tasten solange gedrückt halten @ 31\mod_1252644434480_78.doc @ 306500

Note

Hold the relevant keys down until small movements are no longer visible on the mowing units.

Pos: 7.18.3 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Frontmähwerk/Neuer Fahrhebel/Frontmähwerke von Vorgewendestellung in Arbeitsstellung absenken BM 500 @ 41\mod_1271324340612_78.doc @ 370439

10.3.6 Lowering the Front Mowing Unit from Headland Position to Working Position

Pos: 7.19 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig.221

• Using the (11) key on the multi-function lever, lower the front mowing unit from headland position to working position.

265

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 7.20.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Mähwerksantrieb @ 0\mod_1196415953651_78.doc @ 8154

10.4 Mowing Unit Drive

Pos: 7.20.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Ausheben_Senken_Anklappen der Mähwerke @ 0\mod_1196404051855_78.doc @ 7827

Danger!

No one is permitted in the danger zone when lifting, lowering or folding up mowing units, or when turning on drives.

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.

• Do not lift, lower or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that neither persons, animals nor objects are in the swivel range of the mowing unit.

Pos: 7.20.3 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420/Vorraussetzung Mähwerke abklappen BM 500 @ 41\mod_1272284555131_78.doc @ 375446

Fig.222

Prerequisites:

The main battery switch (1) must be in position I (closed).

Release switch (3) "Parking brake" must be in position II (engaged).

Release switch (4) "Travelling gear" must be in position I (off).

Start the engine.

Pos: 7.20.4 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Mähwerksantireb/Vorraussetzungen Teil 2_Mähwerksantrieb @ 0\mod_1196416105979_78.doc @ 8173

Pos: 7.20.5 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Mähwerksantireb/Hinweis Mähen_Mähwerksantrieb @ 0\mod_1196416325666_78.doc @ 8192

Release switch (1) "Road/Field" must be in position II (Field mode).

Move the mowing units at least to the headland position.

Move the "Travelling gear" release switch (4) to position (II) "Travelling gear on".

Note - Mowing

To be able to switch on the mowing unit drives, the mowing units must be in at least the headland position or lower.

Pos: 7.20.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

266

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 7.20.7 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Mähwerksantireb/Mähwerksantriebe ein- bzw. ausschalten @ 0\mod_1196416826651_78.doc @ 8230

10.4.1 Switching the Mowing Unit Drives On and Off

Note

The cross switch lever turns the mowing unit drives on and off.

It is important when activating the cross switch lever for it always to be activated beyond the second resistor. If the (17) key is pressed in addition to the cross switch lever, make certain the key remains activated during the entire search process. Do not release the key (17) until the cross switch has moved back to the central position.

Pos: 7.20.8 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Mähwerksantireb/Neuer Fahrhebel/Mähwerksantrieb links ein-/ ausschalten @ 41\mod_1271324607675_78.doc @ 370490

10.4.2 Switching the Left Mowing Unit Drive On/Off

Pos: 7.20.9 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig.223

To switch on:

Press the (17) key on the cross switch lever (23).

With the (17) key pressed, move the cross switch lever to the left (G) beyond the second resistor.

With the (17) key pressed, move the cross switch lever back to the central position (0).

Left mowing unit drive is turned on.

To switch off:

Without the (17) key pressed, move the cross switch lever (23) to the left (G) beyond the second resistor. The left mowing unit drive is turned off.

If the cross switch lever is released, it automatically returns to the central position (0). The drive remains turned off.

267

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 7.20.10 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Mähwerksantireb/Neuer Fahrhebel/Mähwerksantrieb rechts ein-/ ausschalten @ 41\mod_1271324625096_78.doc @ 370515

10.4.3 Switching the Right Mowing Unit Drive On/Off

Pos: 7.20.11 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig.224

To switch on:

Press the (17) key on the cross switch lever (23).

With the (17) key pressed, move the cross switch lever to the right (J) beyond the second resistor.

With the (17) key pressed, move the cross switch lever back to the central position (0).

Right mowing unit drive is turned on.

To switch off:

Without the (17) key pressed, move the cross switch lever (23) to the right (J) beyond the second resistor. The right mowing unit drive is turned off.

If the cross switch lever is released, it automatically returns to the central position (0). The drive remains turned off.

268

Pos: 7.20.12 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Mähwerksantireb/Neuer Fahrhebel/Mähwerksantrieb front ein-/ ausschalten @ 41\mod_1271324640143_78.doc @ 370540

10.4.4 Switching the Front Mowing Unit Drive On/Off

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 7.20.13 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig.225

To switch on:

Press the (17) key on the cross switch lever (23).

With the (17) key pressed, move the cross switch lever forward (K) beyond the second resistor.

With the (17) key pressed, move the cross switch lever back to the central position (0).

Front mowing unit drive is turned on.

To switch off:

Without the (17) key pressed, move the cross switch lever (23) forward (K) beyond the second resistor. The front mowing unit drive is turned off.

If the cross switch lever is released, it automatically returns to the central position (0). The drive remains turned off.

269

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 7.20.14 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Mähwerksantireb/Neuer Fahrhebel/Alle Mähwerksantriebe ein-/ ausschalten @ 41\mod_1271324655909_78.doc @ 370565

10.4.5 Switching All Mowing Unit Drives On/Off

Pos: 7.21 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig.226

To switch on:

Press the (17) key on the cross switch lever (23).

With the (17) key pressed, move the cross switch lever back (M) beyond the second resistor.

With the (17) key pressed, move the cross switch lever back to the central position (0).

All mowing unit drives are turned on.

To switch off:

Without the (17) key pressed, move the cross switch lever (23) back (M) beyond the second resistor. All mowing unit drives are turned off.

If the cross switch lever is released, it automatically returns to the central position (0). The drives remain turned off.

Note - switch off all mowing unit drives

• Pressing the (1) key on the multi-function lever also turns off all mowing unit drives.

270

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 7.22 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Mähwerke anklappen @ 31\mod_1252561666154_78.doc @ 305965

10.5 Folding up the Mowing Units

Pos: 7.23 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Ausheben_Senken_Anklappen der Mähwerke Stillstand abwarten @ 0\mod_1196420841213_78.doc @ 8665

Danger! - No one is permitted in the danger zone when lifting, lowering or folding up mowing units, or when turning on drives.

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.

Lateral mowing units may only be folded up when the mowing units have come to a complete stop.

Do not lift, lower or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that neither persons, animals nor objects are in the swivel range of the mowing unit.

After the mowing units are folded up, move the safety switch "Road/Field" to position I

(Road travel).

Pos: 7.24 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Erklärung Vorgewendestellung / Transportstellung @ 0\mod_1196421528916_78.doc @ 8685

Note - Explanation of headland position / transport position

A distinction is made when lifting the mowing units between headland position and transport position.

In the headland position, the mowing units are automatically raised to the headland position.

Pos: 7.25 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

271

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 7.26 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Seitliche Mähwerke/Prüfen der Verriegelung an den seitlichen Mähwerken @ 13\mod_1226496860803_78.doc @ 166017

10.5.1 Checking the Lock on the Lateral Mowing Units

Danger! - Check interlock

Effect: Danger of fatal or serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.

• Before the lateral mowing units are brought in transport position, make a visual inspection of the mechanical fuses. If the mowing units are in working position the pawl

(1) must be in the position as illustrated (a = approx. 5°). Ensure that the spring (2) is in a correct position.

Pos: 7.27 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 227:

272

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 7.28.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/Alle Mähwerke von Arbeitsstellung in die Vorgewendestellung ausheben @ 31\mod_1252658891198_78.doc @ 306824

10.5.2 Lifting All Mowing Units from Working Position to Headland Position

Pos: 7.28.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Ausheben_Senken_Anklappen der Mähwerke Stillstand abwarten @ 0\mod_1196420841213_78.doc @ 8665

Danger! - No one is permitted in the danger zone when lifting, lowering or folding up mowing units, or when turning on drives.

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.

Pos: 7.28.3 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Alle Mähwerke/Neuer Fahrhebel/Alle Mähwerke in die Vorgewendestellung ausheben Bild @ 41\mod_1271325306221_78.doc @ 370615

Lateral mowing units may only be folded up when the mowing units have come to a complete stop.

Do not lift, lower or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that neither persons, animals nor objects are in the swivel range of the mowing unit.

After the mowing units are folded up, move the safety switch "Road/Field" to position I

(Road travel).

Fig.228

Pos: 7.28.4 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Alle Mähwerke/Alle Mähwerke in die Vorgewendestellung ausheben @ 31\mod_1252649418792_78.doc @ 306600

Briefly pressing the (9) key on the multi-function lever automatically lifts all mowing units from the working position to the headland position.

Note

The "Lift all mowers" function is designed for full engine speed. If the engine speed is slower, the front mowing unit will not lift completely.

Pos: 7.28.5 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Alle Mähwerke/Alle Mähwerke von Vorgewend- in die Transportstellung klappen @ 31\mod_1252649758355_78.doc @ 306625

10.5.3 Folding All Mowing Units from Headland Position to Transport Position

• The mowing unit drives must be turned off.

All mowing units can coast down after the mower drives are turned off. Wait for the mowing unit to come to a complete stop.

• Using the (9) key with (12) key pressed on the multi-function lever, move all mowing units simultaneously from headland position to transport position.

Pos: 7.29 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

273

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 7.30.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Seitliche Mähwerke von Arbeitsstellung in die Vorgewendestellung ausheben @ 31\mod_1252659275448_78.doc @ 306873

10.5.4 Lifting the Lateral Mowing Units from Working Position to Headland Position

Pos: 7.30.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Ausheben_Senken_Anklappen der Mähwerke @ 0\mod_1196404051855_78.doc @ 7827

Danger!

No one is permitted in the danger zone when lifting, lowering or folding up mowing units, or when turning on drives.

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.

• Do not lift, lower or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that neither persons, animals nor objects are in the swivel range of the mowing unit.

Pos: 7.30.3 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Seitliche Mähwerke/Neuer Fahrhebel/Seitliche Mähwerke von Arbeits- in Vorgewe in Transportstellung anklappen Bild @ 41\mod_1271326036815_78.doc @ 370665

Fig.229

Pos: 7.30.4 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Seitliche Mähwerke/Seitliche Mähwerke von Arbeits- Vorgewendestellung ausheben Big M 500 @ 31\mod_1252650991370_78.doc @ 306675

Using the (5) keys on the multi-function lever, lift the left mowing unit from working position to headland position.

Using the (7) keys on the multi-function lever, lift the right mowing unit from working position to headland position.

Pos: 7.30.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Seitliche Mähwerke von Vorgewendestellung in die Transportstellung klappen @ 0\mod_1196423977651_78.doc @ 8763

10.5.5 Folding the Lateral Mowing Units from Headland Position to Transport Position

Pos: 7.30.6 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Seitliche Mähwerke/seitl Mähwerke von Vorgewendestellung in Transportstellung BM 500 @ 31\mod_1252563652951_78.doc @ 306071

• The mowing unit drives must be turned off.

All mowing units can coast down after the mower drives are turned off. Wait for the mowing unit to come to a complete stop.

Using the (5) keys with (12) key pressed on the multi-function lever, move the left mowing unit from headland position to transport position.

Using the (7) keys with (12) key pressed on the multi-function lever, move the right mowing unit from headland position to transport position.

Pos: 7.31 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

274

Pos: 7.32 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Verriegelung prüfen BM 400 @ 13\mod_1226329022901_78.doc @ 165463

Operation – Mowing Units

Danger! - Check lock

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.

In transport position the lateral mowing units must be folded back and locked mechanically into vertical position. In addition the mowing units must be raised as far as the stop device. Once folded back check the position of the mowing units.

Pos: 7.33 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

1

BM 400 0147_1

Fig. 230

The sensors (1) on the ratchets (right and left-hand side of machine) detect whether the mechanical interlocks of the lateral mowing units are properly engaged in transport position.

If they are not, an error message appears when driving in Road mode, either "1414 Mowing unit right not in transport position" or "1415 Mowing unit left not in transport position".

If one of the error messages above appears, stop the machine immediately and correct the error (see also the list of errors in the Appendix).

275

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 7.34 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/Frontmähwerk von Arbeits- in Vorgewendestellung @ 49\mod_1287055454140_78.doc @ 464713

10.5.7 Lifting the Front Mowing Unit from Working Position to Headland Position

Pos: 7.35 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Ausheben_Senken_Anklappen der Mähwerke Stillstand abwarten @ 0\mod_1196420841213_78.doc @ 8665

Danger! - No one is permitted in the danger zone when lifting, lowering or folding up mowing units, or when turning on drives.

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.

Lateral mowing units may only be folded up when the mowing units have come to a complete stop.

Do not lift, lower or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that neither persons, animals nor objects are in the swivel range of the mowing unit.

After the mowing units are folded up, move the safety switch "Road/Field" to position I

(Road travel).

Pos: 7.36 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Frontmähwerk/Neuer Fahrhebel/Frontmähwerk von Arbeits- in Vorgewendestellung @ 41\mod_1271326340425_78.doc @ 370740

10.5.8 Lifting the Front Mowing Unit from Working Position to Headland Position

Pos: 7.37 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig.231

• Using the (8) key on the multi-function lever, lift the front mowing unit from working position to headland position.

276

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 7.38 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/Frontmähwerk von Vorgewende- in Transportstellung anheben BM 500 @ 49\mod_1287051120093_78.doc @ 464687

10.6 Folding the Front Mowing Unit from Headland Position to Transport Position

Pos: 7.39 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Ausheben_Senken_Anklappen der Mähwerke Stillstand abwarten @ 0\mod_1196420841213_78.doc @ 8665

Danger! - No one is permitted in the danger zone when lifting, lowering or folding up mowing units, or when turning on drives.

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.

Lateral mowing units may only be folded up when the mowing units have come to a complete stop.

Do not lift, lower or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that neither persons, animals nor objects are in the swivel range of the mowing unit.

Pos: 7.40 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Frontmähwerk/Neuer Fahrhebel/Frontmähwerk von Vorgewende- in Transportstellung anheben BM 500 @ 41\mod_1271326353003_78.doc @ 370765

After the mowing units are folded up, move the safety switch "Road/Field" to position I

(Road travel).

Pos: 7.41 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig.232

• Using the (8) key with (12) key pressed on the multi-function lever, move the front mowing unit from headland position to transport position.

277

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 7.42 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Mähen @ 0\mod_1196426120010_78.doc @ 8839

10.7 Mowing

Pos: 7.43 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Unerwartete Bewegung fortschleudern von Steinen @ 0\mod_1196425801338_78.doc @ 8820

Danger! - Unexpected motion of cutting tools or mowing units and forcibly ejected stones during operation.

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

The mowing units are suitable for and intended for cutting crops growing on the ground!

To prevent any of the mowing units from overloading, when operating a single mowing unit do not drive faster than you would if you were operating all mowing units simultaneously.

The mowing units are not suitable for mowing embankments!

The support skids must rest on the ground before start-up and during work!

Always check the protective devices for damage before the machine is used. Replace damaged protective devices immediately.

Move the protective devices into their protective positions.

Do not use the machine until you are absolutely sure that neither persons, animals nor objects are in the danger zone of the mowing units.

Pos: 7.44 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Reparatur_Wartung_Reinigungs @ 0\mod_1196426193026_78.doc @ 8858

Danger! - When performing repair, maintenance or cleaning work on the machine , or in the case of technical intervention, drive elements may start moving.

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

Work on the cutter blades or their fastenings must only be performed with the drive stopped and the cutting discs and drums stopped.

Switch off the mowing unit drives

Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

Wait until the cutting discs and/or drums have come to a complete stop

Remove the ignition key!

Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

Support the lifted mower bed! Never step under suspended loads!

Safe operation is only guaranteed if the blades have been fitted according to the instructions!

Always check the mowing unit for damaged, missing or worn blades, retaining bolts, leaf springs and cutting discs/blade drum before starting operation; replace any parts that are damaged, missing or worn!

Pos: 7.45 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

278

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 7.46 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Einheit Zetterprallblech bzw. Einheit Schneckenquerförderer nicht angebaut. @ 14\mod_1227107737315_78.doc @ 168398

Danger! - Tedder deflector plate unit or auger-type cross conveyor unit not fitted.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

The machine must not be placed in operation until the tedder deflector plate unit or auger-type cross conveyor unit has been properly installed.

Pos: 7.47 /BA/Bedienung /Wildschutz @ 46\mod_1283864895734_78.doc @ 451321

10.8 Game animal protection

5 6

7 8

B C D

Pic. 233

After the first switching on of the mowing unit drive an information picture with the correct mowing performance appears temporarily on the display.

When mowing from “outside to inside”, the animals are slowly forced from the safe boundary area into the centre of the area, which makes the possibility for a life-saving escape for the animal more difficult or takes it away.

A remedy for this issue is the mowing method from “inside to outside” of the area.

In doing so, you drive directly into the centre of the parcel without mowing the boundary area and mow anticlockwise from “inside to outside”. Therefore the animal can leave the field in

Pos: 7.48 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Voraussetzung zum Mähen BM 400 @ 0\mod_1196427018838_78.doc @ 8878 compliance with its flight behaviour without any harm.

Precondition for mowing:

BM 400 0266

Open the shut-off valve on the front outrigger.

Starting the engine

Move release switch for "Road/field" to position II (field mode).

Move the mowing units to the working position.

The guard cloths must be in the working position.

Move the "Travelling gear" release switch to position II (on).

Switch on the mowing unit drives.

Move the "Parking brake" release switch to position I (released).

Increase rpms to working speed.

Drive into the crop.

The travel speed during mowing is determined by usage conditions (soil conditions, height, density and nature of the crop)

Note - Reverse travel in Field mode!

The disc mowers are designed to travel forwards. If the road safety switch is in field position, the mowing units are automatically lifted out when the machine is reversed.

Pos: 7.49 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

279

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 7.50 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Hinweis abschalten der Schwimmstellung während des Mähens @ 49\mod_1287055607937_78.doc @ 464739

Note!

During mowing the mowing units are in “float position” so they can adapt to the ground contours during mowing process. If the machine is switched off when the mowing units are in working position, the float position will be deactivated. When starting again in working position the float position will stay deactivated. Only after the key for the function “lower all mowers” is shortly actuated, the mowing units will be in float position again (alternately the float position can be individually activated with the accordant key for each mowing unit).

Pos: 7.51 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

280

Pos: 7.52 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Schutze in Arbeitsstellung bringen @ 35\mod_1258461422738_78.doc @ 335195

10.8.1

Pos: 7.53 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Schutze in Arbeitsposition bringen BM 400 @ 0\mod_1196427345510_78.doc @ 8918

Moving the guards into the working position

Operation – Mowing Units

1

1

1

1

BM 400 0197

Fig. 234

Switch off the engine. Remove the ignition key!

Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

Check the guard cloths (1.3) regularly.

Replace worn or damaged guard cloths.

The guard cloth (3) must be tightened each time before using the mower so that it cannot be caught by the conditioner auger.

Note

The protective equipment on the mowing units, e.g. cloths and hoods, protects against flying stones and similar objects and also prevents access to dangerous parts.

Fold down the side plates (1) before operation.

Pos: 7.54 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Mähwerksantireb/Mähen mit einzelnen Mähwerken @ 0\mod_1196428174510_78.doc @ 8956

10.8.2 Mowing with Individual Mowing Units

The following options are available for mowing remaining pieces.

Lift the mowing units that are no longer required for mowing into headland position. To do this, activate the appropriate keys on the multi-function lever.

The front mowing unit alone can be used to mow small parcels of crop or narrow sections in open fields. The lateral mowing units then remain in transport position.

Pos: 7.55 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

281

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 7.56 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Schnellstopp Fahrhebel NEU @ 41\mod_1271329582862_78.doc @ 370790

10.8.3 Quick

Fig.235

Activating quick stop

• Move the multi-function lever (1) to the left while driving.

The machine decelerates to a complete stop.

Pos: 7.57 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Schneller Fahrtrichtungswechsel (Schnellreversierung) Fahrhebel NEU @ 41\mod_1271329848065_78.doc @ 370815

10.8.4 Fast Direction Change (Fast Reversing)

Pos: 7.58 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig.236

Activating fast reversing

• While travelling press the activation button for the travelling gear (2) and keep it pressed, move the multi-function lever (1) to the left and back to the middle position.

The machine decelerates down to standstill and accelerates in the opposite direction to approx.

70% of the previous travelling speed.

Note

Fast reversing is possible only in the field mode.

282

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 7.59 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke Big M 400/Achstrennung ein- /ausschalten @ 0\mod_1196428626854_78.doc @ 9055

10.8.5 Switching Axle Separation On and Off

Switch on axle separation to prevent the wheels from spinning on slippery surfaces. Axle separation is only available in Field mode.

Prerequisites for activating the axle separation:

Road/field release switch must be in the field mode position

Travelling gear release switch must be switched on.

Travel speed must be less than 14 km/h.

Pos: 8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 237:

Switching on the axle separation

Actuate the axle separation button (1) – axle separation is switched on

The symbol (axle separation active) appears in the display of the Info centre.

Switching off the axle separation

• Actuate the axle separation button (1) again.

The icon (axle separation active) appears in the display of the Info Centre.

283

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 9.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/A-E/Einstellungen der Mähwerke @ 0\mod_1196660315463_78.doc @ 9095

11

Pos: 9.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Spezielle Sicherheitshinweise @ 0\mod_1196660495760_78.doc @ 9134

Adjusting the mowing units

11.1 Special Safety Instructions

Pos: 9.3 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Ausführen von Instandsetzungs-, Pflege-, Wartungs- und Reinigungsarbeiten @ 0\mod_1196660613260_78.doc @ 9153

Danger! - When performing repair, maintenance or cleaning work on the machine , or in the case of technical intervention, drive elements may start moving.

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

The cutter blades can continue to rotate after the drive has been switched off. Only approach the machine once the work tools have come to a complete standstill!

After completing maintenance work reattach all safety devices properly.

Avoid skin contact with oil and grease.

Seek medical help immediately should injuries caused by oil escaping under pressure occur.

Pos: 9.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

284

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 9.5.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Einstellen der Schnitthöhe @ 0\mod_1196660879619_78.doc @ 9191

11.2

Pos: 9.5.2 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Schnitthöhe/Allgemein Schnitthöhe Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196661001853_78.doc @ 9210

Adjusting the cutting height

The cutting height can be adjusted to different soil conditions. Each of the mowing units is adjusted individually for height.

Before making settings for cutting height, the hydraulic axle suspension must be in the mowing position. (See Info Centre chapter "Quick Access to Hydraulic Axle Suspension".)

Note - Good cutting pattern

For a good cutting pattern, adjust the cutting height to the same height on all mowing units

Pos: 9.5.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.doc @ 10648

11.2.1

Pos: 9.5.4 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Schnitthöhe/Schnitthöhe am Frontmähwerk Bild @ 0\mod_1196661320135_78.doc @ 9250

Front mowing unit

1

BM 400 0175

Pos: 9.5.5 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Schnitthöhe/Schnitthöhe größer_geringer @ 0\mod_1196661562478_78.doc @ 9269

Fig. 238:

The cutting height is adjusted via the top link (1).

To do this:

Lower the front mowing unit into working position

Rotate the top suspension arm (1)

Top suspension arm longer = smaller cutting height

Top suspension arm shorter = bigger cutting height

Pos: 9.5.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

285

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 9.5.7 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/Aushubhöhe einstellen @ 0\mod_1196675396916_78.doc @ 10668

11.2.2

Pos: 9.5.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 4/Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196674467494_78.doc @ 10628

Adjusting the Lifting Height

11.2.2.1 Front mowing unit

Pos: 9.5.9 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Aushubhöhe des Frontmähwerks einstellen @ 0\mod_1196661830291_78.doc @ 9309

Pos.1

Pos.2

Pos.3

Pos: 9.5.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BM 400 0176

Fig. 239:

The front mowing unit can be suspended in several positions by means of the ‘Weiste’ triangle.

This causes the front mower to lift up to a higher or lower position.

In the upper position (1), the front mower lifts to a higher position

At mid position (2) the mower is in the normal position

• In the lower position (3), the front mower lifts to a lower position

By linking the upper rod into the lower positions (2, 3) on the ‘Weiste’ triangle, it is possible to obtain a smaller adjustment to the front mower inclination. This keeps the cutting height constant when making ground adjustments on very uneven land

286

Pos: 9.5.11 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/Einstellen der Schnitthöhe @ 0\mod_1196674202135_78.doc @ 10608

11.2.3

Pos: 9.5.12 /Überschriften/Überschriften 4/Seitenmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675520994_78.doc @ 10687

Adjusting the cutting height

11.2.3.1 Lateral Mowing Unit

Pos: 9.5.13 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Schnitthöhe/Einstellung der Schnitthöhe am Seitenmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196664319228_78.doc @ 10095

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 9.5.14 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 240

Lower the lateral mowing unit into working position.

Remove the linch pin (1).

Put the locking clip (2) to one side.

Set the direction of rotation for the setting ratchet (4) on the lever (3).

Lengthen threaded spindle = smaller cutting height

Shorten threaded spindle = bigger cutting height

Twist the threaded spindle (3), until the locking clip (2) can be inserted.

Secure the locking clip (2) with the linch pin (1).

287

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 9.5.15 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Wasserwaage @ 0\mod_1196664592103_78.doc @ 10114

Pos: 9.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 241

Display

(for example)

+6°

+3°

+0°

-3°

Theoretically

Cutting height approx. 11 cm approx. 8 cm approx. 6 cm about 4 cm

To suit usage conditions

High cut field forage moist dry ground

Field forage

Dry conditions

Normal conditions

Increasing

-5° approx. 3 cm Low cut entails risk of damage to sward

You can set and read off the cutting height you require using the spirit level.

Note

Unscrew the wing screw (1).

Set indicator (2) to the required angle on the angle scale (3).

Tighten the wing screw.

Change the mower setting on the setting ratchet until the bubble (4) is in the centre.

One revolution on the top suspension arm sleeves of the lateral mowing units (12 ratchet movements) corresponds to about 4 revolutions on the top suspension arm sleeve of the front mowing unit.

Additional adjusting skids should be fitted.

288

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 9.7.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Einstellung der Entlastungsfedern @ 0\mod_1196666659447_78.doc @ 10133

11.3 Adjusting the Compensation Springs

Pos: 9.7.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Einstellung an den Entlastungsfedern nur in Transportstellung @ 0\mod_1196666898416_78.doc @ 10171

Pos: 9.7.3 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/EasyCut/Bodendruck/Bodendruck allgemeiner Text alle EC @ 0\mod_1196667271181_78.doc @ 10190

DANFER! – Setting on the compensation springs

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

The compensation springs should be adjusted only while the front mower is in the transport position. In the working position the compensation springs are subject to high tensile stress.

Severe injury can be caused if the compensation springs are removed while in the working position.

The lower threaded blocks on the compensation springs must be fully screwed in.

The ground pressure for the cutter bar is adjusted to local conditions by means of the compensation springs. In order to protect the sward the load on the mowing spar must be relieved so that it does not jump when mowing, yet does not leave any skid marks on the ground.

Pos: 9.7.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

289

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 9.7.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.doc @ 10648

11.3.1

Pos: 9.7.6 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Entlastungsfedern am Frontmähwerk BM 400 @ 0\mod_1196667362510_78.doc @ 10209

Front mowing unit

Pos: 9.7.7 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 242:

Move the hydraulic axle suspension to the mowing position entitled "Quick Access to Hydraulic Axle Suspension")

(see Info Centre chapter

With the sideshift option, the front mowing unit must be in the central position . (see

Section 3.4, multi-function lever).

The front mowing unit must be put into the transport position before you adjust the adjusting piece (1).

Unscrew the linch pins (3).

Unhook the spring assemblies (2).

Insert the adjustment piece (1) into the required hole.

Insert the spring assemblies (2) and secure with the linch pin (3)

The spring assemblies (2) are fitted on the side of the mower into the top hole (6).

If the adjusting piece (1) is in the upper position (4), this means there is less spring tension, and thus, increased ground pressure

If the adjusting piece (1) is in the lower position (5), this means there is greater spring tension, and thus, reduced ground pressure

290

Pos: 9.7.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Seitenmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675974056_78.doc @ 10706

11.3.2 Lateral Mowing Unit

Pos: 9.7.9 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Einstellung der Entlastungsfedern an den seitlichen Mähwerken @ 0\mod_1196667911275_78.doc @ 10228

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 9.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 243:

The load on the lateral mowing units is compensated by means of the four tension springs (1) on the left and right outriggers. The ground pressure can be adjusted by reinstalling the bolts

(2).

Note

Lift the lateral mowing units over the headland position, so that the compensation springs are not under tension.

Support the lateral mowing unit

Pull out the bolts (2) after you have removed the linch pin.

If the bolts are moved further to the left: lower ground pressure

If the bolts are moved further to the right: the ground pressure is increased

Insert the bolts (2) and secure with the linch pin.

When driving on the road fit the maximum spring compensation bolts at level 3 (centre hole)

291

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 9.9 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Einstellung der Zetterdrehzahl @ 0\mod_1196668564463_78.doc @ 10266

11.4

Pos: 9.10 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Einstellungen an der Maschine @ 0\mod_1196668628056_78.doc @ 10285

Adjusting the Tedder Speed

Danger! - Settings on the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Setting tasks must only be performed when the drive is switched off and the engine is at a standstill! Remove the ignition key!

Pos: 9.11 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Seitenmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675974056_78.doc @ 10706

11.4.1 Lateral Mowing Unit

Pos: 9.12 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Zetterdrehzahl/An den seitlichen Mähwerken BiG M 400 @ 0\mod_1196668721994_78.doc @ 10304

Pos: 9.13 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 244

Two conditioner speeds can be set on the main gearbox. This affects the conditioning effect and the power consumption.

Normal operation 700 rpm.

Maximum operation: 1000 rpm.

Only use the speed 700 r.p.m. during the running in phase of the engine of approx. 25 hours.

Unscrew the screw (2) on the actuating lever (1).

Turn the actuating lever 180 degrees.

Fasten the actuating lever with the screw (2).

To synchronise the gear wheels while the change is being made, loosen the screws (3), open the flap (4) and turn the drive shaft using a suitable tool.

292

Pos: 9.14 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwerk (CV) @ 0\mod_1196670225510_78.doc @ 10342

11.4.2

Pos: 9.15 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Zetterdrehzahl/Zetterdrehzahl Bild Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196670284744_78.doc @ 10361

Front mowing unit (CV)

Adjusting the mowing units

700

1000

EC-219-0

Pos: 9.16 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Zetterdrehzahl/Zetterdrehzahl einstellen 700/1000 @ 0\mod_1196670462416_78.doc @ 10380

Fig. 245:

Two conditioner speeds can be set on the speed gearbox. This affects the conditioning effect and the power consumption.

Minimum speed: 700 rpm.

Maximum speed: 1000 rpm.

Unscrew the wing screw (1) from the actuating lever (2).

Turn the actuating lever (2) 180 degrees. (in doing so turn the mower drum (3) so that the complete actuating lever can be turned.

Secure the actuating lever (2) with the wing screw (1).

Pos: 9.17 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

293

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 9.18.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Einstellen des Aufbereitungsblechs @ 0\mod_1196670615681_78.doc @ 10399

11.5

Pos: 9.18.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/gebrochene Zinken @ 0\mod_1196670786291_78.doc @ 10437

Adjusting the conditioner plate

Caution! - Damaged or missing tines

Pos: 9.18.3 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Einstellen Aufbereitungsblech Bild (BiG M CV)_1 @ 35\mod_1258634248392_78.doc @ 335275

Effect: Damages to the machine.

• Bent and broken prongs cause an imbalance.

Straighten any bent tines.

Replace any broken tines.

(Big M CV)

Pos: 9.18.4 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Vorgehensweise @ 0\mod_1196671026697_78.doc @ 10475

Pos: 9.18.5 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Kontrolle der Zetterwalze @ 0\mod_1196671110947_78.doc @ 10456

Fig. 246

The conditioning of the mowed crop can be influenced by adjusting the conditioning plate through the crank (1). The adjustment depends on the desired degree of conditioning of the crop:

Clockwise rotation: Degree of conditioning is increased

Anticlockwise rotation: Degree of conditioning is decreased

Note - Checking the conditioner auger

Effect: Longer service life

• Before putting into operation, always check the conditioner roller (1) for damaged V-tines

(2).

• Straighten any bent tines.

Replace any broken tines.

Check the bearing bolts and bushes on the prong bearings. To prevent the loss of prongs, always replace bearing bolts and bushes in good time.

Pos: 9.19 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

294

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 9.20 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Rollen-Conditioners @ 0\mod_1196673043650_78.doc @ 10513

11.6 Adjusting the roller conditioner (optional extra/Big M CRI) x

CRI-0-001

Fig. 247:

General

The roller conditioner is supplied for use with leguminous vegetation or other leaf crops.

Pos: 9.21 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Einstellen des Rollenabstandes @ 0\mod_1196673207822_78.doc @ 10532

The conditioning intensity is adjusted by the setting spindle (1). The setting spindle (1) is used to change the distance or contact pressure of the rollers. The minimum distance (x) between the rollers must always be at least 4 mm.

11.6.1 Adjusting the roller distance

2 1 3

4

Pos: 9.22 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BMII-372

Fig. 248:

• Loosen the locknut (1) with a hex key (W/F 24).

• Turn the adjusting nut (2) on the threaded spindle with a hex key (W/F 46).

Clockwise rotation: Roller distance is reduced.

Anticlockwise rotation: Roller distance is increased.

• Retighten the locknut (1) with a hex key (W/F 24).

295

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 9.23 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Einstellen des Rollendruckes Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196673373025_78.doc @ 10551

11.6.2 Adjusting the roller pressure

2

1

Pos: 9.24 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BM 400 0154

Fig. 249

Loosen the locknut (2) with a hex key (W/F 41).

Turn the spindle on the screw head (1) with a hex key (W/F 55).

Clockwise rotation: Greater insertion force

Anticlockwise rotation: Less insertion force

• Retighten the locknut (1) with a hex key (W/F 41).

Note - Optimising crop flow

• Dimension "a" must be within the range 60 - 75 mm. If the distance is set to less than 60 mm, the upper roller will not be able to swing out far enough, which will impede crop flow.

Reset the roller distance each time you make an adjustment.

296

Pos: 9.25 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Abstreiferblech am Querförderer optional (BM 500) @ 0\mod_1196673648681_78.doc @ 10570

11.7 Setting of the Scraper on the Cross Conveyor (Optional)

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 9.26 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 250

The scraper (1) on the cross conveyor (right and left) are used to scrape off crop and prevent the cross conveyor from becoming clogged.

To achieve optimum working results, a dimension of X= 0-2 mm must be maintained.

To adjust the scraper:

Loosen the screw (1)

Push the scraper into the oblong hole until a dimension of X= 0-2 mm is reached.

Tighten the screw (1) again.

297

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 9.27 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Einstellen Schwadbreite @ 0\mod_1196673972744_78.doc @ 10589

11.8

Pos: 9.28 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Schwadbreite / Breitablage/Allgemeiner Text @ 0\mod_1196676313885_78.doc @ 10726

Adjusting the swath width

Fig. 251:

The swath width is adjusted by means of the swath plates at the rear of the disc mowers.

Pos: 9.29 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.doc @ 10648

11.8.1 Front mowing unit

Pos: 9.30 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Schwadbreite / Breitablage/Einstellen Schwadbreite Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196676466135_78.doc @ 10745

Set the swath width so that the mower track is kept free.

Unscrew the ring nut (1).

Adjust the swath width.

Tighten the ring nut (1) again.

Note

Swath width setting: with the swath grouping option (BSS), the swath width of the front mowing unit must be set as narrow as possible. This ensures that there is enough free space available to hold the crop of the lateral mowing units.

Pos: 9.31 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

298

Pos: 9.32 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Seitenmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675974056_78.doc @ 10706

11.8.2 Lateral Mowing Unit

Pos: 9.33 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Schwadbreite / Breitablage/Einstellen Schwadbreite Seitenmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196676735025_78.doc @ 10764

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 9.34 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 252:

Adjust the swath width.

• Unscrew the ring nut (1).

• Adjust the swath width.

• Tighten the ring nut (1) again.

Note

Set more free space for overcut.

The narrower the swath width setting on the outer swath boards (2) of the lateral mowing units, the more free space for overcut is achieved.

299

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 9.35 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Einstellung der Querlenker an den Seitenmähwerken @ 0\mod_1196677014275_78.doc @ 10783

11.9 Adjusting the track control arm on the lateral mowing units

Caution!

If the cutting height is 0° the distance dimension "a" between the side plate (4) and the outrigger (5) must not exceed 60 mm CV/100 mm CRI.

3

1 a

Pos: 9.36 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Leitbleche @ 0\mod_1196677535025_78.doc @ 10802

2

4 5

BM 400 0155

Fig. 253

The lateral mowing units (3) are aligned by means of the track control arm (1)

Loosen the counter nut (2) on the track control arm (1).

Adjust the track control arm (1) until the dimension a between the lateral mowing unit (4) and the outrigger (5) is set to 60 mm.

• Tighten the counter nut (2) on the track control arm (1)

Pos: 9.37 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.doc @ 10648

11.10.1

Pos: 9.38 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Leitbleche Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196677613072_78.doc @ 10821

Front mowing unit

1

3

4

2

Pos: 9.39 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BM 400 0156

Fig. 254

Deflector plates are located on the front mowing unit (3) in the swath former area (2); these are fitted to the housing with fastening screws (1).

• If the swathing is uneven examine the deflector plates (4) for deformation, and straighten them if necessary.

300

Pos: 9.40 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Deaktivieren der Achsfederung @ 0\mod_1196677719369_78.doc @ 10840

11.11 Deactivating the axle suspension

Adjusting the mowing units

Fig. 255:

The Big M front axle has a hydro-pneumatic suspension. If axle suspension is active, the two ball valves (1) and (2) are open, as illustrated in the figure.

Pos: 10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 256:

The front axle suspension can be deactivated.

• To deactivate the front axle suspension, shut the ball valve (1) for the left hydraulic cylinder and the ball valve (2) for the right hydraulic cylinder .

Note - Lowering / lifting the front axle

The front axle can be moved both with activated and deactivated axle suspension.

301

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 11.1.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/P-T/Sonderausstattung- Mähwerke @ 0\mod_1196678406869_78.doc @ 10859

12 Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 11.1.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/Umbau der Einheit Zetterprallblech auf Schneckenquerförderer @ 0\mod_1196679637806_78.doc @ 10918

12.1 Converting the Tedder Deflector Plate to an Auger-Type Cross Conveyor

Pos: 11.1.3 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Es können Antriebselemente in Bewegung geraten @ 0\mod_1196679836822_78.doc @ 10937

Danger! - When performing repair, maintenance or cleaning work on the machine, or in the case of technical intervention, drive elements may start moving.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The cutting discs continue to run!

Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

• Only use appropriate and authorised lifting gear for the installation and removal of the auger-type cross conveyor (total weight of the conveyors = approx. 300 kg).

Pos: 11.1.4 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Einheit Zetterprallblech bzw. Einheit Schneckenquerförderer nicht angebaut. @ 14\mod_1227107737315_78.doc @ 168398

Danger! - Tedder deflector plate unit or auger-type cross conveyor unit not fitted.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

The machine must not be placed in operation until the tedder deflector plate unit or auger-type cross conveyor unit has been properly installed.

Pos: 11.1.5 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Umbau Zetterprallblech auf Schneckenquerförderer/Umbau Zetterprallblech auf Schneckenquerförderer @ 0\mod_1196678706338_78.doc @ 10879

Note

The following description shows the installation of the auger-type cross conveyor on the right hand mower side. The installation on the left-hand mower side has to be carried out in an analogous way.

Depending on how the machine is equipped, the "tedder deflector plate" can optionally be converted to an "auger-type cross conveyor" or vice versa.

The process for converting the "tedder deflector plate" to an auger-type cross conveyor is described below.

Prerequisite:

Lower all lateral mowing units (1) on to a firm subsoil.

Switching off the engine

Remove the ignition key

Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back.

Pos: 11.1.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

302

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 11.1.7 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Umbau Zetterprallblech auf Schneckenquerförderer/Zetterprallblech abbauen @ 0\mod_1196684286525_78.doc @ 10996

12.1.1 Removing the tedder deflector plate

Danger! - Detaching

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• Only use appropriate and authorised lifting gear for the installation and removal of the auger-type cross conveyor (total weight of the conveyors = approx. 300 kg).

Fig. 257:

Installing the retaining chains

Pos: 11.1.8 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Umbau Zetterprallblech auf Schneckenquerförderer/Spannschlösser lösen @ 0\mod_1196684641931_78.doc @ 11036

Attach the retaining chains (2) to the ring bolts (3) and (4) of the tedder deflector plate (1).

12.1.2 Releasing the tension jacks

3

1

3

4

2

5

BM 400 0216

Fig. 258

Release the tension jacks (1) and (2) located at the outer side of the mower (3).

Release the inner tension jacks (3) and (4) of the mowing unit (3).

Pos: 11.1.9 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Umbau Zetterprallblech auf Schneckenquerförderer/Zetterprallblech entfernen @ 0\mod_1196686072900_78.doc @ 11055

303

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

12.1.3 Removing the tedder deflector plate

Pos: 11.1.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 259

• Slightly raise the tedder deflector plate (1) and remove it sideways from the mowing unit

(2).

Note - Removed tedder deflector plate

Store the tedder deflector plate (1) in a secure and dry place.

304

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 11.1.11 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/U-Z/Zinken prüfen @ 0\mod_1196686894088_78.doc @ 11074

12.1.4

Pos: 11.1.12 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/gebrochene Zinken @ 0\mod_1196670786291_78.doc @ 10437

Checking the Tines

Caution! - Damaged or missing tines

Effect: Damages to the machine.

• Bent and broken prongs cause an imbalance.

Pos: 11.1.13 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Umbau Zetterprallblech auf Schneckenquerförderer/Zinken prüfen @ 0\mod_1196686959166_78.doc @ 11093

Straighten any bent tines.

Replace any broken tines.

Fig. 260:

Check the V-shaped tines (1) and the retaining bolts (2) of the mowing unit (3) for damage.

Pos: 11.1.14 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Umbau Zetterprallblech auf Schneckenquerförderer/Schutzblech demontieren @ 0\mod_1196688190822_78.doc @ 11112

12.1.5 Removing the guard

Pos: 11.2 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 261:

Remove the hexagon head cap screws (1).

Remove the guard (2) and store it in a secure place.

305

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 11.3.1 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Schneckenquerförderer anbauen @ 0\mod_1196689156088_78.doc @ 11169

12.1.6 Installing the auger-type cross conveyor

Danger! - Attaching / detaching

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• Only use appropriate and authorised lifting gear for the installation and removal of the auger-type cross conveyor (total weight of the conveyors = approx. 300 kg).

3 1

1

5

2

4

BM 400 0157

Fig. 262

Installing the retaining chains

Attach the retaining chains (1) to the ring bolts (2) and (3) of the auger-type cross conveyor (4).

Slowly lower the auger-type cross conveyor (4) onto the mowing unit (5).

Pos: 11.3.2 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Abb. 263

Note

Be sure to lower the auger-type cross conveyor into the guide pins (1) and (2).

The surfaces (3) and (4) have to be flat against either side of the mowing unit.

306

Pos: 11.3.3 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Spannschlösser schließen @ 0\mod_1196689498291_78.doc @ 11209

12.1.7 Locking the tension jacks

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Fig. 264

Note

Lock the tension jacks (1) and (2) located on the inner side of the mowing unit (3).

Also lock the outer tension jacks (4) and (5).

Pos: 11.4 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Keilriemen spannen @ 0\mod_1196690438916_78.doc @ 11228

Be sure the tension jacks (1) and (2) are under tension when locked; retighten as required.

12.2

Pos: 11.5 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Keilriemen spannen @ 0\mod_1196690564916_78.doc @ 11266

Tensioning the V-belts

1

3

4

2

Pos: 11.6 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Schutzblech montieren @ 0\mod_1196690733244_78.doc @ 11285

Fig. 265

Use the mounting lever (1) to raise the idler pulley (2).

Place the V-belt (3) on to the pulley (4).

Lower the idler pulley (2) slowly and withdraw the mounting lever (1).

Use the mounting lever (1) supplied in the on-board tool box.

With the V-belt under tension, dimension X has to be equal to approx. 80 mm.

BM 400 0159

307

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

12.2.1 Installing the guard

Pos: 11.7 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Drehzahlsensor anschließen @ 0\mod_1196690850275_78.doc @ 11304

Fig. 266

• Install the guard (1) on to the mowing unit (3) using the hexagon head cap screws (2).

12.2.2 Connecting the speed sensor

Pos: 11.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 267

• Connect the speed sensor cable (1) to the speed sensor cable (2) of the auger-type cross conveyor.

308

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 11.9.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/U-Z/Unterbleche demontieren @ 0\mod_1196691635447_78.doc @ 11342

12.2.3 Removing the floor plates

Pos: 11.9.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Reparatur_Wartung_Reinigungs_1 @ 0\mod_1196691273135_78.doc @ 11323

Danger! - No one is permitted in the danger zone when lifting, lowering or folding up mowing units, or when turning on drives.

Pos: 11.9.3 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Unterlegbleche/Teil 1 Unterlegblech demontieren @ 0\mod_1196693166181_78.doc @ 11361

• or

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.

• Do not lift, lower or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that neither persons, animals nor objects are in the swivel range of the mowing unit.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

Lock the mowing units against lowering using appropriate retaining chains.

Protect the mowing units against lowering by suitable means (for example a support block)

Note

The following steps are described only for the right-hand side of the later mowing unit. The process of removing the floor plates for the left lateral mowing unit is analogous to the right side.

Pos: 11.9.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 268

To prevent stones or other foreign bodies from accumulating inside the feed channel chamber during the operation of the augers, the floor plates (1) and (2) of mowing unit (3) can be removed as follows:

• Raise the lateral mowing unit (1).

• Fit retaining chains (2) to the lateral mowing unit (1).

309

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 11.9.5 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Unterlegbleche/Teil 2 Unterbleche demontieren @ 0\mod_1196761039406_78.doc @ 12957

Fig. 269

Remove the hexagonal nuts of the bolts (1).

Remove the connecting bolts (2).

Carefully the remove floor plate (3) to the rear.

Store floor plates, bolts and nuts in a secure place.

Remove the retaining chains

Lower the lateral mowing units into working position

Pos: 11.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 270

After the cross conveyor is attached, the side guard cloth (1) must be cut off on the right and left mowing unit. It may also be necessary to shorten the clamping strap (2) appropriately.

310

Pos: 11.11 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Schmierleitungen umlegen @ 0\mod_1196695905681_78.doc @ 11909

12.2.4 Relaying the Lubrication Lines

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 11.12 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 271

When the machine is converted from a "Tedder deflector plate unit" to an "Auger-type cross conveyor", the lubrication lines must be relaid as described below.

Loosen lubrication line (1) at the T-screw connection (2).

Loosen the sealing screw (3) on the lubricating point connection.

Unto the lubrication connection (1) to the auger bearing (BSS).

Install the sealing screw (2) on the T-screw connection

311

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 11.13 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Montageanleitung der Pralltücher für Big M 400 mit BSS @ 0\mod_1196746211375_78.doc @ 11935

12.2.5 Installation Instructions – Bulge Bags for Big M 400 with BSS

5

2 4

Pos: 11.14 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

2

6

3

1

BM 400 0160

Fig. 272

Placing bulge bags on the right and left auger hoods reduces the amount of dirt in the cooling air.

Installation instructions:

Screw bulge bags securely onto the auger hoods (1). (Install coach bolts from below.)

Pull the rod (2) through the eyes of the bulge bag (3)

Insert the rod (2) from behind into the hole on the frame (4). Insert the rod (2) into the hole on the mowing unit support from above in front (5) and secure it with the spring cotter pin (6).

312

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 11.15.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Schneckenkontrolle einschalten @ 0\mod_1196746530468_78.doc @ 11954

12.2.6 Switching on the auger monitoring mode

Pos: 11.15.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Motor nicht in geschlossenen Räumen laufen lassen. @ 0\mod_1196343428061_78.doc @ 6915

Danger! - Do not allow the engine to run in enclosed areas.

Effect: Danger, toxic exhaust!

Only start the engine from the driver's seat.

Always make certain there is no one in the danger zone of the machine.

Activate the horn.

Never allow the engine to run in closed rooms without an extraction unit.

Ensure sufficient ventilation.

Pos: 11.15.3 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

313

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 11.15.4 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Schneckenkontrolle einschalten @ 46\mod_1283839613843_78.doc @ 451083

In order to start the auger monitoring mode, it has to be activated in the info centre. Please proceed as follows:

Note

Set ignition key to position I or II.

Wait for the self test to run down.

After the ignition has been switched on, the start screen "Road Driving or Field Operation" will appear on the display.

CV

50 cm

Semi

Pos: 11.15.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 273

You can bring up a menu level with the key on the rotary potentiometer.

Select main menu 1 "Machine setting" with the rotary potentiometer.

Press the rotary potentiometer.

Select main menu 1-2

Press the rotary potentiometer.

"Machine setting" with the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows menu level "Machine setting". key brings up the basic screen.

You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting. The selection box is highlighted in colour.

Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the selection box.

You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the desired value.

Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you from the selection box. the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

314

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 11.15.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-1 Parameter Big M 400 / 500/Einstellung: Schneckenüberwachung @ 0\mod_1196749161203_78.doc @ 12416

5) Setting: Auger monitoring

Both augers on

Right auger on

Left auger on

Both augers off

Pos: 11.16 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Umbau Schneckenquerförderer auf "Einheit Zetterprallblech" @ 0\mod_1196749796562_78.doc @ 12435

12.2.7 Converting an Auger-Type Cross Conveyor to a "Tedder deflector plate unit"

The conversion process is in the in reverse order.

Danger! – Stones are hurled up during operation

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• After the auger-type cross conveyor has been removed, the tedder deflector plates must bereinstalled! (See chapter "Installing the Auger-Type Cross Conveyor".)

(but in the opposite order) Otherwise license to operator becomes void

Fig. 274

Pos: 11.17 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Einheit Zetterprallblech bzw. Einheit Schneckenquerförderer nicht angebaut. @ 14\mod_1227107737315_78.doc @ 168398

Danger! - Tedder deflector plate unit or auger-type cross conveyor unit not fitted.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

The machine must not be placed in operation until the tedder deflector plate unit or auger-type cross conveyor unit has been properly installed.

Pos: 11.18 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

315

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 11.19 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Zusatzausrüstung- Mulchgerät @ 0\mod_1196750242750_78.doc @ 12454

12.3 Additional Equipment – Mulching Device

Pos: 11.20 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Mulching devices can be used as additional equipment. For further information, please ask the mulching device dealer

Address:

Van Wamel BV

Energieweg 1

NL-6658 AE Beneden-Leeuwen

Note

Only attachment and detachment of mowing units is described below.

For information on operation, service, attaching, and detaching mulching devices, please consult the mulching device manufacturer.

316

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 11.21.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Abbau der Mäheinheiten @ 0\mod_1196750875734_78.doc @ 12492

12.4

Pos: 11.21.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Umbau_Wartungsarbeiten @ 0\mod_1196750571265_78.doc @ 12473

Removing Mowing Units

Danger! - Drive elements may be placed in motion during conversion and installation work on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The cutting discs continue to run!

Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

Avoid skin contact with oil and grease.

Seek medical help immediately should injuries caused by oil escaping under pressure occur.

Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

After conversion and installation work is complete, mount all safety devices properly again.

Only use appropriate and authorised lifting gear for installation and removal of the mowing units (weight approx. 1500 kg).

Pos: 11.21.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.doc @ 10648

12.4.1 Front mowing unit

Pos: 11.21.4 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der Mäheinheiten/Vorraussetzung am Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196751006250_78.doc @ 12530

The following conditions must be met in advance on the Big M 400:

Pos: 11.21.5 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der Mäheinheiten/Abbau Schutztuch @ 0\mod_1196751259531_78.doc @ 12549

The front mowing unit is in transport position

Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key, and secure the machine from rolling away.

Move the "Travelling Gear" release switch to position I (off).

Move release switch for "Road/field" to position II (field mode).

Close the shut-off valve for the front outrigger.

Removing the Guard Cloth

Pos: 11.21.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 275

• Detach the guard cloth (1) with the expander band (2)

317

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 11.21.7.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/Demontage der Entlastungsfedern @ 0\mod_1196751819984_78.doc @ 12594

12.4.2 Removing of the compensation springs

Pos: 11.21.7.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Einstellung an den Entlastungsfedern @ 0\mod_1196751594562_78.doc @ 12575

Pos: 11.21.7.3 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Demontage Entlastungsfedern @ 0\mod_1196751888812_78.doc @ 12613

Danger! - Setting on the compensation springs

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

The compensation springs must only be removed in transport position. In the working position the compensation springs are subject to high tensile stress.

Severe injury can be caused if the compensation springs are removed while in the working position.

The lower threaded blocks on the compensation springs must be fully screwed in.

2 2

1

1

Pos: 11.21.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 276

Note

Detach the compensation spring (1) in transport position.

To do this:

Release the hinged cotter pin (2)

Detach the compensation springs (1) and set down the front mowing unit

BM 400 0161

318

Pos: 11.21.9 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der Mäheinheiten/Abbau der Gelenkwelle: @ 0\mod_1196752140328_78.doc @ 12651

12.4.3 To remove the PTO shaft:

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 11.21.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 277

Open the shut-off valve for the front outrigger.

Lower the front mowing unit into working position

Detach the support chain (1)

Remove the screw (2) from the PTO shaft

Pull the PTO shaft (3) off the front mower

Connect the PTO shaft (3) with support chain (1) to the "Weiste" triangle (4).

319

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 11.21.11 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der Mäheinheiten/Bei Option Zentralschmierung @ 0\mod_1196757373343_78.doc @ 12729

With central lubrication option

Pos: 11.21.12 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 278

Disconnect the lubrication line (1) to the distributor (2).

To do this:

Note

Pull off the flap (3)

Press in the lock (4) with a screwdriver and pull out the line (1).

If the pressure on the lubrication lines is too high, loosen a lubrication point first to reduce the pressure. Do not close the line (1)! (Grease under high pressure)

320

Pos: 11.21.13 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der Mäheinheiten/Abbau des Weistedreiecks BM 420 @ 52\mod_1289224770656_78.doc @ 502407

12.4.4 Removing the Weiste Triangle

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Fig.279

• Raise the front lifting gear slightly with the (8) key on the multi-function lever by inching operation (first step).

This will relieve the locking bolts (1) on the Weiste triangle.

Unscrew and remove the locking bolt (1).

Adjust the top suspension arm (2) until it is free of tension.

Caution! - Do not lower the front mowing unit too far

Effect: Damage to the machine

In the following work step, make certain not to lower the front lifting gear too far. Doing so will damage the front mowing unit.

• You can use the (11) key on the multi-function lever to lower the front lifting gear until the front lifting gear is under the Weiste triangle.

• Press the (8) key on the multi-function lever briefly to stop the lowering process.

321

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Caution! - The front lifting gear is raised in reverse travel.

Effect: Damage to the machine

The (Road/Field) release switch must be in "Road Travel" position.

Pos: 11.21.14 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig.280

Switch the (Road/Field) release switch into "Road Travel" position.

Note

This prevents the front lifting gear from automatically being raised during reverse travel.

Moving the machine in reverse in Road mode

322

Pos: 11.21.15 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der Mäheinheiten/Anbau des Frontmähwerks BM 420 @ 52\mod_1289230198187_78.doc @ 502516

12.4.5 Attaching the Front Mowing Unit

2 1

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 11.21.16 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BMII-313

Fig.281

The front mowing unit is attached in the reverse order.

Note

The lifting gear can be raised by inching operation (first step) with the (8) key on the multifunction lever.

Connect the cardan shaft (1) high on the Weiste triangle (2) to avoid a collision with the front mower plate

323

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 11.21.17.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/Abbau der seitlichen Mäheinheit @ 0\mod_1196757669828_78.doc @ 12767

12.4.6

Pos: 11.21.17.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Umbau_Wartungsarbeiten @ 0\mod_1196750571265_78.doc @ 12473

Removing the Side Mowing Unit

Danger! - Drive elements may be placed in motion during conversion and installation work on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The cutting discs continue to run!

Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

Avoid skin contact with oil and grease.

Seek medical help immediately should injuries caused by oil escaping under pressure occur.

Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

After conversion and installation work is complete, mount all safety devices properly again.

Only use appropriate and authorised lifting gear for installation and removal of the mowing units (weight approx. 1500 kg).

Pos: 11.21.17.3 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der seitlichen Mäheinheiten/Schritt 1 Vorraussetzung @ 0\mod_1196757867390_78.doc @ 12786

Step 1:

The following conditions must be met in advance on the Big M 400:

Move the "Travelling Gear" release switch to position I (off).

• Move release switch for "Road/field" to position II (field mode).

• Move the hydraulic axle suspension to the mowing position (see Info Centre chapter entitled "Quick Access to Hydraulic Axle Suspension")

Pos: 11.21.17.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

324

Pos: 11.21.17.5 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der seitlichen Mäheinheiten/Schritt 2 Abbau seitl. Mäheinheit @ 0\mod_1196758043531_78.doc @ 12805

Step 2: for standard equipment:

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 11.21.17.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 282

Set spring compensation to minimum.

To do this:

Lift the lateral mowing units out through the headland position.

Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key, and secure the machine from rolling away.

Move the socket pin (1) to pos. I and secure it with a linch pin.

• Lower the lateral mowing units into working position.

325

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 11.21.17.7 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der seitlichen Mäheinheiten/Schritt 3 Abbau seitl. Mäheinheit @ 46\mod_1283840472171_78.doc @ 451109

Step 3:

Fig. 283

With hydraulic spring compensation design (optional):

• Lower the lateral mowing units into working position. the or

6 compensation.

6 key brings up hydraulically adjustable lateral spring

Pos: 11.21.17.8 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der seitlichen Mäheinheiten/Schritt 4 Abbau seitl. Mäheinheit @ 0\mod_1196758874468_78.doc @ 12843

Step 4: keys and the key reduces the pressure of the lateral mowing units to "zero bar".

Remove the ignition key and secure the vehicle and machine against rolling.

Pos: 11.21.17.9 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 284

• Insert the clamping plate (1) (Item No. 233 505 0) from above into the right and left spring assemblies (2)

Note

Both clamping plates on the right and left sides are also required for dismantling just one mowing unit to make the outrigger arm free of tension.

326

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 11.21.17.1 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Einstellung an den Entlastungsfedern @ 0\mod_1196751594562_78.doc @ 12575

Danger! - Setting on the compensation springs

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The compensation springs must only be removed in transport position. In the working position the compensation springs are subject to high tensile stress.

Pos: 11.21.17.1 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der seitlichen Mäheinheiten/Schritt 5 Abbau seitl. Mäheinheit @ 0\mod_1196759083031_78.doc @ 12862

Severe injury can be caused if the compensation springs are removed while in the working position.

The lower threaded blocks on the compensation springs must be fully screwed in.

Step 5:

Pos: 11.21.17.1 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 285

The spring assembly can be fitted to the outrigger arm instead of clamping plates.

To do this:

Note

Lift the lateral mowing unit (1) out through the headland position.

Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key, and secure the machine from rolling away.

Drive the clamping sleeve out of the attachment bolt (2) and remove the fastening bolt

(2).

Use a suitable and reliable tool to secure the spring assemblies.

The weight of a spring assembly is about 100 kg.

327

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 11.21.17.1 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Gewicht der Mäheinheit ca. 1500 kg @ 0\mod_1196762216406_78.doc @ 12976

Danger!

Remove the ignition key and secure the vehicle and machine against rolling.

Only use appropriate and authorised lifting equipment for the installation and removal of the mowing units (total weight of mowing unit = approx. 1500 kg).

Pos: 11.21.17.1 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der seitlichen Mäheinheiten/Schritt 6 Abbau seitl. Mäheinheit @ 0\mod_1196759408718_78.doc @ 12881

Step 6:

Fig. 286

The mowing unit must be in the working position to be removed.

Move the opposite mower unit into headland position and support it there.

Connect the retaining chains (1) on the mowing unit (2).

328

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

4 5 1

I

III II

2

2

IV

6 V

3

BM 400 0163

Fig. 287

Remove the spring (1) on the right outrigger arm.

Detach the top suspension arm (2) for cutting height on the mowing unit. To do this, drive the clamping sleeve out of the attachment bolt (3) and remove the attachment bolt and washer.

Remove the cable plug (I) for mower speed.

If the BSS option is installed, disconnect the electrical line for speed monitoring on the plug connection (II).

With the central lubrication option, remove the line to the distributor (III) and the two lines to the bearing bolts (IV and V).

Expose all lines (lubrication lines and electrical lines) up to the universal joint mount. Cut the relevant cable ties to do this.

Remove the top suspension arm (4) for mower cross position. To do this, unscrew the attachment bolts (5) and press the top suspension arm (4) off the bolts.

Remove the attachment bolt (6) on the universal joint bracket. Remove the universal joint mount.

329

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 11.22 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 288

Align the double joint (2). To do this, turn the mowing unit manually on the outer blade drum until the attachment bolt (1) of the double joint is positioned vertically.

Raise the mowing unit slightly with lifting equipment until the bolts of the universal joint mount have come out of the universal joint bracket.

Move the mowing unit back to guide the double joint down from the shaft.

Move the mowing unit away from the machine with lifting equipment and set it down securely.

Caution! - Lift the outrigger arms higher than the headland position.

Effect: Damages to the machine

Never raise the outrigger arms higher than the headland position.

330

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 11.23.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/Anbau der seitlichen Mäheinheit @ 0\mod_1196760080906_78.doc @ 12900

12.4.7

Pos: 11.23.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Umbau_Wartungsarbeiten @ 0\mod_1196750571265_78.doc @ 12473

Attaching the Lateral Mowing Unit

Danger! - Drive elements may be placed in motion during conversion and installation work on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The cutting discs continue to run!

Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

Avoid skin contact with oil and grease.

Seek medical help immediately should injuries caused by oil escaping under pressure occur.

Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

After conversion and installation work is complete, mount all safety devices properly again.

Only use appropriate and authorised lifting gear for installation and removal of the mowing units (weight approx. 1500 kg).

Pos: 11.23.3 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der seitlichen Mäheinheiten/Schritt 1 Vorraussetzung @ 0\mod_1196757867390_78.doc @ 12786

Step 1:

The following conditions must be met in advance on the Big M 400:

Move the "Travelling Gear" release switch to position I (off).

• Move release switch for "Road/field" to position II (field mode).

• Move the hydraulic axle suspension to the mowing position (see Info Centre chapter entitled "Quick Access to Hydraulic Axle Suspension")

Pos: 11.23.4 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Gewicht der Mäheinheit ca. 1500 kg @ 0\mod_1196762216406_78.doc @ 12976

Danger!

Remove the ignition key and secure the vehicle and machine against rolling.

Only use appropriate and authorised lifting equipment for the installation and removal of the mowing units (total weight of mowing unit = approx. 1500 kg).

Pos: 11.23.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

331

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 11.23.6 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Anbau der seitlichen Mäheinheit/Schritt 2 Anbau seitl. Mäheinheit @ 0\mod_1196763875859_78.doc @ 13000

Step2:

Pos: 11.23.7 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 289

• Remove the belt guard (1) on the outrigger arm

Connect the mowing unit to the retaining chains and guide up to the outrigger arm

Align the universal joint bracket (2) of the mowing unit to the universal joint mount (3) of the outrigger arm.

332

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 11.23.8 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Anbau der seitlichen Mäheinheit/Schritt 3 Anbau seitl. Mäheinheit @ 0\mod_1196764155312_78.doc @ 13019

Step 3:

Caution! - Attaching the double joint

Effect: Elevated danger of crushing hands

• Make certain when guiding in the double joint that the lifting equipment is not adjusted or moved. Only the technician is permitted to move the mowing unit manually on the front guard tube.

Fig. 290

• Align the double joint (2) until the attachment bolts (1) of the double joint are positioned vertically.

Guide the double joint onto the drive PTO shaft

Note

To make it possible to lock in the profile toothing, the drive shaft can be turned by moving the power belt (4) on the outrigger arm.

Pos: 11.23.9 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Anbau der seitlichen Mäheinheit/Die weitere Montage erfolgt in umgekehrter Reihenfolge wie der Abbau @ 0\mod_1196764466359_78.doc @ 13038

Installation of the Belt Guard on the Outrigger Arm

12.4.8 The remainder of the installation is in reverse order to the removal procedure.

Pos: 12 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Caution!

Clamping plates not removed. (When using clamping plates)

Effect: Damages to the machine

After attaching the mowing units, make certain the clamping plates have been removed

After the mowing unit has been attached, lower the mowing unit down to the ground and remove the two clamping plates on the right and left side.

333

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 13.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Wartung- Motor @ 0\mod_1196765008937_78.doc @ 13058

13 Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 13.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Unvorhergesehene Aktionen an der Maschine_1 @ 0\mod_1196765298062_78.doc @ 13096

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing any repairs, maintenance or cleaning. Remove the ignition key!

When working on the engine, always switch off the main battery switch!

Store lubricants and fuels in suitable containers and make certain they are disposed of properly.

Exercise caution when draining hot oil or fluid - danger of burns!

Pos: 13.3 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Motor Übersicht BM 420 @ 52\mod_1289297355812_78.doc @ 503031

13.1.1 Overview of motor

5

9

1

2 3 4 6 7

8

BM 420 0022

Fig.291

2

3

4

Oil dipstick

Fuel Service Centre (KSC)

Air compressor

6 Starter

7 Oil pan

8 Coolant compactor

9 Oil filter

Pos: 13.4 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Wartungsübersicht (MAN) Auszug @ 52\mod_1289284826828_78.doc @ 502545

13.2 Overview of maintenance (MAN) excerpt

The purpose of this overview of maintenance is to provide quick orientation. Information is not considered binding. The information in the operating instructions and list of consumables is authoritative.

Only consumables approved in the MAN list of consumables may be used.

Engine maintenance schedule

• All maintenance work on the engine must be performed according to the intervals of the maintenance schedule in the MAN operating instructions.

Oil change intervals

• See maintenance schedule in accompanying document MAN.

Pos: 13.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

334

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 13.6 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Allgemein Kühlflüssigkeit_Keilriemen_Sauberkeit @ 0\mod_1196765525515_78.doc @ 13115

Cooling water and air intake hoses

Check the condition and fastening of cooling water and air intake hoses every 50 operating hours. Replace cooling water hoses and non-metallic parts on the air intake system every 2 years.

Check the engine, water cooler and exhaust system daily to ensure it is clean. Clean it if necessary.

Coolant

The engine cooling system is filled with a mixture of corrosion protection fluid and antifreeze in the factory. The coolant consists of 50 % anti-corrosion antifreeze and 50 % water.

Protection against freezing is ensured to approximately -37° C. See also the engine manufacturer's specifications.

Belts

All belts must be kept continuously under the proper tension.

For new belts, check the tension after the first 2 to 3 operating hours. If necessary, retighten.

Cleanliness

To protect against the danger of fire, clean the engine area and especially the exhaust system as well as the areas surrounding the brakes and gearbox, etc.

If the crop is very dry and there is a lot of dust, check the spots listed above more frequently for accumulations of dirt and clean if necessary.

Pos: 13.7 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

335

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 13.8 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Wartungstabellen/Wartungstabelle Motor Teil 1 BM 420 @ 52\mod_1289287121609_78.doc @ 502600

13.3 Maintenance Table – Engine

Engine

1 Clean the engine compartment, radiator and radiator screen

2 Engine - oil level check

3 Engine oil change

4 Replacing the engine oil filter

X

6 Inspection of seal and general condition

7 Check valve play, adjust as needed

Fuel

1 Replace fuel filter

2 Fuel filter insert

See MAN engine operating instructions

See MAN engine operating instructions

X

X

See MAN engine operating instructions

X X

X

X

X

X

X 5 Vent the fuel system

Cooling

1 Engine coolant - checks and controls

3 Air filter – main cartridge

4 Air filter – safety cartridge

5 Check the anti-freeze in the cooling system; top up with anti-freeze, if and when necessary.

Check hose connections

1 Check hoses and hose clamps of the air suction and cooling system for tight fit.

2 Check the fuel injection pipe for loose connections.

3 Check the turbo charger screw connections and hose connections for tight fit. starter

1 Have the three-phase generator checked.

Pos: 13.10 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Wartungstabellen/Wartungstabelle Motor Teil 2 BM 420 @ 52\mod_1289373954703_78.doc @ 503118

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

336

Maintenance – Engine system

1 Check the compressed air system for leaks and corrosion X X

2 Check/clean drain valve

3 Check compressed air reservoir 1

X

X

X 5 Retighten tensioning belts

1) Every 2 years

Pos: 13.11 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

337

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 13.12 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Schmutzablagerung im Motorraum @ 0\mod_1196766936875_78.doc @ 13173

13.4

Pos: 13.13 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Schmutzablagerung im Motorraum @ 0\mod_1196769316921_78.doc @ 13154

Contamination in the engine compartment

Caution! - Contamination in the engine compartment

Effect: Danger of fire

• The build-up of dust, oil and grass inside the engine compartment is combustible and presents an increased fire hazard .

Keep the engine and the engine compartment clean at all times.

Pos: 13.14 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Bild Motorraum Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196770414312_78.doc @ 13270

Pos: 13.15 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Motorraum mit Druckluft säubern @ 0\mod_1196769980062_78.doc @ 13192

Fig. 292:

13.5

Pos: 13.16 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Reinigung mit Druckluft @ 0\mod_1196770018125_78.doc @ 13211

Cleaning the Engine Compartment with Compressed Air

Warning! - Cleaning with compressed air!

Effect: Loss of eyesight!

Keep people well away from the working area.

Wear suitable work clothes to perform cleaning jobs with compressed air (for example eye protection).

Pos: 13.17 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Verschmutzungen mit Druckluft wegblasen @ 0\mod_1196770153625_78.doc @ 13230

When necessary, blow away the dirt and contamination and wipe off oil deposits.

Pos: 13.18 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

338

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 13.19 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Motorölstand @ 41\mod_1272372368436_78.doc @ 376890

13.6

Pos: 13.20 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Motoröl/Motorölstand Achtung! - Ölstand zu niedrig @ 41\mod_1272372487467_78.doc @ 376965

Engine oil level

Pos: 13.21 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Motoröl/Motorölstand Bild BM 420 @ 52\mod_1289462193250_78.doc @ 504325

Caution! - The oil level is too low.

Effect: Engine damage

• It is absolutely essential for the life of the engine that you observe this oil level.

Check the oil level when the machine in at a horizontal position.

Do not start the engine if the level is below the bottom mark of the oil dipstick.

Fig. 293

Pos: 13.22 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Motoröl/Motorölstand Text @ 40\mod_1270034947332_78.doc @ 365736

Pos: 13.23 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Motoröl/Motoröl und Filterwechsel @ 40\mod_1270034903316_78.doc @ 365711

Before pulling out the oil dip stick, its environment must be thoroughly wiped clean.

The oil level must be between the min. and max. marks.

After the oil level has been checked, reinsert the oil dipstick.

13.6.1 Engine oil and filter replacement

Pos: 13.24 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Note

For further information please refer to the engine manufacturer’s operating instruction included with delivery (chapter on Engine oil and Filter replacement)

339

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 13.25 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Kraftstoffvorfilter / Wasserabscheider @ 41\mod_1272367873905_78.doc @ 376586

13.7

Pos: 13.26 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Kraftstoffvorfilter / Wasserabscheider Bild BM 400 @ 41\mod_1272368028358_78.doc @ 376661

Fuel filter/water separator

3

2

1

4

BM 400 0143

Pos: 13.27 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Kraftstoffvorfilter / Wasserabscheider Text @ 0\mod_1196777562765_78.doc @ 14618

Fig. 294

13.7.1 Replacing the fuel filter

13.7.2

Close the fuel supply valve (2) (turn to the right).

Unscrew the filter pan (1).

Clean the filter pan and filter insert, if there is a heavy accumulation of dirt or damage, replace the filter insert.

Check the seal ring for the filter pan and replace it if necessary.

Wet the seal ring with diesel fuel and set it in place.

Place the filter insert in the filter pan and screw the filter pan (1) on the filter housing.

Open the fuel supply valve (2) (turn to the left).

Empty the water separator

The water that is present in the fuel is collected in the inspection glass (3).

Drain the collected water by loosening the drain screw (4) and capture it in a container.

Pos: 13.28 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

340

Pos: 13.29 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Kraftstoff-Filtereinsatz ersetzen @ 57\mod_1295937605015_78.doc @ 547945

13.8

Pos: 13.30 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Kraftstoff-Filtereinsatz ersetzen Bild BM 420 @ 57\mod_1295937658484_78.doc @ 547971

Replacing the fuel filter insert

2

Maintenance – Engine

4

1

BM 420 0032

Fig.295

Pos: 13.31 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Kraftstoff-Filtereinsatz Text allgemein @ 57\mod_1295883578484_78.doc @ 547885

Pos: 13.32 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Hinweis Nähere Information siehe BA des Motorherstellers @ 57\mod_1295937787078_78.doc @ 547997

Note

Open the cover to prevent excess pressure from forming in the fuel tank

Close the fuel return valve (2) at the fuel prefilter (1)

Unscrew the screw cap with the filter insert and unscrew a piece from the filter housing.

Allow the fuel to run out

Remove the screw cover with the filter insert. Replace filter insert and sealing ring.

Wet the sealing ring with diesel fuel and set it in place

Screw in and tighten the screw cap (4) with filter insert. Tightening torque 25 Nm

Open the fuel return valve (2) at the fuel prefilter

Vent the fuel system

For further information, please refer to the engine manufacturer’s operating instructions included with delivery (chapter on maintenance).

Pos: 13.33 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

341

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 13.34 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Filter in Handpumpe wechseln @ 57\mod_1295940657968_78.doc @ 548130

13.8.1 Replacing the filter in the hand pump

2

3

1

2

Pos: 13.35 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BM 420 0033

Fig.296

Screw on the handwheel for fuel supply (2)

To block the fuel supply, pull the handwheel (2) all the way up

Remove the filter pan (1).

Clean the filter pan and filter insert. If there is a heavy accumulation of dirt or damage, replace the filter insert

Check the sealing ring for the filter pan and replace it if necessary

Wet the sealing ring with diesel fuel and set it in place

Place the filter insert in the filter pan and screw the filter pan (1) on the filter housing

Press the handwheel (2) down again to release the fuel supply

To vent, perform pump movements with the handwheel (2)

Screw handwheel (2) in again.

342

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 13.36.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/Harnstoff-Filtereinsatz wechseln @ 60\mod_1297752166282_78.doc @ 560277

13.9 Replacing Urea Filter Inserts

Pos: 13.36.2 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Hinweis Bei Verwendung von Harnstofflösung kann Ammoniak entstehen @ 60\mod_1297763415497_78.doc @ 560539

Note

Ammonia may be produced when urea solution is used. Therefore whenever changing filters, always wear globes and safety goggles and work in a well ventilated area. If the filters have

Pos: 13.36.3 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Harnstoffilter Einführungstext @ 60\mod_1297763580418_78.doc @ 560565 been opened, all seals must be replaced.

A total of three filters are installed: One main filter (1) and two pre-filters (in the feed module / supply line)

Note

The filter inserts must be replaced every time the engine oil is changed. The two pre-filters must also be replaced when necessary (if there are problems with clogging).

Pos: 13.36.4 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Hinweis mindestens 2 Minuten warten @ 60\mod_1297763173171_78.doc @ 560487

Note

After the engine is shut off, wait at least 2 minutes to ensure that suction of the urea solution has stopped

Pos: 13.36.5 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Hinweis Gebrauchte Harnstofffilter sind Sondermüll @ 60\mod_1297762624204_78.doc @ 560356

Note

Pos: 13.36.6 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Hauptfilter @ 60\mod_1297765689498_78.doc @ 560591

Used urea filters are special waste.

Main filter

Pos: 13.36.7 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Harnstoff-Filter Hauptfilter Bild BM 420 @ 60\mod_1297763293529_78.doc @ 560513

1

2

5

4

5

3

BM 420 0040

Fig. 297

Pos: 13.36.8 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Harnstoff-Filter wechsel Hauptfilter Text @ 60\mod_1297762963438_78.doc @ 560434

Switch off the engine and secure the machine from rolling away

Loosen the drain screw (1), collect the urea solution as it runs out and dispose of it properly

Unscrew the housing cover (2); replace the filter insert (3), half-moon seal (4), O-ring seals (5) and the O-ring seal of the drain screw (1)

Tighten the housing cover ( 25+5Nm )

Tighten the drain screw ( 4+1Nm )

Check the system for leaks

Pos: 13.36.9 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

343

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 13.36.10 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Vorfilter im Fördermodul @ 60\mod_1297765901759_78.doc @ 560644

Pre-filter in the feed module

Pos: 13.36.11 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Harnstoff-Vorfilter im Fördermodul Bild BM 420 @ 60\mod_1297765822832_78.doc @ 560617

2

3

BM 420 0041

Fig. 298

Pos: 13.36.12 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Harnstoff-Vorfilter im Fördermodul Text @ 60\mod_1297762778782_78.doc @ 560408

The pre-filter (2) rests in the supply connection on the bottom of the feed module. It can be unscrewed with a screwdriver.

Loosen the supply line at the in-connection of the feed module. To do this, press the white release key (3). (Make certain that no liquid runs out from the supply line.)

Rinse the exposed opening with water to clean it

Unscrew the old pre-filter anticlockwise with a screwdriver

Pos: 13.36.13 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Vorfilter in Versorgungsleitung wechseln @ 60\mod_1297766921822_78.doc @ 560698

Insert a new pre-filter and tighten it with a screwdriver to 0.4 ±0.1 Nm

Connect the supply line again

Changing the Pre-filter in the Supply Line

Pos: 13.36.14 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Vorfilter in Versorgungsleitung wechseln Bild BM 420 @ 60\mod_1297767076227_78.doc @ 560725

3

4

BM 420 0042

Fig. 299

Pos: 13.36.15 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Harnstoff-Vorfilter wechseln (Versorgungsleitung) @ 60\mod_1297762687329_78.doc @ 560382

The pre-filter (2) is located directly in front of the feed module in the supply line.

To remove the filter, press the white release key (4) and take out the connection piece

Remove and replace the prefilter insert

• Before connecting, place a new O-ring seal in the connection piece

Pos: 13.37 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

344

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 13.38 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Kraftstoff @ 0\mod_1196779500703_78.doc @ 14656

13.10 Fuel

Warning! - Danger of explosion!

• Never fill tank while the engine is running.

Pos: 13.39 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Handle fuel carefully. It is readily flammable. Do not smoke when adding fuel to the machine and make certain there are no open flames or sources of sparks in the vicinity.

Fuel must only be added outdoors. Prevent fires by keeping the machine free of dirt and grease residue. Always dispose of spilled fuel.

Quality and purity of fuel are very important for consistent performance and a long engine service life.

For temperatures under 10°C (50°F), always use winter fuel.

Note

For further information please refer to:

• Engine manufacturer’s operating instructions, included with delivery (chapter on fuels)

The engine manufacturer’s fuel specification, included with delivery

345

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 13.40 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Tanken @ 41\mod_1271676291625_78.doc @ 372060

13.11

Pos: 13.41 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Tanken Bild BM 400 @ 0\mod_1196779964656_78.doc @ 14675

Tanks

Fig. 300

Pos: 13.42 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Diesel/Tanken Text @ 41\mod_1271676476609_78.doc @ 372085

Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key, and secure the machine from rolling away.

Clean grass and dust from the area around the filler neck (1).

Open the tank cover.

Fill the fuel tank. (Use only clean fuel in the tank. If necessary, filter the fuel before adding it to the tank.)

Monitor tank filling on the fuel gauge in the Info Centre display.

Seal the tank cover tightly.

Dispose of spilled fuel.

Pos: 13.43 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Fassungsvermögen 700 Liter @ 41\mod_1271832241976_78.doc @ 373233

Pos: 13.44 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Note

Fill the fuel tank daily after finishing operation to prevent condensation water from forming and freezing in cold weather.

Capacity: about 700 litres

346

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 13.45 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Tanken von AdBlue Harnstofflösung @ 41\mod_1271679313562_78.doc @ 372210

13.12

Pos: 13.46 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Gefahr Harnstofflösung @ 53\mod_1289999067218_78.doc @ 508455

Tanks of urea solution

DANGER! – Ammonia vapours

Irritation of the skin, eyes and mucous membranes

Pos: 13.47 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Achtung Harnstofflösung @ 53\mod_1289999578671_78.doc @ 508501

If the tank cover of the container for the urea solution is opened at high temperatures, ammonia vapours may emerge. Ammonia vapours have a pungent smell and irritate the skin, eyes and mucous membranes in particular. This can lead to burning of the eyes, nose and throat as well as irritation of the throat and tearing eyes. Do not inhale ammonia vapours.

CAUTION!

Make certain that

• children do not reach the area of urea solutions

• the urea solution does not come in contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.

In case of eye contact, rinse the eyes immediately with large amounts of clear water

In case of skin contact, rinse the places on the skin immediately with large amounts of clear water.

If urea solution is ingested, rinse out the mouth immediately with plenty of clear water and drink large amounts of water.

Seek medical attention if necessary.

Pos: 13.48 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Hinweis unsachgemäßergerauch von Harnstofflösung @ 53\mod_1290000893796_78.doc @ 508527

Note

Improper handling of urea solutions causes hazards for the environment.

Do not allow the urea solution to reach the sewer system, bodies of surface water, the ground water or the soil in large quantities.

Pos: 13.49 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Harnstofflösung (AdBlue) Informationstext @ 41\mod_1271739758758_78.doc @ 372315

The machine is equipped with a MAN exhaust gas treatment system ( MAN SCR system). This is necessary to be able to observe the legally required exhaust gas limit values. In the MAN

SCR system, exhaust gas is cleaned with the aid of an injected urea solution in a downstream controlled diesel catalytic converter (CD-cat).

The urea solution is a synthetic solution of urea and water. (32.5% urea, 67.5% water in accordance with DIN V 70070). The urea solution is sold by the fuel dealer.

The urea solution is injected in a partial exhaust gas flow upstream from the mixer. It is converted into ammonia, mixes with the rest of the exhaust gas and then goes into the SCR catalytic converter (reduction catalytic converter) where the ammonia and the nitrogen oxides

(NOX) in the exhaust gas are converted into nitrogen and water vapour and are then expelled.

There is an additional tank on the machine for this synthetic urea water solution.

The filling level of the urea solution in the tank is indicated in the info centre display.

Pos: 13.50 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Harnstofflösung Zusatztank Einfüllstutzen @ 52\mod_1289401368843_78.doc @ 504105

Pos: 13.51 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Tanken Bild AdBlue BM 500 @ 41\mod_1271678550265_78.doc @ 372160

The filler neck is on the left side of the machine. It is identified by a corresponding sticker.

347

Maintenance – Engine

1

BM 500 0143

Fig.301

Pos: 13.52 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Harnstofflösung/Tanken Harnstofflösung (AdBlue) Text @ 41\mod_1271678707828_78.doc @ 372185

Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key, and secure the machine from rolling away

Clean grass and dust from the area around the filler neck (1)

Open the tank cover

Fill with urea solution (DIN70070)

Fill only until the fuelling nozzle shuts off!

Seal the tank cover tightly

Eliminate spilt urea solution

Pos: 13.53 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Fassungsvermögen 35 Liter @ 52\mod_1289299434437_78.doc @ 503057

Note

For further information please refer to:

• Engine manufacturer’s operating instructions, included with delivery (chapter on consumables).

• Capacity: about 35 litres

Pos: 13.54 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

348

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 13.55 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Kraftstoffanlage entlüften @ 0\mod_1196780180531_78.doc @ 14694

13.13 Venting the fuel system

Note

For further information please refer to :

• Engine manufacturer’s operating instructions, included with delivery (chapter on venting the fuel system).

The fuel system must be vented if necessary after a lengthy standstill.

Pos: 13.56 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Motorkühlmittel @ 0\mod_1196780280015_78.doc @ 14713

13.14

Engine

When the machine is first delivered the cooling system is filled with a special coolant. This coolant protects against corrosion and provides frost protection up to –37° C

Note

The cooling system must be always filled with engine coolant, no matter what the season.

Change the engine coolant every 3 years.

If no coolant is available, then depending on the season, you should use a mixture of 50 % ethylene glycol antifreeze/anticorrosion agent and 50 % clear, soft water. This mixture also provides corrosion protection and protection against freezing to –37° C. For further information, please refer to:

The engine manufacturer’s fuel specification, included with delivery (sheet 325.2)

Required quantity = 44 litres

Warning!

Cooling system density additives may not be used.

Pos: 13.57 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

349

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 13.58 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Motorkühlmittel – Kontrolle @ 57\mod_1295938314140_78.doc @ 548023

13.15

Pos: 13.59 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Warnung! - Heißer Verschlussdeckel @ 57\mod_1295938377734_78.doc @ 548049

Engine coolant – checks and controls

Pos: 13.60 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Motorkühlmittel Kontrolle Bild BM 420 @ 57\mod_1295938416937_78.doc @ 548075

Warning! - Hot cover

Effect: Hand burns

• Never open the cover (1) while the engine is hot. Switch off the engine and wait until the engine has cooled down.

1

2

BM 420 0031

Pos: 13.61 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Motorkühlmittel - Kontrolle Text allgemein @ 57\mod_1295882421968_78.doc @ 547854

Fig.302

Check:

Fill:

Check the level of engine coolant every day.

The engine coolant level must reach up to the middle of the control eye (2)

If necessary, top up the engine coolant

Turn the cover (1) to the first notch and wait until the overpressure reduces

Open the cover (1) completely and fill with engine coolant up to the middle of the viewing pane (2).

Close the cover (1) again.

Pos: 13.62 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

350

Pos: 13.63 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Luftfilter @ 41\mod_1271407012930_78.doc @ 371355

Pos: 13.64 /BA/Wartung/Luftfilter/Luftfilter Bild BM 500 @ 41\mod_1271407417805_78.doc @ 371381

1

2 4

Maintenance – Engine

3

BM 500 0139

Pos: 13.65 /BA/Wartung/Luftfilter/Luftfilter Text @ 0\mod_1196780781406_78.doc @ 14793

Fig.303

Perform air filter maintenance regularly, but at least when the error message filter appears in the Info Centre Display. for a dirty air

Cleaning the Air Filter

Unscrew the nut (2) and remove the cover (1).

Unscrew the nut (4) and carefully remove the filter insert (3).

Clean the interior area and the seal surfaces of the filter housing.

Blow out the filter insert with compressed air (max. 5 bar) from the inside to the outside.

Replace filter inserts that are excessively dirty or damaged. Filter inserts that were installed more than 4 years ago must also be replaced.

Install the filter insert again.

Mount the cover (1).

Close the air filter intake sieve.

Pos: 13.66 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

351

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 13.67 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Sicherheitspatrone @ 0\mod_1196781597406_78.doc @ 14812

13.16.1

Pos: 13.68 /BA/Wartung/Luftfilter/Sicherheitspatrone Text @ 41\mod_1271408027883_78.doc @ 371431

Safety cartridge

1

2

3

4

Pos: 14 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

5

6

BM 500 0140

Fig.304

Replacing the safety cartridge

Safety cartridge must not be cleaned and used again!

• Unscrew the nut (2) and remove the cover (1).

Unscrew the nut (4) and carefully remove the filter insert (3).

Unscrew the nut (5) and carefully remove the safety cartridge (6).

Clean the interior area and the seal surfaces of the filter housing.

Insert a new safety cartridge

Clean the filter insert with compressed air (max. 5 bar), blowing out from the inside to the outside.

Install the filter insert again.

Mount the cover (1).

Close the air filter intake sieve.

352

Maintenance – compressed air system

Pos: 15.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Wartung - Druckluftanlage @ 52\mod_1289386214984_78.doc @ 503224

14

Pos: 15.2 /BA/Wartung/Druckluftanlage/Gefahr Druckluftanlage steht unter Druck @ 52\mod_1289379943171_78.doc @ 503146

Maintenance – compressed air system

DANGER! – Compressed air system is under high pressure.

Death or serious injuries.

Pos: 15.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Druckluftbehälter @ 12\mod_1224144256075_78.doc @ 150965

Before maintenance work on the compressed air system:

Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

Decrease the pressure in the compressed air system

14.1

Pos: 15.4 /BA/Wartung/Druckluftbehälter/Druckluftbehälter Bild Big M 420 @ 52\mod_1289390324093_78.doc @ 503298

Compressed-air reservoir

3

1

4

Pos: 15.5 /BA/Wartung/Druckluftbehälter/Druckluftbehälter Übersicht @ 12\mod_1224144365668_78.doc @ 150989

Fig.305

Overview:

2

BM 420 0038

Pos: 15.6 /BA/Wartung/Druckluftanlage/Druck abbauen @ 52\mod_1289391176796_78.doc @ 503365

Pos: 15.7 /BA/Wartung/Druckluftanlage/Druckluftbehälter kontrollieren @ 52\mod_1289380276328_78.doc @ 503276

Reducing the pressure

Switch off the vehicle safely

Pull the drain valve ring (2) on the compressed air reservoir (1) down until the excess pressure is reduced

14.1.1 Checking the compressed air reservoir

Pos: 15.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

DANGER! – Compressed air reservoir corroded or damaged

Death or serious injuries

• Observe test intervals

• Have damaged compressed air reservoirs replaced immediately by a specialist's workshop

Have the interior area of the compressed air reservoir (1) checked in accordance with national requirements. A check is recommended at intervals of 2 years.

353

Maintenance – compressed air system

Pos: 15.9 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/Entwässerungsventil kontrollieren @ 52\mod_1289391310593_78.doc @ 503391

14.1.2

Pos: 15.10 /BA/Wartung/Druckluftbehälter/Druckluftbehälter_Text @ 0\mod_1200293406164_78.doc @ 39343

Checking the drain valve

The compressed-air reservoir stores the compressed air that is pumped by the compressor.

Therefore condensation water may settle in the compressed air reservoir during operation. The compressed-air reservoir must be emptied regularly. Specifically, it must be emptied:

• daily in winter (when being used),

• otherwise weekly and

• at least after 20 operating hours.

The drain valve on the bottom of the compressed-air reservoir is used for draining.

Note

Switch off and secure the machine.

Open the drain valve and allow the condensation to run out.

Check the drain valve, clean it and screw it back in.

Pos: 15.11 /BA/Wartung/Druckluftbehälter/Spannbänder nachziehen @ 52\mod_1289385925093_78.doc @ 503198

If the drain valve has a heavy accumulation of dirt or is leaking, it must be replaced by a new one.

14.1.3 Retighten tensioning belts

Check the tensioning belts (3) of the compressed air reservoir to ensure they are properly seated

If necessary, retighten the tensioning belts with the nuts (4)

Pos: 16 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

354

Pos: 17 /BA/Diese Seite ist bewusst freigelassen worden. @ 1\mod_1201783680373_78.doc @ 54443

This page has been left blank deliberately!!

Pos: 18 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Maintenance – compressed air system

355

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 19.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Wartung- Mähwerke @ 0\mod_1196781956937_78.doc @ 14832

15

Pos: 19.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Spezielle Sicherheitshinweise @ 0\mod_1196660495760_78.doc @ 9134

Maintenance – Mowing Units

15.1 Special Safety Instructions

Pos: 19.3 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Unvorhergesehene Aktionen an der Maschine_1 @ 0\mod_1196782315875_78.doc @ 14851

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing any repairs, maintenance or cleaning.

Pos: 19.4 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Bei unregelmäßiger Kontrolle der Messerklingen und Haltebolzen @ 0\mod_1196782406281_78.doc @ 14870

The cutting discs continue to run!

Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

Danger! - When checking the cutter blades and retaining bolts only sporadically

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Always check the mowing units for damaged, missing or worn blades, retaining bolts, leaf springs and cutting discs/blade drum before starting operation; replace any parts that are damaged, missing or worn!

Always replace missing and damaged blades in sets to prevent unbalanced rotation!

Never mount unevenly worn blades on a drum/disc!

Whenever a blade is changed, also inspect the fasteners and replace them, if necessary!

Pos: 19.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

356

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 19.6 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Probelauf @ 0\mod_1196833698843_78.doc @ 15023

15.1.1

Pos: 19.7 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Probelauf Mehrzahll @ 0\mod_1196782825187_78.doc @ 14889

Test run

Danger! - Testing the machine after repair, maintenance or cleaning work and after technical intervention.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The mowing unit must be in working position

• Do not switch on the drives until the mowing units are resting on the ground and you are absolutely sure that neither persons, animals nor objects are in the danger zone.

Start a trial run of the machine only from the driver’s seat.

Pos: 19.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Ersatzteile @ 0\mod_1196782991234_78.doc @ 14927

15.2 Spare Parts

Pos: 19.9 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Verwendung von nicht zugelassenen Ersatzteilen @ 0\mod_1196783037140_78.doc @ 14946

Danger! - Using non-approved spare parts.

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or loss of warranty claims as well as exclusion of liability

• Use only authentic KRONE spare parts and accessories authorised by the manufacturer.

The use of spare parts, accessories or additional equipment not manufactured, tested or approved by KRONE will exclude any liability for consequential damage.

Pos: 19.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

357

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 19.11 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Wartungstabellen/Wartungstabelle- Mähwerke BIG M 400 @ 38\mod_1266479418515_78.doc @ 352669

15.3 Maintenance Table – Mowing Units

Maintenance interval

3

2

4

1

Main gearbox – CV lateral mowing units

Oil level check

Angular gearbox for front mower CV+CRi

Oil level check

Input gearbox for front mower CV+CRi

Oil level check

Front mower speed gearbox (CV)

Oil level check

5

Angular gearbox for front mower CR

Oil level check

6 Gearbox for top roller drive CRi (optional)

Oil level check

8

7

Front mower cutter bar CV + CRi

Oil level check

Cutter bar for lateral mowing units

Oil level check

9

Cutter blades

Check screw

10

Mowing discs / mower drum

Check

Screw

11

Rotary hub

Check

Screw

12

Conditioner belt drive

13

Clean

Screw

V-shaped tines and retaining bolts

Check

Screw

Pos: 19.12 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

358

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X X

X X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Pos: 19.13 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/Werkzeugkasten @ 0\mod_1196832731327_78.doc @ 14985

15.4

Pos: 19.14 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Werkzeugkasten Bild Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196946656311_78.doc @ 15234

Tool box

Maintenance – Mowing Units

BM 400 202

Pos: 19.15 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Anzugsdrehmomente @ 45\mod_1277103093968_78.doc @ 410970

Fig. 306

Pos: 19.16 /BA/Wartung/Drehmomente / Anzugsmomente/Drehmomente @ 45\mod_1277102920578_78.doc @ 410945

The tightening torque M

A

is stated in Nm

(unless otherwise indicated).

A = Thread size

(The stability class can be seen on the head of the screw.)

Pos: 19.17 /BA/Wartung/Muttern und Schrauben (50h) anziehen @ 0\mod_1196949864530_78.doc @ 15293

M 4

A

Ø

5.6 6.8 8.8 10.9

12.9

MA (Nm)

2.2 3 4.4 5.1

M 5

4.5 5.9 8.7 10

M 6

7.6 10 15 18

M 8

18 25 36 43

M 10 29 37 49 72 84

M12

42 64 85 125 145

M14

100 135 200 235

M14x1.5

M30

145 215 255

M 16

M 24x2

160 210 310 365

M16x1.5

225 330 390

M 20

425 610 710

M 24

M 24x1.5 350

730 1050 1220

800 1150 1350

M 27

1100 1550 1800

M 27x2

1150 1650 1950

1450 2100 2450

NOTE

The table above does not apply to countersunk screws with a hexagonal socket head if the countersunk screw is tightened with the hexagonal socket head.

Note

Regularly check that nuts and bolts are tightly in place (approx. every 50 hours) and tighten them if necessary.

Pos: 19.18 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

359

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 19.19 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Anzugsdrehmomente über Innensechskant @ 45\mod_1277106415765_78.doc @ 411230

15.6 Tightening Torques (Countersunk Screws)

Pos: 19.20 /BA/Wartung/Drehmomente / Anzugsmomente/Drehmomente über Innensechskant @ 45\mod_1277106232328_78.doc @ 411205

The tightening torque M

A

is stated in Nm

(unless otherwise indicated).

A = Thread size

(The stability class can be seen on the head of the screw.)

A

Ø

5.6 8.8 10.9

12.9

MA (Nm)

M 4

2.5 3.5 4.1

M 5

4.7 7 8

M 6 A

M 8

20 29 35

M 10

23 39 58 67

M 12

34 68 100 116

M 14

M 16

BM 400 0234

M 20

NOTE

Pos: 19.21 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/Abweichendes Drehmoment @ 0\mod_1196950054171_78.doc @ 15312

The table above applies only to countersunk screws with hexagonal socket heads and metric threading that are tightened by the hexagonal socket head.

Pos: 19.22 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Abweichendes Drehmoment Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196949184374_78.doc @ 15274

Screws / nuts

Nut for shear protection (rotary hub)

Bearing housing for cutting disc

Bearing housing for blade drum

Pos: 19.23 /BA/Wartung/Muttern und Schrauben (50h) anziehen @ 0\mod_1196949864530_78.doc @ 15293

Note

Regularly check that nuts and bolts are tightly in place (approx. every 50 hours) and tighten them if necessary.

Pos: 19.24 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

MA [Nm]

300

42

42

360

Pos: 19.25 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Frontschutz öffnen BiG M 400 @ 13\mod_1226398163617_78.doc @ 165608

15.7 Opening the Front Guard

4

Maintenance – Mowing Units

1

Pos: 19.26 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

2

3

2

BM 400 0229

Fig. 307

The front guard (2) on the cutter bar can be folded up for maintenance and repair work.

To do this:

Use the special tool (1) (located in the tool box) to release the lock of the front guard (2).

Push the front guard (2) as far forward as it will go and the swivel it up.

Secure the front guard (2) against folding down with a tension spring (3).

Note

After maintenance and repair work, fold down the front guard (2) and push it in until the interlocks (4) have engaged (right and left).

361

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 19.27 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/Verstopfungen am Querförderer beseitigen @ 13\mod_1226557103071_78.doc @ 166210

15.8

Pos: 19.28 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Unvorhergesehene Inbetriebnahme_2 @ 13\mod_1226501654990_78.doc @ 166160

Eliminating Blockages on the Cross Conveyor

Danger! - Accidental start-up of the machine, moving parts of the machine and / or unexpected movement of the machine.

Pos: 19.29 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Verstopfungen am Querförderer beseitigen @ 13\mod_1226500830396_78.doc @ 166140

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Switch off the engine, apply the parking brake and remove the ignition key.

Wait until machine parts that are still in motion have coasted down to a stop.

Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back by means of wheel chocks.

1

Pos.I

Pos.II

1

Pos: 19.30 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

2 2

BM 400 0233

Fig. 308

The hydraulic auger hood (1) must be secured against folding down during maintenance, cleaning and repair work on the augers by means of the spring cotter pins (2).

To do this:

Lower all mowing units to the ground.

Open the hydraulic auger hoods (1).

Secure the hydraulic auger hood (1) by moving the spring cotter pins (2) (right and left) from pos. I to pos. II.

After the fault is eliminated, move the spring cotter pins (2) (right and left) back to their original positions (from pos. II to pos. I).

Close the hydraulic auger hood.

362

Pos: 19.31 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Scherbolzen am Aufbereiter @ 37\mod_1264082884090_78.doc @ 341094

15.9

Pos: 19.32 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Scherbolzen am Aufbereiter @ 37\mod_1264062362856_78.doc @ 340785

Shear pins on the conditioner

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 19.33 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BM 400 0257

Fig. 309

The conditioners of the front mowing units and lateral mowing units (right / left) on BiG M 400

CRI are each secured with a shear pin (1). The shear pin shears off as soon as an overload occurs.

The shear pin is located on the flange (2) between the gearbox tower and the conditioner rollers. The spare shear pins (3) and spare shear bushings (4) are located on the conditioner housing.

Replacement of shear pins

Front mowing unit and lateral mowing units right / left must be placed on the ground

Switch machine off, apply the parking brake and remove the ignition key; wait until the machine parts which keep on rotating stopped completely; secure the machine with wheel chocks against rolling.

If necessary, turn the cutter bar manually until the grooves of the flanges are positioned next to each other

Take the spare shear pin (3) with the two bushings (4) and preassemble the bushings with a distance of 5mm

Place the preassembled shear pins with bushings (3, 4) into the grooves of the flange

Tighten the shear pins

363

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 19.34 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/Füllmengen und Schmiermittelbezeichnungen der Getriebe @ 0\mod_1196951094046_78.doc @ 15335

15.10

Pos: 19.35 /BA/Wartung/Tabellen/Mähwerke/Tabelle Füllmengen EC 32 CV Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196951158265_78.doc @ 15354

Filling Quantities and Lubrication Designations for Gearboxes

Tank

Capacity

Filtered oils

[litres] Brand name

Main gearbox side mower

Angular gearbox/front mower

Input gearbox/front mower (CV/CRI)

2 x L 1.7

L 1.7

L 0.7

SAE90

SAE90

SAE90

Bio-degradable lubricants

Brand name

Speed gearbox/front mower (CV) L 1.7

SAE90

On request

Angular gearbox/front mower (CRI) 0,9 SAE90

Gearbox for Top Roller Drive (optional) 0,3

Cutter bar/front mower (CV/CRI) SAE90

Cutter bar/side mower 2 x 8,0 l SAE90

Pos: 19.36 /BA/Wartung/Zeitintervalle an den Getrieben @ 0\mod_1196951919921_78.doc @ 15373

15.10.1 Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)

Pos: 19.37 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Note - Oil level check and oil change (gearboxes) and lubricating the machine

Effect: Long expected service life of machine

• First oil change on all gearboxes after 50 operating hours, then every 200 operating hours (but at least once a year).

• Before using the machine always check the oil level.

• With bio-degradable oils the changing intervals must be complied with absolutely because of ageing of the oils.

364

Pos: 19.38.1.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/Hauptgetriebe @ 0\mod_1197005740033_78.doc @ 15416

15.11

Pos: 19.38.1.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Seitenmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675974056_78.doc @ 10706

Main gearbox

15.11.1 Lateral Mowing Unit

Pos: 19.38.1.3 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Mähwerke/Bild Hauptgetriebe seit. Mähwerke @ 0\mod_1197007390299_78.doc @ 15492

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Fig. 310

Pos: 19.38.1.4 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Mähwerke/Ölwechsel Hauptgetriebe seitl. Mähwerke @ 0\mod_1197006270283_78.doc @ 15473

Oil level check:

Pos: 19.38.1.5 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölkontrolle Hauptgetriebe seitl. Mähwerke @ 0\mod_1196952482749_78.doc @ 15393

Screw the measuring rod (2) out of the main gearbox (1).

Clean the measuring rod (2) with absorbent paper or cloth.

Screw the measuring rod (2) completely back into the main gearbox (1).

Screw the measuring rod (2) back out of the main gearbox (1).

Check the oil level and check for abrasion. The oil level must be between the marks (3). If necessary, add more oil (SAE 90) through the measuring rod opening.

Screw the measuring rod (2) back into the main gearbox (1).

Changing the oil :

Pos: 19.38.1.6 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.doc @ 15531

Unscrew the measuring rod (2).

Unscrew the oil drain plug (4).

Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan.

Fit the oil screw plug with a new seal.

Top up the oil from above (the dip stick hole); screw the dip stick (2) back in.

Pos: 19.38.1.7 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.doc @ 15550

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

Note

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

Pos: 19.38.2 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

365

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 19.38.3.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/Winkelgetriebe @ 0\mod_1197005918299_78.doc @ 15435

Pos: 19.38.3.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwerk (CV+CRI) @ 0\mod_1197008615440_78.doc @ 15609

15.12.1 Front Mowing Unit (CV+CRI)

Pos: 19.38.3.3 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Mähwerke/Bild Winkelgetriebe Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1197008732315_78.doc @ 15629

3

1

EC-152-0

Fig. 311:

Pos: 19.38.3.4 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölkontrolle SAE 90 @ 0\mod_1197008973815_78.doc @ 15649

Oil level check:

• For time intervals, see Chapter " Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".

• Unscrew the inspection screw (1)

• Oil level up to bore hole (1)

Pos: 19.38.3.5 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölwechsel Belüftungsfilter @ 0\mod_1197009428424_78.doc @ 15668

• If necessary, top up the oil (SAE 90)

• Screw the check screw (1) back in.

Oil change:

Pos: 19.38.3.6 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.doc @ 15531

For time intervals, see Chapter " Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".

Unscrew venting filter (3) and extract the oil

Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan

Top up oil from above (oil level up to bore hole (1)).

Screw in the ventilation filter (3).

Pos: 19.38.3.7 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.doc @ 15550

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

Note

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

Pos: 19.38.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

366

Pos: 19.38.5.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Eingangsgetriebe @ 0\mod_1197005979596_78.doc @ 15454

15.13

Pos: 19.38.5.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwerk (CV+CRI) @ 0\mod_1197008615440_78.doc @ 15609

Input gearbox

15.13.1 Front Mowing Unit (CV+CRI)

Pos: 19.38.5.3 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Mähwerke/Bild Eingangsgetriebe Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1197009824221_78.doc @ 15727

Maintenance – Mowing Units

EC-0-040

Fig. 312:

Pos: 19.38.5.4 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölkontrolle SAE 90 @ 0\mod_1197008973815_78.doc @ 15649

Oil level check:

Pos: 19.38.5.5 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölwechsel Version1 (Belüftungsfilter) @ 0\mod_1197010026283_78.doc @ 15747

For time intervals, see Chapter " Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".

• Unscrew the inspection screw (1)

• Oil level up to bore hole (1)

• If necessary, top up the oil (SAE 90)

Screw the check screw (1) back in.

Oil change:

Pos: 19.38.5.6 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.doc @ 15531

For time intervals, see Chapter "

Screw in the screw plug (2)

Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".

Screw out the screw plug (2).

Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan

Fill oil (3) (oil level up to hole (1))

Screw the inspection screw (1) and ventilation filter (3) back in.

Pos: 19.38.5.7 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.doc @ 15550

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

Note

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

Pos: 19.38.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

367

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 19.38.7.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Schaltgetriebe @ 0\mod_1197010889455_78.doc @ 15766

15.14

Pos: 19.38.7.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwerk (CV) @ 0\mod_1196670225510_78.doc @ 10342

Speed gearbox

15.14.1 Front mowing unit (CV)

Pos: 19.38.7.3 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Mähwerke/Bild Schaltgetriebe CV-Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1197012856815_78.doc @ 15805

EC-1-041

Fig. 313:

Pos: 19.38.7.4 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölkontrolle SAE 90 @ 0\mod_1197008973815_78.doc @ 15649

Oil level check:

Pos: 19.38.7.5 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölwechsel Version1 (Belüftungsfilter) @ 0\mod_1197010026283_78.doc @ 15747

For time intervals, see Chapter " Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".

• Unscrew the inspection screw (1)

• Oil level up to bore hole (1)

• If necessary, top up the oil (SAE 90)

Screw the check screw (1) back in.

Oil change:

Pos: 19.38.7.6 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.doc @ 15531

For time intervals, see Chapter "

Screw in the screw plug (2)

Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".

Screw out the screw plug (2).

Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan

Fill oil (3) (oil level up to hole (1))

Screw the inspection screw (1) and ventilation filter (3) back in.

Pos: 19.38.7.7 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.doc @ 15550

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

Note

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

Pos: 19.38.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

368

Pos: 19.38.9.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/Winkelgetriebe @ 0\mod_1197005918299_78.doc @ 15435

Pos: 19.38.9.2 /Abkürzungen /Abkürzungen sprachneutral/CRI @ 0\mod_1197013559580_0.doc @ 15825

15.15.1 CRI

Pos: 19.38.9.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/U-Z/Unterteil @ 10\mod_1221640227712_78.doc @ 135712

Pos: 19.38.9.4 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Mähwerke/Bild Winkelgetriebe CRI @ 0\mod_1197013688111_78.doc @ 15844

2

1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

EC-189-0

Fig. 314:

Pos: 19.38.9.5 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölkontrolle SAE 90 @ 0\mod_1197008973815_78.doc @ 15649

Oil level check:

Pos: 19.38.9.6 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölwechsel Version2 @ 0\mod_1197016258486_78.doc @ 15884

• For time intervals, see Chapter " Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".

• Unscrew the inspection screw (1)

• Oil level up to bore hole (1)

• If necessary, top up the oil (SAE 90)

• Screw the check screw (1) back in.

Oil change:

Pos: 19.38.9.7 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.doc @ 15531

For time intervals, see Chapter "

Screw out the screw plug (2).

Screw in the screw plug (2)

Fill oil (1) (oil level up to hole (1))

Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".

Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan

Pos: 19.38.9.8 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.doc @ 15550

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

Note

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

Pos: 19.38.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

369

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 19.38.11.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/Getriebe für oberen Walzenantrieb @ 11\mod_1223618840051_78.doc @ 148283

15.16 Gearbox for Top Roller Drive

Pos: 19.38.11.2 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Mähwerke/Bild Getriebe für oberen Walzenantrieb @ 0\mod_1197016558018_78.doc @ 15923

1

EC-186-0

Fig. 315:

Pos: 19.38.11.3 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölkontrolle SAE 90 @ 0\mod_1197008973815_78.doc @ 15649

Oil level check:

Pos: 19.38.11.4 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölwechsel Version2 @ 0\mod_1197016258486_78.doc @ 15884

• For time intervals, see Chapter " Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".

• Unscrew the inspection screw (1)

• Oil level up to bore hole (1)

• If necessary, top up the oil (SAE 90)

• Screw the check screw (1) back in.

Oil change:

Pos: 19.38.11.5 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.doc @ 15531

For time intervals, see Chapter "

Screw out the screw plug (2).

Screw in the screw plug (2)

Fill oil (1) (oil level up to hole (1))

Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".

Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan

Pos: 19.38.11.6 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.doc @ 15550

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

Note

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

Pos: 19.38.12 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

370

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 19.38.13.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Ölstandskontrolle und Ölwechsel am Mähholm @ 0\mod_1197017549815_78.doc @ 15963

15.17

Pos: 19.38.13.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.doc @ 10648

Oil level check and oil change on the cutter bar

15.17.1 Front mowing unit

Pos: 19.38.13.3 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Schnell rotierende Messerteller/Messertrommeln_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.doc @ 16001

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!

Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

Pos: 19.38.13.4 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/Mähholm ausrichten @ 0\mod_1197017956815_78.doc @ 16042

15.17.2

Pos: 19.38.13.5 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Vorraussetzung Ausrichten Mähholm Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197018894471_78.doc @ 16061

Aligning the Cutter Bar

Prerequisite:

Switch off the travelling gear release switch

Use the multi-function lever to move the 3 mowing units into working position (float setting).

Pos: 19.38.13.6 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Mähholm ausrichten Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197018990346_78.doc @ 16101

Pos: 19.38.13.7 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 316

Aligning the mowing units crosswise

• Place a manual spirit level centred on the cutter bars.

Standard design:

• Align the cutter bars horizontally (see Chapter "Setting for Cutting Height on the Front

Mowing Unit" and Setting for Cutting Height on the Lateral Mowing Unit").

With hydraulic cutting height option:

• Align the cutting bars horizontally (See Info Centre chapter "Aligning the Mowing Units").

Lengthwise

Place manual spirit level (1) on two cutting discs.

Use wedges to align the cutter bar horizontally.

371

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 19.38.13.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/Ölkontrolle @ 0\mod_1197021908190_78.doc @ 16120

15.17.3 Checking the oil level

Pos: 19.38.13.9 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Schnell rotierende Messerteller/Messertrommel_2 @ 0\mod_1197022569252_78.doc @ 16165

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

Lower guards. Nobody should be in the danger zone around the machine.

Pos: 19.38.13.1 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Schnell rotierende Messerteller/Messertrommeln_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.doc @ 16001

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!

Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

Pos: 19.38.13.1 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Ölkontrolle Mähholm Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197026101830_78.doc @ 16184

Allow the machine to run briefly. Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

Pos: 19.38.13.1 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

2

BMII-362

Fig. 317:

Unscrew one of the two oil level inspection screws (2) on the cutter bar.

The oil level must be up to the bore hole. If necessary, top up the oil (SAE 90)

Screw in the oil level inspection screw (2) again and tighten in securely.

372

Pos: 19.38.13.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/Ölwechsel @ 0\mod_1197021941955_78.doc @ 16139

Pos: 19.38.13.1 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Ölwechsel Mähholm Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197026735955_78.doc @ 16203

2

Maintenance – Mowing Units

1

BMII-363

Fig. 318:

Note

Lift the mowing unit slightly and set a wooden beam underneath on the opposite side of the cover (2).

Lower the mowing unit so that the cutter bar is resting on the wooden beam.

Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key, and secure the machine from rolling away.

Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan.

Remove cover (2) at the cutter bar end

Drain the oil.

Reinstall cover (2) with new seal.

Unscrew one of the two oil level inspection screws (2) on the cutter bar and add oil.

Screw in the oil level inspection screw (2) again and tighten in securely.

To check the oil level, align the cutter bar crosswise and lengthwise (see chapter

"Aligning the Cutter Bar").

Pos: 19.38.13.1 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.doc @ 15531

• Always check the oil level after repair work on the cutter bar.

Pos: 19.38.13.1 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.doc @ 15550

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

Note

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

Pos: 19.38.13.1 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

373

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 19.38.13.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Ölstandskontrolle und Ölwechsel am Mähholm @ 0\mod_1197017549815_78.doc @ 15963

15.18

Pos: 19.38.13.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Seitenmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675974056_78.doc @ 10706

Oil level check and oil change on the cutter bar

15.18.1 Lateral Mowing Unit

Pos: 19.38.13.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Schnell rotierende Messerteller/Messertrommel_2 @ 0\mod_1197022569252_78.doc @ 16165

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

Lower guards. Nobody should be in the danger zone around the machine.

Pos: 19.38.13.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Schnell rotierende Messerteller/Messertrommeln_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.doc @ 16001

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!

Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

Pos: 19.38.13.2 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

374

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 19.38.13.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/Ölkontrolle @ 0\mod_1197021908190_78.doc @ 16120

15.18.2 Checking the oil level

Pos: 19.38.13.2 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Ölkontrolle Seitenmähwerke Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197027611736_78.doc @ 16222

Allow the mowing unit to run briefly in working position.

Wait until the cutter bars have come to a complete stop.

Fold up the lateral mowing units.

Pos: 19.38.13.2 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 319

Note

Slightly loosen the lower oil level inspection screws (2) on the cutter bar (1) of the right/left lateral mowing units.

If oil emerges from the hole, the oil level is correct. Otherwise add oil (SAE 90).

• Tighten the oil level inspection screws (2) again.

375

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 19.38.13.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/Ölwechsel @ 0\mod_1197021941955_78.doc @ 16139

Pos: 19.38.13.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Schnell rotierende Messerteller/Messertrommeln_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.doc @ 16001

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!

Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

Pos: 19.38.13.2 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Ölwechsel seitliche Mähwerke Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197028506408_78.doc @ 16241

3

BMII-371

Fig. 320

Note

Fold up the right/left lateral mowing units (1).

Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan.

Remove the lower cover (2) on the cutter bar.

Reinstall cover (2) with new seal.

Add oil at the lower inspection screws (3).

Check oil level (see chapter "Checking the Oil Level").

Pos: 19.38.13.2 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.doc @ 15531

• Always check the oil level after repair work on the cutter bar.

Pos: 19.38.13.3 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.doc @ 15550

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

Note

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

Pos: 19.39 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

376

Pos: 19.40 /BA/Diese Seite ist bewusst freigelassen worden. @ 1\mod_1201783680373_78.doc @ 54443

This page has been left blank deliberately!!

Pos: 19.41 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Maintenance – Mowing Units

377

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 19.42.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Kontrolle der Mähklingen und Messerhalterung @ 0\mod_1197265641329_78.doc @ 16323

15.19 Checking the Cutter Blades and Blade Holder

Pos: 19.42.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Fehlende und beschädigte Mähklingen und Mähklingenhalterungen @ 0\mod_1197265722813_78.doc @ 16342

Warning! - Missing and damaged cutter blades and cutter blade retainers.

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or damage to the machine

Check cutter blades at least once per day and check retaining bolts every time you change the blades or after contact with foreign objects.

Immediately replace missing or damaged cutter blades and cutter blade retainers

Pos: 19.42.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/Mähklingen @ 0\mod_1197265959110_78.doc @ 16361

Pos: 19.42.4 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Die Bohrung der Mähklingen kann sich durch Verschleiß aufweiten. @ 10\mod_1221048982715_78.doc @ 131675

The borehole on the cutter blades may spread due to wear.

Pos: 19.42.5 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Zu geringe Materialstärke an den Mähklingen_neu @ 3\mod_1204727167898_78.doc @ 72588

Danger! - Insufficient thickness of material on the cutter blades.

Pos: 19.42.6 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Mähklingen beidseitig verwenbar_neu @ 3\mod_1204728012601_78.doc @ 72608

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• The cutter blades must be replaced at the latest when the wear limit is reached (see mark (1) on the cutter blade; dimension a less than or equal to 7 mm). a

Pos: 19.42.7 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

1

EC 253 0

Fig. 321

Note - The cutter blades can be turned around and used on both sides.

• When cutter blades are missing or damaged, they must be replaced as a complete set.

This prevents dangerous unbalanced rotation

378

Pos: 19.42.8 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Messerschraubverschluss @ 0\mod_1197267907375_78.doc @ 16425

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Danger! - Insufficient thickness of material on the retaining bolts.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• At every blade changing check the thickness of the holding bolts material.

Damage or worn retaining bolts must always be replaced by sets on each cutting disc/blade drum!

The material thickness of the retaining bolts must not be less than 14 mm at the weakest point.

Pos: 19.42.9 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 322 min. 14 mm

EC-240-0

379

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 19.42.10 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Messerschnellverschluss @ 0\mod_1197268087875_78.doc @ 16444

15.19.3 Blade Quick-Fit Device

Danger! - Insufficient thickness of material on the retaining bolts.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• At every blade changing check the thickness of the holding bolts material.

Damage or worn retaining bolts must always be replaced by sets on each cutting disc/blade drum!

The material thickness of the retaining bolts must not be less than 14 mm at the weakest point.

The material thickness of the leaf spring must not be less than 3 mm at the weakest point.

Pos: 19.42.11 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 323 min. 14 mm EC-239-0

380

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 19.42.12 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Regelmäßige Kontrolle der Blattfedern @ 0\mod_1197268274609_78.doc @ 16464

15.19.4 Periodical Inspection of the Leaf Springs

Danger! - Worn application seam on the leaf springs.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Check the leaf springs for damages at least once a day or after contact with foreign objects.

• The abrasion limit of the leaf springs will be achieved if the application seam (1) is worn on one point.

1 1

Pos: 19.42.13 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

EC 225 0

Fig. 324

Note

Use only original Krone spare parts to replace the leaf springs.

381

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 19.42.14 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Regelmäßige Kontrolle der Messerteller bzw. -trommeln @ 0\mod_1197268487390_78.doc @ 16483

15.19.5 Periodical Inspection of the Cutting Discs / Blade Drums

Danger! - Deformed Cutting Discs / Blade Drums

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Check the cutting discs or blade drums for damages at least once per day or after contact with foreign objects.

• In case of deformed cuttings discs or drums, the dimension of A = 48 mm must never be exceeded.

1

A

Pos: 19.42.15 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

EC-0-211

Fig. 325

Note

The cutting discs or drums must be replaced by Original Krone spare parts only.

382

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 19.42.16 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Verschleissgrenze für Auswaschungen @ 0\mod_1197268738875_78.doc @ 16502

15.19.6 Abrasion Limit

Danger! - Abrasion on the cutting discs / blade drums

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• The abrasion limit (2) will be achieved if the min. material thickness of 3 mm is no longer given.

2

Pos: 19.42.17 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

2

EC-226-0

Fig. 326

Note

If cutting discs or blade drums show deformations or wear in form of abrasions (2) or similar, these components have to be replaced by Original Krone spare parts .

383

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 19.42.18 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Messerwechsel an Messertellern @ 0\mod_1197269068562_78.doc @ 16521

15.20 Blade Changing on Cutting Discs

Pos: 19.42.19 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Schnell rotierende Messerteller/Messertrommeln_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.doc @ 16001

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!

Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

Pos: 19.42.20 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Sich lösende Mähklingen @ 0\mod_1197269483265_78.doc @ 16540

Danger! - Cutter blades coming loose

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

After changing the blades check that they fit perfectly and that they can move freely.

Whenever a blade is changed, also inspect the fasteners and replace them, if necessary!

Always replace missing and damaged blades in sets to prevent unbalanced rotation!

Never mount unevenly worn blades on a drum/disc!

Pos: 19.42.21 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

384

Pos: 19.42.22 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/Messerschraubverschluß @ 0\mod_1197270941296_78.doc @ 16578

15.20.1 Blade Screw Connection

Pos: 19.42.23 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Beschreibung Messerwechsel Messerschraubverschluss @ 47\mod_1285661949953_78.doc @ 456898

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 19.42.24 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

EC-0-250

Pic. 327

Note

Fold up safety device

Clean the area

Remove damaged or worn blades

To fit the blades, insert the blade (5) between the wear skid (2) and the cutting disc (1)

Insert the retaining bolt (3) from below through the wear skid, the blade and the cutting disc

Place the locknut (4) on the retaining bolt from above and tighten it firmly (tightening torque refer to chapter “Torques”)

Repeat the process for all blades

After fitting the blades, fold the safety device down again

The cutter blades of anticlockwise rotating cutting discs / blade drums are different to those of clockwise rotating ones. Make certain the direction of rotation is correct when installing!

The arrow on the cutter blades must match the direction of rotation of the corresponding cutting discs / blade drums

The locknut (4) used to secure the retaining bolts must not be used more than once •

Order No. for clockwise rotating blade: 139-889

Order No. for anticlockwise rotating blade: 139-888

385

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 19.42.25 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/Messerschnellverschluß @ 0\mod_1197271019859_78.doc @ 16597

15.20.2 Blade Quick-Fit Device

Pos: 19.42.26 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Beschreibung Messerwechsel Messerschnellverschluss @ 0\mod_1197271100500_78.doc @ 16616

2 3 4

Pos: 19.42.27 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

5

EC-251-0

Fig. 328

Note

Clean the area.

Remove damaged or worn blades.

Push the special tool (1) {blade key} between the cutter disc (4) and leaf spring (3) and press down with one hand.

Guide a new blade (2) onto the retaining bolt and allow the blade key to return upwards.

After fitting the blades, fold the protective device down again.

The cutter blades of anticlockwise rotating cutting discs / blade drums are different than those of clockwise rotating ones. Make certain the direction of rotation is correct when installing!

The arrow on the cutter blades must match the direction of rotation of the corresponding cutting discs / blade drums.

The hex nut (4) used to secure the retaining bolts must not be used more than once.

Order No. for clockwise rotating blade: 139-889

Order No. for anticlockwise rotating blade: 139-888

386

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 19.42.28 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Stoßkanten erneuern @ 0\mod_1197271320468_78.doc @ 16636

15.21 Replacing the linings

Caution! - If the linings are checked irregularly.

Effect: Damage to the machine

• Always check the mowing unit for damaged linings prior to start-up and replace linings, if necessary!

• Adjust the welding current and the welding material to the cutter bar material and to the lining or carry out a trial welding if necessary.•

EC-0-012

Fig. 329

Open the welding seams of the old lining.

Remove the lining

Deburr the contact surface.

Pos: 19.43 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

EC-252-0

Fig. 330

Adapt the new lining (3).

Weld short I seams on the upper surface of the cutter bar in the areas marked (1) (each should be approx. 30 mm).

• Do not weld the edges (2).

• On of the cutter bar, weld the lining (3) to the cutter bar along the whole length in area (5).

• Do not weld the edges (4).

387

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 19.44 /BA/Diese Seite ist bewusst freigelassen worden. @ 1\mod_1201783680373_78.doc @ 54443

Pos: 19.46.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Kreiselnabe mit Schersicherung @ 0\mod_1197272352468_78.doc @ 16655

15.22 Rotary hub with shear protection

Pos: 19.46.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Schnell rotierende Messerteller/Messertrommeln_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.doc @ 16001

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!

Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

Pos: 19.46.3 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Beschreibung Schersicherung @ 6\mod_1214562895570_78.doc @ 95092

BiG M CV 4 b

2

3

1 a

20 030 790 0 20 030 789 0

BiG M CRI

2

3

1

20 030 788 0

4 b a

20 030 787 0

Pos: 19.46.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BM 400 0141

Fig. 331

For protection against overload on the mowing units, the rotary hubs (1) are secured with nuts

(2) and shear pins (3).

If the machine strikes obstacles (for example stones), the 2 shear pins in the rotary hub will be sheared off. The rotary hub and nut turn upward on the pinion shaft.

The cutting discs or drums which move the crop to the left (in direction of travel) have lefthanded threading.

The cutting discs or drums which move the crop to the right (in direction of travel) have right-handed threading.

To distinguish between right-hand (clockwise) rotation (RH) and left-hand (anti-clockwise) rotation (LH), the nuts (2) and pinion shaft (4) for left-hand rotation (LH) have a distinctive grove

(a, b).

Left-handed (LH) nuts (2) have distinctive grooves (a) on the bevel.

Left-handed (LH) pinion shafts (4) have a distinctive groove (b) on the face.

388

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 19.46.5 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Schersicherung/Hinweis Fortsetzen der Arbeit nach Ansprechen der Schersicherung BiG M 400 @ 4\mod_1211949254297_78.doc @ 84056

Note - Continuation of work.

To be able to work again as quickly as possible after a shear fuse engages, you should order two left and two right bearing units from your dealer.

BiG M CV

BiG M CRI

Bearing housing, left

Order No. 20 030 789 0

Order No. 20 030 787 0

Bearing housing, right

Order No. 20 030 790 0

Order No. 20 030 788 0

Pos: 19.46.6 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Schersicherung/Nach dem Abscheren @ 4\mod_1211951454110_78.doc @ 84095

15.22.1 After Shearing Off

Caution! - Correct installation position of the bearing housing not observed.

Effect: Damage to the machine

Right-hand (RH) cutting discs and drums always have right-handed pinion shafts and nuts (no groove mark on the pinion shaft and nut).

Left-hand (LH) cutting discs and drums always have left-handed pinion shafts and nuts

(with groove mark on the pinion shaft and nut).

Remove the cutting disc or drum.

Completely remove the sheared off bearing housing.

Install the replacement bearing housing after the cutter disc (BM 400 0141) is set up

Install the cutting disc or mower drum.

Pos: 19.46.7 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

389

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 19.46.8 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Schersicherung/Reparatur der abgescherten Lagereinheit @ 4\mod_1211954689922_78.doc @ 84138

15.22.2 Repairing the Sheared Off Bearing Unit

7

8 a

9

2

3

3

4 d b

1

10 c

Pos: 20 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BM 400 0170

Fig. 332

Remove retaining ring (7).

Unscrew the hexagon head bolt (8).

Use the special key (10) included with delivery to remove the nut (2).

Remove the hub (1).

Remove the damaged shear pins (3).

Check the nut and hub for damage.

Fill the space above the taper roller bearing with grease (c).

Place the hub on the pinion shaft.

Drive the new shear pins (3) through the hub (1) and shaft (4).

Note - Note the position of the shear pins!

Drive the shear pins (3) into the hole from outside until the end of the pin reaches the surface of the hub (d).

The slots of the shear pins (3) must be mounted facing each other horizontally (see detail

(I)).

Install the nut (2) using the special key (10) included with delivery (tighten to a tightening torque of 300 Nm).

Install and tighten the hexagon head bolts (8) with detent edges.

Install the retaining ring (7).

390

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 21.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Wartung - Grundmaschine @ 0\mod_1197277779213_78.doc @ 16847

16 Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 21.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Unvorhergesehene Aktionen an der Maschine_2 @ 0\mod_1197278033978_78.doc @ 16866

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing any repairs, maintenance or cleaning. Remove the ignition key!

• Maintenance and repair work on safety-related components such as steering or brakes must only be performed by authorised workshops.

Pos: 21.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Bremsen @ 0\mod_1197278385463_78.doc @ 16886

16.1 Brakes

Pos: 21.4 /BA/Sicherheit/Bremsen/Bremsen nicht in Ordnung @ 0\mod_1197279276510_78.doc @ 17044

Danger! - Problem with brakes

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

The brake function must be checked before the start of every trip.

The footbrake must take effect beginning with the first third of pedal travel.

Check the brake linings regularly.

Adjustment and repair work on the brake system must only be performed by professional workshops or recognised brake services!

Pos: 21.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

391

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 21.6 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/Hydraulikanlage @ 0\mod_1197278455041_78.doc @ 16905

Pos: 21.7 /BA/Sicherheit/Hydraulik/Arbeiten an der Hydraulikanlage @ 0\mod_1197279394885_78.doc @ 17063

Danger! - Caution with leaking lines

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

When searching for leaks, use suitable aids, always use suitable tools and wear protective goggles to avoid the risk of injury!

Escaping high-pressure fluids can penetrate the skin and cause serious injury. Therefore, you must depressurise the system before disconnecting lines.

Hydraulic oil escaping from a small opening can barely be seen. Because of this you should use a piece of cardboard or something similar when searching for leaks. Protect your hands and body.

If any fluid penetrates the skin, it must be removed immediately by a doctor who is familiar with this kind of injury; serious infections could otherwise result. Physicians who are not familiar with this area should consult appropriate information from a competent medical source.

Check the hydraulic hose lines at regular intervals and replace them if damaged or worn!

The replacement lines must comply with the requirements of the device manufacturer.

Ensure that all line connections are tight before the pressure in the system builds up again.

Repair work on the hydraulic system must only be performed by authorised KRONE professional workshops.

Pos: 21.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

392

Pos: 21.9 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Wartungstabellen/Wartungstabelle - Grundmaschine BM 400/420 @ 13\mod_1226400278711_78.doc @ 165627

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Maintenance interval

Hydraulic system

Hydraulic oil level check

Changing the hydraulic oil

Replacing the hydraulic oil filter

Transfer gearbox

Oil level check

Cabin

Replace fresh air filter

Clean fresh air filter

Replace circulation filter

Clean circulation filter

Windshield wiper system

Pilot lamp test

Light function test

Check the foot brake setting.

Readjust parking brake Bowden cable if necessary.

Air conditioning system/heating

Collector/drier

Refrigerant condition and filling quantity

Checking capacitor

X

X

X

X X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

393

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Maintenance interval

Belt drives

Fan wheel drive

Drive for outrigger arms

Drive for lateral mowing units

Cross Conveyor Drive

Tyre

Check tyres for cuts and breaks visually

Inspect tyre air pressure visually

Measure tyre air pressure with instrument: weekly

Tighten wheel nuts for front/rear wheel to 630 Nm

(466 lb-ft).

Tighten bolts

Tighten the fastening screws of the guide cylinder anchor on the rear axle.

Tighten the fastening screws of the guide cylinder anchor on the wheel hubs.

Tighten the fastening screws on the track rod.

Tighten attachment bolts of outriggers on the frame.

Check pressure filter (every 1500 h)

Steering pump pressure filter

Pressure filter, leakage oil pipe for wheel motors

Work pump pressure filter

Supply pump pressure filter

Battery

Check the acid density of the battery; charge the battery, if and when necessary, and top up with distilled water.

Pos: 21.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X X

X X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

394

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 21.11 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Systemaufbau Arbeits- und Bremshydraulik Big M 420 @ 52\mod_1289463554046_78.doc @ 504352

16.3 Maintenance - hydraulic system

16.3.1 System Description Operating and Brake Hydraulics

Hydraulics – open circuits

Steering hydraulics pump 16 cm

3

/rev

Work hydraulics pump

27 cm

3

/rev

Brake Hydraulics

Priority

Implements

Parking Brake

Operating Brake

Lifting mechanism

Belt tension

Pos: 21.12 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Pumpen Big M 420 @ 57\mod_1295941050328_78.doc @ 548156

16.3.2 Pumps

2 1

Suspension

Pos: 21.13 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig.333

1. Brake and work hydraulics

2. Steering pump

BM 420 0034

395

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 21.14 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Hauptblock @ 0\mod_1197292256400_78.doc @ 17161

16.3.3 Main block

3

Y26

Y19 Y27

1

2

Y25

Y23 Y21

Y16

Y9

Y10

Y8

Y7

Y6

BM 400 0221

Pos: 21.15 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 334

NO. Designation

2

3

Drive pressure control

Master control valve pressure control

Y6 Switching to front axle

Y7 Switching to rear axle

Y8 Front drive

Y9 Right drive

Y10 Left drive

Y11 Parking Brake

Y15 Lift suspension

Y16 Lower suspension

Y19 Main valve

Y20 Lift front

Y21 Lower front

Y22 Lift right

Y23 Lower right

Y24 Lift left

Y25 Lower left

Y26 Push off left

Y27 Push off right

396

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 21.16 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Überdruckventile @ 0\mod_1197295754025_78.doc @ 17180

16.3.4 Over-pressure valves

Pos: 21.17 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/Einstellbare Drosseln @ 0\mod_1197295918463_78.doc @ 17218

Note

Over-pressure valves set in the factory

Work on the over-pressure valve must be carried out only by the customer service department.

The valve blocks have been equipped with pressure control valves. These valves were set at the factory and must not be changed.

Pos: 21.18 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Frontmähwerk Zuschaltgeschwindigkeit @ 13\mod_1225784997962_78.doc @ 163013

Speed of moving the front mowing unit into operating position

1

Pos: 21.19 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BMII-364_1

Fig. 335

The adjustable throttle (1) to set the speed to move the front mowing unit is located next to the hydraulic tank, on the left-hand side in direction of travel.

397

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 21.20 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/Hydrauliköl @ 0\mod_1197296812478_78.doc @ 17265

Pos: 21.21 /BA/Sicherheit/Module Achtung/Niemals verschiedene Öle mischen @ 0\mod_1197297008369_78.doc @ 17285

Caution!

Never mix different oils.

• Before changing types of oil please consult our Customer Service.

Never use engine oil.

Pos: 21.22 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Aufstellung von Mineralölen für die Hydraulikanlage @ 0\mod_1197297399525_78.doc @ 17323

16.4.1 List of Mineral Oils for the Hydraulic System

List of mineral oils of quality class HLP (HM) and environmentally friendly HEPG pressure fluids that decompose quickly.

Pos: 21.23 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Aufstellungs_Tabelle von Mineralölen @ 0\mod_1197297178806_78.doc @ 17304

ISO viscosity class

HEPG VG 46

HLP VG 46 ISO viscosity class

HEPG VG 46 HLP VG 46

ADDINOL

AGIP

HLP 46

OSO 46 FUCHS

TR

46

Renolin PGE

46

RENOLIN

MR 15

VG 46

RENOLIN

B15

VG 46

ARAL BAF 46Vitam Aral Vitam GF

4

Houghton

ASEOL Aqua VG 46

46 46

Avia Fluid ZAD

46

KLÜBER

KUWAIT

BP

46

Biohyd PEG 46

CASTROL

Energol HLP

46

LIQUI

MOLY

Mobil

AWS SHELL

HLP 46 ISO

Mobil DTE 25

Mobil

Hydraulic

Oil Medium

Fluid BD 46 Shell Tellus

46

LAMORA HLP

46

Q8

Haydn 46

Holst 46

Hydraulic S46

COFRAN

DEA Econa PG 46

ELF

46 S

Astron HLP 46

Theunissen

TOTAL

Hydrocor E46

ISOCOR E46

Oil 46

Shell Hydrol

DO 46

Cofraline extra 46 S

Azolla ZS 46

ELFOLNA DS

46

Tribol ET 1140-

46

Tribol 943 AW

46

ENGEN Engen

TQH 20/46

ESSO Hydraulic NUTO H 46

46

VERKOL

46

Vesta HLP 46

D3031.46 HYDRAN 46

WINTERSHALL WIOLAN HS 46

WIOLAN HX 4

Pos: 21.24 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

398

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 21.25 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/Hydraulikölstand @ 0\mod_1197297631728_78.doc @ 17342

16.5 Hydraulic oil level

Pos: 21.26 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Unvorhergesehene Aktionen an der Maschine_2 @ 0\mod_1197297750885_78.doc @ 17361

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

Pos: 21.27 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Hydrauliköltank Kontrolle_Wechsel BM 400 @ 13\mod_1225787591212_78.doc @ 163063

When working on the hydraulic system, always switch off the engine.

Remove the ignition key

Secure the machine against rolling (parking brake, wheel chocks)

2

1

3

BM 400 0165_1

Fig. 336

Before checking oil level:

• Park the machine horizontally

• Lower all mowing units and switch off the engine.

Oil level check:

Time interval: Daily

The oil must be visible in the inspection window (1).

Refill oil if necessary (2)

Oil change:

Time intervals: every 500 hours or when the filter warning indicator lights, but at least once a year

Drain oil with suitable hose via plug-in connection (3)

Collect the used oil in a suitable collection vessel.

Top up the oil (2)

Oil level (oil must be visible in inspection window (1)).

Pos: 21.28 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.doc @ 15550

Capacity: approx. 80 l (approx. 21 U.S. gal)

Note

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

Pos: 21.29 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

399

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 21.30 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Hydraulikölfilter ersetzen BM 400 @ 13\mod_1225788077446_78.doc @ 163114

16.6 Replacing the hydraulic oil filter

2

1

3

Pos: 21.31 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BM 400 0218_1

Fig. 337

Note

Ensure total cleanliness when changing the filter

Properly dispose of filter cartridge that was removed

• Replace the filter element (3) the first time after 50 operating hours, then every 500 operating hours or after each mowing season (at the same time as changing the hydraulic oil).

Release the filter (2) and unscrew it from its holding.

Replace the filter with a new filter.

Screw on new filter as follows:

• Moisten the sealing surface of the filter with oil.

Once the filter seal touches the sealing surface of the filter housing, tighten the filter manually making a 3/4 to 1-1/4 turn. Do not over tighten.

Check the filter for leaks while the engine is running and tighten if necessary.

400

Pos: 21.32 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/Verteilergetriebe @ 2\mod_1202991526780_78.doc @ 64104

Pos: 21.33 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Verteilergetriebe BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197298717806_78.doc @ 17418

Maintenance – Basic Machine

3

1

Pos: 21.34 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BMII-203

Fig. 338

Note

Use only gearbox oil (synthetic DIN 51502-PGLP) and dispose of used oil properly.

Oil level check:

• Time interval: before every use

• Unscrew the inspection screw (2)

• Oil level up to bore hole

If necessary, top up oil (synthetic DIN 51502-PGLP)

Screw the check screw (2) back in.

Oil change:

Change the oil after the first 30 to 50 operating hours. Thereafter, ever 500 hours (but at least once a year)

Screw out the screw plug (3).

Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan

Screw in the screw plug (3)

Top up the oil (1) (oil level up to hole (2))

Capacity: 6,0 l

401

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 21.35 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Luftansaugung und -Verteilung @ 0\mod_1197299076041_78.doc @ 17457

16.8 Air intake and distribution

BMII-217

Fig. 339

BMII-216

Pos: 21.36 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 340

402

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 21.37 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frischluftfilter @ 52\mod_1289402342234_78.doc @ 504132

16.8.1 Changing / cleaning the fresh air filter

Pos: 21.38 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Frischluftfilter defekt oder falsch eingebaut WARNUNG @ 52\mod_1289402772703_78.doc @ 504186

WARNING! – Fresh air filter faulty or incorrectly installed

Dust gets into the cab, is inhaled, and causes health damage.

Pos: 21.39 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Frischluftfilter Bild BM420/500/BigX @ 52\mod_1289403600296_78.doc @ 504239

Make certain the filter is seated to form a seal.

Replace faulty fresh air filters immediately.

2 1

3

BM 420 0023

Pos: 21.40 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Frischluftfilter text @ 52\mod_1289402494625_78.doc @ 504159

Fig.341

A fresh air filter (3) in the form of a wedge filter cell is located in the upper cab area behind the gill screen (2) on the left hand side in direction of travel. This filter (3) protects the driver in the cab against dust or airborne dirt, which is outside the cab. Check the filter for soiling prior to any operation.

Note

If filters are not properly maintained they may become very soiled, no longer ensuring that sufficient fresh air is passed into the cab.

• Open the closing device (1) by turning 90° clockwise.

• Pull out the gill screen (2); check the wedge filter cell (3) for soiling and, if required, clean.

Shake out the filter (3); never use compressed air. In case of severe soiling, the filter (3) has to be replaced.

Pos: 21.41 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

403

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 21.42 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Umluftsieb @ 0\mod_1197299889400_78.doc @ 17546

16.8.2 Circulation filter

Pos: 21.43 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BX200550

Fig. 342

Note

If the circulating air filter (1) is very dirty, the output of the air conditioning system may be reduced and it may heat up.

• Clean the circulating air filter (1) regularly.

404

Pos: 21.44 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Scheibenwaschanlage @ 0\mod_1197300179760_78.doc @ 17565

16.9 Windscreen washer system

Pos: 21.45 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Scheibenwaschanlage Bild Big M 420 @ 57\mod_1295866083890_78.doc @ 547696

2

Maintenance – Basic Machine

1

BM 420 0029

Pos: 21.46 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Scheibenwaschanlage auffüllen @ 0\mod_1197300671119_78.doc @ 17605

Fig. 343

Check the level of the windscreen washer system daily. Refill the reservoir if necessary.

• To fill the windscreen washer container (1) open cover (2).

Note

To achieve better cleaning effect under extreme crop and road conditions, add windshield cleaner/antifreeze. In winter empty the washer unit or fill with special frost protection agent.

Pos: 21.47 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

405

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 21.48.1 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Sensoren/Lage der Sensoren RH @ 35\mod_1256740088428_78.doc @ 327404

16.10 Position of Sensors (Right-Hand Side of the Machine)

6

3 1

14

5

9

7

10

13

2

4

12

11

BM4000231_1

Fig. 344

406

Item Sensor designation

1 Air filter contamination

2 Filling level, fuel

3 Suction return air filter

4 Service brake

5 Mowing unit lock right

6 Spring compensation with two cylinders

7 Flush valve temperature

9 Auger speed

10 Cutting height, right mower

11 Front mowing unit speed

12 Position of axle suspension

13 Cutting height of front mower

14 Position of mowing arm

Pos: 21.48.2 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Sensoren/Lage der Sensoren LH @ 35\mod_1256739593146_78.doc @ 327349

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Sensor type

Negative pressure switch

Dipstick sensor

Manometric switch

Pressure sensor

Namur sensor

Pressure sensor

Temperature switch

Namur sensor

Rotation angle potentiometer

Namur sensor

Namur sensor

Path measurement

Namur sensor

(optional)

Tightening torque

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

(optional)

(optional)

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

407

Maintenance – Basic Machine

16.11 Position of sensors (left side of machine)

Fig. 345:

408

5

8

Pos.

Sensor designation

Mowing unit lock left

Pressure sensor driving hydraulics

10

12

Switch service brake

Brake tank pressure

Sensor type

Namur sensor

Pressure sensor

Namur sensor

Manometric switch

Manometric switch

14

15

16

17

- air conditioning system

Feedback - drive pumps

Position of mowing arm

Speed of auger drive

Speed of lateral mowing unit drive

Cutting height of left mower

Captive washer potentiometer

Namur sensor

Namur sensor

Namur sensor

18

19

21

Charge pressure

Hydraulic oil tank level

Pos: 21.48.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/Einstellung der Sensoren @ 0\mod_1199962173428_78.doc @ 37635

16.11.1

Pos: 21.48.4 /BA/Wartung/Sensoren/Namursensor d = 12 mm BM 400 @ 35\mod_1258362555125_78.doc @ 335159

Adjusting the Sensors

16.11.1.1 Namur sensor d = 12 mm

Rotation angle potentiometer

Manometric switch

Level sensor

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Tightening torque

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

10 Nm (a= 2mm)

Optional

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

Optional

3

Pos: 21.49 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

1 a

2

BP-VFS-088-1

Fig. 346

The dimension “a” between the encoder (2) and the sensor (1) must be set differently according to function (see table “Position of the sensors”)

Setting

Loosen the nuts on either side of the sensor

Turn the nuts until dimension "a" (see table “Position of the sensors”) is reached

Tighten the nuts again

409

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 21.50.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/Wartung Klimaanlage und Heizung @ 0\mod_1197301016697_78.doc @ 17643

16.12

Pos: 21.50.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Spezielle Sicherheitshinweise @ 0\mod_1196660495760_78.doc @ 9134

Maintenance - air conditioning system and heating

16.13

Pos: 21.50.3 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Berührung von Kältemittel @ 0\mod_1197301139072_78.doc @ 17682

Special Safety Instructions

Warning! - Contact with refrigerant

Pos: 21.50.4 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Klimaanlage/Komponenten der Klimaanlage @ 0\mod_1197301531697_78.doc @ 17701

Effect: Injuries

• In case of repair, maintenance and cleaning work on the refrigerant circuit, refrigerant emissions may occur; these emissions may be liquid or gaseous and are a hazard for man and the environment. Take suitable protective measures (wear protective goggles and protective gloves).

Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back.

Repair, upkeep, maintenance and cleaning work must be carried out only by authorised specialists.

In the case of refrigerant burns, always seek medical attention. Bring the datasheet to present to a physician (see Chapter "Refrigerant Data Sheet R 134a (excerpt)).

Ensure sufficient ventilation when working on the refrigerating system.

During refill and repair do not allow refrigerants to escape; dispose of them into a recycling container.

Spare parts that are used must correspond to the technical requirements of the machine manufacturer. For this reason, use KRONE original spare parts only.

Extreme caution is advised when welding close to the air conditioning system

16.13.1 Air conditioning components

A Compressor on engine at the left-hand side of the vehicle, driven via V-belt

B Capacitor behind the radiator unit, accessible from the left and right

C Dryer/collector behind the radiator unit at the left-hand side of the vehicle

D Evaporator in the cab roof

E Manometric switch on drier, behind the radiator unit at the left-hand side of the vehicle

F Expansion valve at the evaporator inlet

G Air conditioning system/heating rotary switch in cab, roof panel

Pos: 21.50.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

410

Pos: 21.50.6 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Klimaanlage/Kältemitteldatenblatt R 134a (Auszug) @ 0\mod_1197351117948_78.doc @ 17726

16.13.2 Refrigerant data sheet R 134a (excerpt)

Refrigerant R 134a:

Chemical designation:

Chemical formula:

Molecular weight:

Boiling point (at 1.013 bar):

Freezing point:

Critical temperature:

Critical pressure:

Density (liquid at +25° Celsius):

Flammability limits

Environmental data

FKW 134a:

ODP - Ozonolysis potential

CLP - Chlorine load potential

Pos: 21.50.7 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Klimaanlage/Technische Daten @ 0\mod_1197351532839_78.doc @ 17745

HGWP - Greenhouse effect

PCR - Photochemical reactivity

Maintenance – Basic Machine

1,1,1,2-tetrafluorethane

CH

2

F CF

102.0 g/mol

-26.1°C

-101.0°C

-101.1°C

40.60 bar

1.206 kg/m

3 in air - not flammable

ODP = 0

CLP = 0

3

HGWP = 0.26

PCR = 0.5

Pos: 21.50.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Technical Data

Component

Evaporator

Heater

Fan

Voltage

Current consumption

Refrigerant

Performance data

Refrigerating capacity* 5;200 Watt*

Heating capacity 4;000 Watt

1000 m 3 /h free blowing

12 Volt

15 amperes

R 134a (CFC free)

* measured at +30° Celsius ambient temperature (data rendered by the manufacturer)

411

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 21.50.9 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Klimaanlage/Kältemittel BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197352311855_78.doc @ 17764

16.13.4 Refrigerant

Pos: 21.50.10 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Klimaanlage/Druckschalter @ 0\mod_1197352444386_78.doc @ 17783

Note

The air conditioning system is operated with 2000 g of refrigerant R134a

(tetrafluoroethane). This substance does not contain any chlorine atoms, and thus is inoffensive to the ozone in the atmosphere of the world.

Nonetheless, the refrigerant must not be drained; it must be collected at a recycling plant.

For this reason do not sever any connecting pipes. Have maintenance and repair work on the air conditioning system carried out only by your Krone dealer with a suitable disposal and recycling equipment.

Pos: 21.50.11 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 347:

Note

When the fan speed is at the highest still pleasant performance, set the cooling performance of the air conditioning system to an average value. Let the air conditioning system not operate at the lowest fan speed and highest cooling performance.

The air conditioning system has been fitted with a manometric switch (1) which shuts down the system in case of excess pressure or negative pressure (on the dryer behind the combined radiator on the left hand side in direction of travel).

412

Pos: 21.50.12 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Klimaanlage/Sammler / Trockner @ 0\mod_1197352605245_78.doc @ 17844

16.13.6 Collector/drier

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 21.50.13 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BMII-134

Fig. 348:

Since the refrigerant collector is pressurised, it is subject to the pressurised container regulations during production and testing.

According to this regulation the pressurised tank is classified as test group II in accordance with the permissible overpressure p in bar, the volume l in litres and the pressure product p x l.

According to Section 10 of the Pressurised Vessel Regulations these pressurised containers must be subjected to recurring tests by an expert in accordance with section 32. In this case the recurring tests consist, as a rule, of external inspections of the tank in use. In combination with the inspection the refrigerant collector must be subjected to a visual inspection twice a year.

Special attention shall be given to corrosion and mechanical damage. If the container is not in a correct state, for safety reasons it must be replaced to ensure sufficient protection to the user and third parties due to the hazard which may be caused in handling or operating pressurised containers.

Note

The ambient temperature must exceed the temperature set at the thermostat (generally +1°

Celsius) for the compressor to switch on.

413

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 21.50.14 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Klimaanlage/Kältemittelzustand und die Füllmenge prüfen @ 0\mod_1197353140558_78.doc @ 17863

16.13.7 Checking refrigerant condition and level

Pos: 21.50.15 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 349

Note

The quantity of refrigerant is checked using the white ball float.

Loss of refrigerant through hoses in the air conditioning system is unavoidable. Check the refrigerant level every 200 hours. Check the window (2) of the drier (1) with the engine running and with the air conditioning system switched on (set to highest cooling action).

If the white float (5) is at the top, the volume of refrigerant is okay.

If the white float (5) is at the bottom, the refrigerant must be topped up (specialist workshop).

Note

Humidity saturation is checked using the orange indicator pearl.

Moisture in the coolant circuit is collected in the filter desiccator.

If the indicator pearl (3) is orange, the degree of moisture is okay.

If the indicator pearl (3) has turned colourless, the collector unit of the drier must be replaced (specialist workshop).

Note

Observe the instructions on the label (4) on the dryer (1).

414

Pos: 21.50.16 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Klimaanlage/Kondensator prüfen BM 420 @ 57\mod_1295866865734_78.doc @ 547752

16.14 Checking the capacitor

4 2

Maintenance – Basic Machine b

3

1

Pos: 21.51 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

5 a

BM 420 0030

Fig.350

Warning! - Unintentional opening of the rear hood

Effect: Injuries or damage to the machine

Make certain before start-up that the rear hood is properly locked.

Keep the capacitor and radiator compartment clean at all times.

To do this:

Open the rear hood (1)

Open the rear side guard (4)

Remove the cover (5)

Clean dirt from the area (a) in front of the adjustment plate (2)

Clean the adjustment plate (2) with compressed air

Clean dirt from the radiator compartment (a) in front of the capacitor

Clean the condenser block (3) depending on its degree of soiling, but at least once every month.

Blow through the condenser block with compressed air from the inside to the outside, making sure that the fins are not damaged

Set the cover (5) in place

After cleaning close the rear hood (1) and the rear side guards (4)

415

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 21.52.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Riementriebe @ 0\mod_1197276279135_78.doc @ 16733

16.15 Belt drives

Pos: 21.52.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Unvorhergesehene Aktionen an der Maschine_3 @ 0\mod_1197353885870_78.doc @ 17920

Pos: 21.52.3 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Durchrutschende Riementriebe @ 0\mod_1197354754964_78.doc @ 17940

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing any repairs, maintenance or cleaning. Remove the ignition key!

Caution! - Slipping belt drives

Pos: 21.52.4 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbstfahrer/Riemen allgemein @ 13\mod_1226488106287_78.doc @ 165850

Effect: Danger of fire

• The build-up of dust, oil and grass inside the engine compartment is combustible and presents an increased fire hazard .

• Keep the engine and the engine compartment clean at all times.

Retighten or replace slipping belt drives immediately.

Note

Keep all belts at good tension constantly.

Clean dirty belts with caustic cleaning fluid. Do not use petrol or similar products for cleaning.

Check the tension of new belts after the first 10 operating hours and retension if necessary.

Pos: 21.52.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

416

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 21.52.6 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbstfahrer/Voraussetzung Riementriebe prüfen_korrigieren @ 0\mod_1197353671339_78.doc @ 17959

Note

Check the V-belt tension and condition of all belt drives after the first 10, 50 hours of operation and thereafter every 200 operating hours.

• Replace damaged or worn V-belts.

Pos: 21.52.7 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbstfahrer/Antrieb Lüfterrad BM 420 @ 58\mod_1296477461459_78.doc @ 551376

Prerequisite:

Lower the mowing unit into working position

Switching off the engine

Remove the ignition key

Secure the machine against rolling (parking brake, wheel chocks)

1

2 a 3

BM 420 0037

Fig. 351:

Check belt tension

Length of spring under tension a = approx. 155 mm

Correcting the belt tension:

Pos: 21.52.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

155 mm is set.

To replace belt (1):

• Relieve the spring (2) in the tension roller (3).

• Remove belt (1).

• The belt pulley (4) must be exactly aligned.

• If necessary, adjust the belt pulleys (4) with the screws (5).

• Set a new belt in place and tension the spring in the tension roller a = 155 mm

Note

Make sure the fan blade is in a central position in the radiator cover.

417

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 21.52.9 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbstfahrer/Auslegerarme @ 12\mod_1225198179100_78.doc @ 154214

16.15.2 Outrigger arms

Pos: 21.52.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165 a a

SFM1-450

SFM1-460

Abb. 352

Outrigger right / left

Check belt tension

Length of spring under tension a = approx. 87 mm

Correcting the belt tension:

• Increase or reduce the spring tension of the tension spring (2) until distance a= about 87 mm is set.

Note

Tighten the left and right tensioning system only until the distance tube makes contact in the spring. (Do not overstretch!)

418

Pos: 21.52.11 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbstfahrer/Riemen der Auslegerarme ersetzen @ 0\mod_1197357554355_78.doc @ 18037

Replace the belt on the outrigger.

1

Maintenance – Basic Machine

3

4

2

Pos: 21.52.12 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 353

Remove the belt covers.

Relieve the springs (1) in the tension rollers.

Note

Remove the cover plate (3) on the right side.

Loosen the lubrication lines (2).

Replace the belt (4) and check to make certain it is correctly seated.

Tighten the springs (1) to a length of 90 mm.

Install the cover plate (3) on the right side.

Install the belt covers.

BM 400 0167

419

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 21.52.13 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbstfahrer/Antriebsriemen Mähwerk @ 0\mod_1197357675011_78.doc @ 18056

16.15.3 Drive of mowing unit

BMII-218

Fig. 354

• The belt tension is produced using the hydraulic cylinder (pressure 50 bar). Reset the single-acting cylinder using the springs.

Replace the lateral mowing unit V-belt

1

2

1

1

2

1

2

BM202340

Pos: 21.52.14 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbstfahrer/Antrrieb Querförderer @ 13\mod_1226401985570_78.doc @ 165677

Fig. 355

Remove the attachment bolts (1) of the belt covers (2) on both sides.

Remove the belt covers (2).

Replace the belt and check to make certain it is correctly seated.

Install the belt covers (2) again.

420

16.15.4 Cross Conveyor Drive

8

Maintenance – Basic Machine

1

2

Pos: 21.53 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

6 7 3 5 4 6

BM 400 0230

Fig. 356

Check belt tension

Length of spring under tension a = approx. 80 mm

Correcting the belt tension:

Remove the guard (1)

Increase or reduce the spring tension of the tension spring (2) until distance a = approx.

80 mm is set.

Install the guard (1) •

To replace belt (3):

Remove the guard (1)

Remove the protective strut (7) and sensor holder (8).

Use the mounting lever (4) to raise the idler pulley (5).

Remove the old belt (3).

Place the new belt (3) onto the pulleys (6).

Lower the idler pulley (5) slowly and withdraw the mounting lever (4).

With the V-belt under tension, dimension a must be equal to approx. 80 mm. Correct the belt tension as necessary

Install the protective strut (7) and sensor holder (8).

Install the guard (1)

421

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 21.54.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Reifen @ 0\mod_1197357995667_78.doc @ 18075

16.16 Tyres

Pos: 21.54.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Falsche Reifenmontage @ 0\mod_1197358162433_78.doc @ 18132

Warning! - Tyre fitting incorrect

Effect: Injuries or damage to the machine

Fitting tyres requires sufficient knowledge and the availability of proper tools!

If tyres are not correctly fitted, it could explode when pumped up. This can cause serious injury. If you do not have sufficient experience of fitting tyres, have tyres fitted by the

KRONE dealer or a qualified tyre specialist.

When fitting tyres on the wheel rims, the maximum pressure given by the tyre manufacturer must not be exceeded. The tyre or even the wheel rim could explode and/or burst.

If the tyre heels do not fit properly when the maximum permitted pressure is reached, let out the air, align tyres, lubricate the tyre heels and pump up the tyre again.

Detailed information about how to fit tyres onto agricultural machinery can be obtained from the tyre manufacturers.

Pos: 21.54.3 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

422

Pos: 21.54.4 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Reifen prüfen und pflegen @ 0\mod_1197358037214_78.doc @ 18094

16.16.1

Pos: 21.54.5 /BA/Wartung/Reifen/Reifen prüfen Bild Big M 400 @ 41\mod_1272004363611_78.doc @ 374596

Checking and maintaining tyres

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 21.54.6 /BA/Wartung/Reifen/Reifen prüfen Big M 400 Text @ 0\mod_1197358379792_78.doc @ 18172

Fig. 357

Check the tyres for damage and air pressure every day as the service life of tyres depends on the air pressure.

Repair any cuts or tears in the tyres as soon as possible or change the tyres.

Do not expose tyres to oil, grease, fuel, or chemicals; nor should you let them stand in the sunlight for long periods.

Drive carefully; avoid driving over sharp stones or edges.

Use a precisely working tyre gauge to check the tyre pressure at least once a week (see chapter entitled "Technical Data").

Note

Never operate the machine at the tyre pressure usual for transport of the tyres. Keep the valve caps fitted on the valves to keep dirt out. Check the tyre pressure frequently!

Pos: 21.54.7 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

423

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 21.54.8 /BA/Wartung/Reifen/Radbefestigung @ 0\mod_1197359014933_78.doc @ 18210

16.16.2 Wheel mounting

630 Nm

BM 400 0256

Fig. 358:

Tighten the wheel nuts after the first and then every 20 to 25 operating hours to a torque of 630

Nm.

Pos: 21.55 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Befestigungsschrauben am Ausleger nachziehen BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197386860573_78.doc @ 20209

16.16.3 Retightening the Attachment Bolts on the Outrigger

1

Pos: 22 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BMII-365

Fig. 359:

• Retighten (annually) the four fastening bolts (1) on the frame arms to a tightening torque of 640 Nm.

424

Pos: 23.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Wartung - Schmierplan @ 0\mod_1197359304198_78.doc @ 18232

17

Pos: 23.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Abschmieren der Gelenkwelle @ 0\mod_1197359496183_78.doc @ 18251

Maintenance – lubrication chart

17.1 Lubricating the PTO shaft

Pos: 23.3 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Schmierplan/Big M 400/420/500/Abschmieren der Gelenkwelle BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197359557776_78.doc @ 18392

Maintenance – lubrication chart

50h

50h 50h

50h

20h

BM 400 0211

Fig. 360

All other grease nipples on the PTO shafts must be lubricated as shown in the illustration.

Pos: 23.4 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Schmierplan/Big M 400/420/500/Abschmieren der Doppelgelenke am Hauptgetriebe @ 0\mod_1197360015073_78.doc @ 18473

17.2 Lubricating the double joints on the main gearbox

2x

30h

Pos: 23.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BMII-328

Fig. 361:

All other grease nipples on the double joints must be lubricated as shown in the illustration to the side.

Note

The lateral mowing units must be moved into the transport position first when using hydraulic auger hoods.

425

Maintenance – lubrication chart

Pos: 23.6 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Schmierplan @ 0\mod_1197361829026_78.doc @ 18495

17.3

Pos: 23.7 /Abkürzungen /Abkürzungen sprachneutral/CV @ 0\mod_1197361944355_0.doc @ 18533

Lubrication Chart

(CV)

Pos: 23.8 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Schmierplan/Big M 400/420/500/Schmierplan BM 400 CV @ 0\mod_1197361999480_78.doc @ 18552

8

2

3

8

2

3

1

1 1

7

6

2

1

4

50h

5

30h

50h

7

30h

50h

8

50h

30h

Pos: 24 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 362

1.

Crank for conditioner plate

2.

Double joint (universal joint bracket)

3.

Double joint (main gearbox)

4.

Horizontal PTO shaft (front mowing unit)

5.

Full floating axle

6.

Front outrigger suspension arm

7.

PTO shaft (transfer gearbox/front mowing unit)

8.

Spring compensation cylinder

50h

4

3

1

2x

30h

6

50h

BM 400 0212

426

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 25.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Wartung - Elektrik @ 0\mod_1197362427261_78.doc @ 18572

18 Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 25.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Unvorhergesehene Aktionen an der Maschine_4 @ 0\mod_1197365392761_78.doc @ 18610

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine

Pos: 25.3 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Technische Daten der elektrischen @ 0\mod_1197365664870_78.doc @ 18629

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing any repairs, maintenance or cleaning. Remove the ignition key!

Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

During repair work (welding) always switch off the engine, set main battery switch (1) to pos. II (circuit interrupted) and remove the cable plug from the MR2 control unit on the engine!

18.1 Electrical equipment - technical data

Generator power

Number of batteries

14V /150 A

2

Battery voltage 12V

Battery capacity (2x) 135 Ah

Pos: 25.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

427

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 25.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Batterie @ 0\mod_1197366520558_78.doc @ 18648

18.2 Battery

Pos: 25.6 /BA/Sicherheit/Batterie/Batteriegase sind hochexplosiv Version 1 @ 0\mod_1197366598276_78.doc @ 18667

Pos: 25.7 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterien Big M 400 Bild @ 41\mod_1271913925381_78.doc @ 373655

Danger! - Battery gases are highly explosive

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

Batteries develop a highly explosive electrolytic gas. Do not allow sparks or naked flames anywhere near the battery.

During repair work (welding work) on the electrical system or engine, always switch the engine off.

Interrupt the electrical power circuit with the main battery switch.

Disconnect the cable plug (2) from the MR2 control unit on the engine!

Note the correct polarity when disconnecting and connecting the battery.

When jump-starting the battery, make certain that only a voltage of 12 V is connected to each battery!

Pos: 25.8 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterien Big M 400/500 Text @ 0\mod_1197367396698_78.doc @ 18749

Fig. 363

The Big M is equipped with two batteries (1) of 12 V (135 Ah) each, which are connected in series (24 V) for starting.

A switching relay (2) is used to switch.

The operating voltage is only 12 V!

Note

Keep the battery clean of dust and chaff.

Pos: 25.9 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

428

Pos: 25.10 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/Batterie-Hauptschalter @ 45\mod_1276841104984_78.doc @ 409039

18.2.1 Main battery switch

Pos: 25.11 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie-Hauptschalter BM 400 Bild @ 49\mod_1287041480828_78.doc @ 464450

Maintenance – electrical system

Fig. 364

Pos: 25.12 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie-Hauptschalter BM 400 Text @ 49\mod_1287041651562_78.doc @ 464476

The main battery switch is used to turn on or interrupt the machine ’s power supply

The main battery switch is on the left rear side as seen in direction of travel

I – Electrical power circuit turned on

Pos: 25.13 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie-Hauptschalter Hinweis @ 49\mod_1287041037031_78.doc @ 464424

II – Electrical power circuit interrupted

Note - Ignition to level 1 or 2

Effect: Battery discharges

The battery is discharging even when the main battery switch interrupts the electrical power circuit. (Position II)).

Before extended times with no usage, disconnect the electrical power circuit with the main battery switch (position II).

Disconnect cables from battery terminal for winter storage (you may wish to charge or discharge the battery).

Pos: 25.14 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

429

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 25.15 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/Batterie aufladen @ 0\mod_1197368701995_78.doc @ 18795

18.2.2

Pos: 25.16 /BA/Sicherheit/Batterie/Batteriegase, Batteriesäure @ 0\mod_1197369332058_78.doc @ 18853

Charging Batteries

Pos: 25.17 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Schnellladung @ 0\mod_1197369592011_78.doc @ 18915

Danger! - Battery gases, battery acid

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

Remove the plastic covers of the battery in order to prevent highly explosive gas from gathering.

Battery acid inside the batteries causes burns on contact with skin and eyes.

Avoid contact with skin, eyes, or clothing.

Wear suitable protective clothing, since battery acid will corrode its way through normal clothing, safety boots and safety goggles.

Rinse away splashed acid immediately with clear water and if appropriate seek medical attention.

18.2.3 Quick charge

Fig. 365:

When quick charging the battery, disconnect the battery negative cable and open all battery cells to avoid damage to the electrical system.

Removing the battery:

Pos: 25.18 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie reinigen @ 0\mod_1197369802542_78.doc @ 18934

Always disconnect the earth cable first and then the positive cable before removing the battery.

18.2.4 Cleaning the battery

• Wipe the battery clean as and when necessary.

• Use a brush to remove any oxidation on the pole terminals.

• Use pole grease on the battery poles and the pole terminals.

• Keep the venting holes of the plugs open.

Pos: 25.19 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

430

Pos: 25.20 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/Batterie prüfen @ 0\mod_1197368742605_78.doc @ 18814

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 25.21 /BA/Sicherheit/Batterie/Batteriesäuren @ 0\mod_1197368825761_78.doc @ 18833

Pos: 25.22 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Säurestand prüfen @ 0\mod_1197369919339_78.doc @ 18953

Danger! - Battery acids

Effect: Chemical burns

Battery acid inside the batteries causes burns on contact with skin and eyes.

Avoid contact with skin, eyes, or clothing.

Wear suitable protective clothing, since battery acid will corrode its way through normal clothing, safety boots and safety goggles.

Rinse away splashed acid immediately with clear water and if appropriate seek medical attention.

If you top up the distilled water during the winter, allow the engine to run for about 30 minutes to ensure a better mixture of water and acid.

Use distilled water only.

18.2.6 Check acid level

Pos: 25.23 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 366:

Check the acid level every 250 operating hours.

• The acid level should be at the mark above the upper plate edge.

Note

Use only properly filled and maintained batteries.

Coat the battery terminals with acid protection grease (terminal grease).

431

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 25.24 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Messen der Säuredichte @ 0\mod_1197370272823_78.doc @ 18972

18.2.7 Measuring Acid Density

Pos: 25.25 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 367:

• Use an acid tester to measure the acid density of each battery cell.

A fully charged battery should have an acid density of 1.28 in normal climatic conditions.

• Recharge the battery, if the density drops below 1.20.

432

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 25.26 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterien einbauen und polrichtig anschließen @ 0\mod_1197370412776_78.doc @ 19054

18.3 Fitting the batteries and connecting the poles correctly

Caution! - Installation of Batteries

Effect: Damages to the machine

• Always connect batteries with the correct polarity

3

1

4

Pos: 25.27 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

2

Fig. 368:

To do this:

Connect the positive cable from the starter (3) to the positive pole of the battery (1).

Connect the positive cable of the battery (1) with the positive pole (30a) of the battery changeover relay (4).

Connect the negative cable of the battery (1) with the negative pole (31a) of the battery changeover relay (4).

Connect the negative cable from the starter (3) to the negative pole of the battery (2).

Connect the negative cable of the battery (2) with the negative pole (31) of the battery changeover relay (4).

Connect the positive cable of the battery (2) with the positive pole (30) of the battery changeover relay (4).

433

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 25.28 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Drehstromgenerator @ 0\mod_1197370865698_78.doc @ 19073

Pos: 25.29 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Arbeiten an der elektrischen Anlage @ 0\mod_1197370959323_78.doc @ 19111

Caution! - Working on the electrical system

Pos: 25.30 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Drehstromgenerator Big M 400 Bild @ 41\mod_1272363175811_78.doc @ 376450

Effect: Damages to the machine

• When working on the electrical system, remove the positive lines on the batteries.

Interrupt the electrical power circuit with the main battery switch.

The cable contacts of the positive cable are to be protected against inadvertent contact with the battery contacts.

BM 400 0144

Pos: 25.31 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Drehstromgenerator Text @ 0\mod_1197371243636_78.doc @ 19130

Fig.

Note

For further information please refer to the manufacturer’s operating instructions included with delivery (chapter "Fitting and Dismantling V-Ribs")

Have the three-phase generator checked once a year at a specialist workshop.

Pos: 25.32 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

434

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 25.33 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/Starter @ 0\mod_1197370892620_78.doc @ 19092

18.5 Starter

Pos: 25.34 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Arbeiten an der elektrischen Anlage @ 0\mod_1197370959323_78.doc @ 19111

Caution! - Working on the electrical system

Pos: 25.35 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Starter Bild Big M 400 @ 41\mod_1272371846936_78.doc @ 376839

Effect: Damages to the machine

• When working on the electrical system, remove the positive lines on the batteries.

Interrupt the electrical power circuit with the main battery switch.

The cable contacts of the positive cable are to be protected against inadvertent contact with the battery contacts.

Pos: 25.36 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Starter Text @ 0\mod_1197371466761_78.doc @ 19149

BM 400 0207

Fig. 369

Note

If the electrical power circuit is interrupted by the main battery switch, 12 V is still present on the starter.

If the starter fails or does not work properly, investigate the cause of the problem. If the suggestions listed below do not remove the damage, please seek the advice of your KRONE dealer. Have the starter checked thoroughly once a year at a specialist workshop.

Loose, soiled or corroded cable connections:

Clean the cable connections on the starter and tighten the connections.

Clean the earth cable on the engine and tighten the connection to the engine.

Battery performance too low:

• Check the electrolyte as well as acid density, and recharge the battery, if and when necessary.

Discharged battery:

• Charge the battery.

Use of a wrong engine oil viscosity:

• Always use the right engine oil according to the specification.

Starter safety relay is defective:

• Replace the relay.

Pos: 25.37 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

435

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 25.38 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Steuereinheiten und Sicherungen Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197374202386_78.doc @ 19231

18.6 Control units and fuses

A

4 1

2

Pos: 25.39 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BM 400 0208

5 3

Fig. 370

Note

Have work on the electronic system carried out by KRONE after-sales service or KRONE dealer only!

The control units listed below are located behind the cover (1) of the operating panel in the driver’s cab.

1.

CU control unit console

2.

ADM engine control

3.

SmartDrive (travelling gear)

4.

KMC1 Krone machine controller

5.

DIOM output module

Designations of fuses, relays and LEDs for the control units listed above are located on the console circuit board. The console circuit board is located behind the cover (A) of the operating panel in the driver’s cab. For an overview of the console circuit board, see the chapter entitled

"Console Circuit Board"

436

Pos: 25.40 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/MR2-Motorsteuerung @ 0\mod_1197374603480_78.doc @ 19250

18.6.1 MR2 engine control

1

Maintenance – electrical system

BM 400 0209

Fig. 371:

The MR2 engine control (1) is located at the front right on the engine in direction of travel. MR2 engine control (1). For more information, please refer to the operating instructions of the engine manufacturer. Designations of fuses, relays and LEDs for the MR2 engine control are located on the console circuit board.

The console circuit board is located behind the cover (1) of the operating panel in the driver’s cab. For an overview of the console circuit board, see the chapter entitled "Console Circuit

Pos: 25.41 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Kabinen-Relaisplatine BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197374727073_78.doc @ 19290

Board"

18.6.2 Cab relay PCB

1

Pos: 25.42 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BX500088

Fig. 372:

Designations of fuses, relays and LEDs for the cab are located on the cab relay circuit board.

The cab relay circuit board is located behind the cover (1) on the rear wall of the cab. For an overview of the console circuit board, see the chapter entitled "Cab Circuit Board"

437

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 25.43 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Sicherungen/Platine Konsole BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197376346526_78.doc @ 19395

18.6.3 Console Circuit Board

Pos: 25.44 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 373

438

Pos: 25.45 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Sicherungen/Platine Kabine BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197376540870_78.doc @ 19414

18.6.4 Cab Circuit Board

Maintenance – electrical system

Allroundlights F1 20A

Reserve

F2

7.5A

Seat compressor F3

Side windscreenwiper

F4

Front windscreenwiper

Washing water pump

F5

Travel direction indicator

Horn, headlamp flasher

Mirror adjustment

F6

F7

F8

15A

15A

15A

7.5A

5A

5A

F17 15A

Reserve

F20 7.5A

Dippedbeam right

F21 7.5A

Dippedbeam left

F22 7.5A

Full beam left

F23 7.5A

Full beam right

LD20

Dipped/highbeam

Switching up / down

LD38

Headlampflasher

F9 30A

LD39

Full beam

LD40

Dippedbeam

Cooler

F10 15A

Control unit -

Klimatronik

F11

Reserve F12

5A

5A

F13 5A

Air conditionercompressor

Radio/CB/GPS/GSM

Ignitionstage 1

F14 15A

LD34

Ignitionstage 2

F24 30A

Working floodlights cab roof middle

LD35

Radio, air conditioning

LD36

F25 30A

Windscreenwiper

Horn

Workingfloodlights cab roof left/rightoutside

LD37

Side windowwasher

ON

ON

F26 30A

Working floodlights rear

LD24A

Working floodlights cab roof middle

LD24B

Working floodlights

Cab roof

Middle

LD25A

Working floodlights cab roof left

LD25B

Working floodlights cab roof right

LD26A

Working floodlights reserve

F15 7.5A

Radio/CB/GPS/GSM

Continuousvoltage

Working floodlights rear

Working floodlights rear delay lights

S1

S2

1

1

Workingfloodlights

Reserve

Workingfloodlights for delay lights platform

S3 1

S4 1

LD26B

Working floodlights rear

Hazard warninglights F16 15A

Workingfloodlightsfor lamp carrier

Side delay lights S5 1

Workingfloodlightsfor platform,

Side lamp carrier

S6 1

ON

ON

ON

ON

F27 30A

Workingfloodlights platform, lamp carrier side

LD27A

Working floodlights platform

LD27B

Working floodlights side lamp carrier

F28 15A

Workingfloodlights front lamp carrier

F29 10A

Reversingsignal

Reversinglights

F30 10A

LD28

Working floodlights front lamp carrier

LD29

Reversingsignal

Reversinglights

LD30

Brake light

Brake light

FUSE

TEST

F31 7.5A

Side light/perimeterlight left

LD31

Lighting equipmentleft

LD18

F32 7.5A

Side light/perimeterlight right

F19 5A

Interior lighting, spotlight

BiG M 400 Cab Circuit Board

F33

Locatorlighting

F34

10A

7.5A

Controlvoltage dippedbeam, full beam

LD32

Lightingequipment right

LD33

Locatorlighting

LD41

Seat switch

F35

Controlvoltage for locatorlighting, side light/perimeterlight

LD42

Door switch

20 080 643 0

S7

Delaylights via ignitionstage 2

1 ON

S8 1 ON

Delay lights

External control

LD43

Delay lights

Control signal

Fig. 374

Pos: 25.46 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

439

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 25.47 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Sicherungen/Platine Krone-Maschinen-Contoller (KMC1) BM 400 @ 14\mod_1228745762224_78.doc @ 170867

18.6.5 Krone Machine Controller circuit board (KMC1)

Pos: 26 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 375

440

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 27.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Wartung - Zentralschmierung @ 0\mod_1197378235308_78.doc @ 19471

19 Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 27.2 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/BEKA MAX @ 51\mod_1288863746156_78.doc @ 497745

BEKA MAX

Pos: 27.3 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Betrieb der Maschine mit nicht zulässigen oder verunreinigten Schmierstoffen @ 51\mod_1288876736250_78.doc @ 497991

CAUTION!

The machine must not be operated with non-permitted or uncleaned lubricants.

Machine damage.

Check the surrounding area to ensure it is clean.

Use suitable and clean tools.

Use permitted lubricants.

Lubricants must be free of impurities.

Pos: 27.4 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/Übersicht @ 53\mod_1289900374656_78.doc @ 506510

19.1 Overview

Pos: 27.5 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Schmierplan Zentralschm. BM 420 Bild @ 53\mod_1289900223687_78.doc @ 506483

2

4

1

7

6

4

2

8 5 3

Fig.376

Pos: 27.6 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Schmierplan Zentralschm. BM 420 Tabelle @ 52\mod_1289811330796_78.doc @ 506078

List of distributors

1

2

3

4

5

7

Pos: 27.7 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Schmierstoffbefüllung @ 51\mod_1288863995000_78.doc @ 497771

Notes

Piston pump (CV/CRI)

Conditioner housing right/left (CV/CRI)

Portal (CV / CRI)

Outrigger arm (CV/CRI)

Main distributor (CV/CRI)

Front mowing unit (CV/CRI)

8

441

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

19.2 Lubricant filling

USA

1

2

ZTS 000 0001

Fig.377

Hydraulic-type lubricating nipple

The lubricant is filled through the hydraulic-type lubricating nipple (1) by means of a commercially available grease gun.

Pos: 27.8 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Abfüllkupplung @ 51\mod_1288867617671_78.doc @ 497827

2. Additional mounting connection

3

4

1

2

Pos: 27.9 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

BX110008

Fig.378

Remove the lubrication nipple (3) and replace by filler neck 995-000-705 (4)

The coupling box 995-001-500 (2) must be fitted to the filling pump (1).

442

Pos: 27.10 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Befüllzylinder @ 51\mod_1288868166031_78.doc @ 497854

Filling cylinder

M20x 1,5

3

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

2

1

Pos: 27.11 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/Vogel/Schmierstoff @ 0\mod_1197382302761_78.doc @ 19909

BX110009

Fig. 379

Remove the M20x1.5 closure screw (3) and replace by filler socket 940 392 0 (2)

For filling remove the protective cap on the socket (2) and the filling cylinder 940 393 0

(1)

19.4 Lubricant

To ensure continuous problem-free operation of the central lubrication system, we recommend using the following greases that we have tested. (Greases with sodium soap must not be used in either the on-road or off-road area because they are soluble in water.)

Note

To ensure the system works properly, be careful no impurities enter the system when refilling lubricant. Dirt will cause malfunctions in the central lubrication system and will damage or destroy parts an friction points.

Grease can be changed from conventional grease to bio-degradable greases (and vice-versa) for the products listed here without resulting disadvantage.

Standard commercial greases or greases recommended by the manufacturer of the vehicle or grease should be used as lubricants . Greases should still exhibit adequate suction and flowing behaviour at –25 °C (max. flow pressure 700 mb).

They must not have a tendency to bleed out, since this can result in blockages during extended operation.

MoS2 greases (up to 5 % molybdenum disulphide) can be distributed and pumped with VOGEL progressive pumps.

Pos: 27.12 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/Vogel/Verwenden von falschen Schmierstoffen @ 11\mod_1222685784023_78.doc @ 142396

Warning - Use of incorrect lubricants

Effect: Bearing damage to the machine

Use only the lubricants listed here. The central lubrication must never under any circumstances be filled with fluid grease.

Pos: 27.13 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

443

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 27.14 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/Vogel/Fettsorten @ 0\mod_1197382597474_78.doc @ 19894

19.4.1 Grease types, NLGIClass 2

Manufacturer Type designation

AGIP

ARAL

BP

Autol Top 2000

Long-term grease H

Energrease LS EP 9346

With soap

Minimum pumping

Spec. Ca –10

Li –25

Li –20

Li –25

CASTROL

ESSO

ELF

FINA

KROON OIL

MOBIL

Spheerol EP L2 Li

Exxon multi-purpose grease Li

ELF Multi 2 Li

EP multi-purpose grease Li

Lithep Grease

Mobilux EP 2

–20

–20

–20

–20

Li –25

Li –10

Li –15

MOGUL

ÖMV

OPTIMOL

SHELL

LV 1 EP

ÖMV Signum M283

Olit EP 2

Retinax EP L2

Li

Li

Li/Ca

Li

–20

–25

–25

–25

Li –20

Li –15

Li –20

Zeller & Gmelin Divinol multi-purpose grease 2 Li –20

Lubrication greases with fast bio-degradable times

ARAL BAB EP 2

AVIA Syntogrease

BECHEM UWS VE 42

Li/Ca –20

Li –25

Li/Ca –25

Li/Ca –20 DEA

FINA

Dolon E EP2

Biolical EP S2

Zeller & Gmelin Divinol E2

Li/Ca –25

Li –25

LUBRITECH Stabyl Eco EP2 Li/Ca –20

ÖMV ÖMV –25

Ca –20

Li –25

Pos: 27.15 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

444

Pos: 27.16 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Füllstandskontrolle @ 51\mod_1288868698906_78.doc @ 497881

19.5 Checking the fill level

USA

1 min

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

2

Pos: 27.17 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

ZTS 000 0002

Fig.380

Visual

The transparent lubricant tank (1) permits a visual inspection of the fill.

Note

As long as enough grease is available in the reservoir of the pump, the proximity switch that is installed in the reservoir transmits a signal to the control system. If the grease level drops below minimum (min), the proximity switch will turn off the signal.

If the grease level drops below the minimum:

• the control system will switch off the pump. the red LED (2) in the viewing window of the control system on the protective motor housing of the pump or a possibly installed red signal lamp lights up.

Add grease (see Lubricant filling ). Once a sufficient grease level has been established, the control system automatically starts to work again.

445

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 27.18 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Zeiten des Schmierintervalls ändern @ 51\mod_1288873207734_78.doc @ 497936

19.6 Changing the Times of the Lubricating Interval

The lubricating intervals of the system are preset ex works.

Default setting upon delivery:

Cycle time: 8 min

Clock pulses: 34 (lubrication duration/grease quantity)

Adjusting the amount of grease by the cycle time is not recommended.

To change the setting:

9

7

8

Pos: 27.19 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

ZTS 000 0003

Fig.381

• Use a flat screwdriver to remove the red frame (7) on the protective motor housing of the pump.

Unscrew the four cross-head screws and lift off the transparent protective cover.

Use a flat screwdriver to set the cycle time (8) or lubrication duration (9).

Reposition the transparent protective cover and secure it with the four cross-head screws.

Securely attach the red frame (7) again. •

CAUTION!

If the cover is not properly closed, water can penetrate the system, which then may be destroyed. In this case, the warranty will be void.

Changing the grease quantity via clock pulses:

The grease quantity can be adjusted by clock pulses (9) in the range from 33 clock pulses to 48 clock pulses in increments of 1 clock pulse (max. 16 clock pulses).

The change in the amount of grease is about 3% for each pulse

Increase grease quantity - increase number of clock pulses

Decrease grease quantity - decrease number of clock pulses

Example:

• If the number of clock pulses is reduced from 34 to 33, the consumption of lubricating grease is reduced by 3%.

• If the number of clock pulses is increased from 34 to 48, the consumption of lubricating grease is increased by 42%.

446

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 27.20 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Fehlersuche und Beseitigung @ 51\mod_1288879023093_78.doc @ 498017

19.7 Troubleshooting

Jam in the system or at a connected lubrication point.

Unscrew the outlet screw connections from the main distributor to the subdistributor one after the other. If lubricant suddenly exits under pressure when one of the outlet screw connections is loosened, the connected subdistributor is blocked. If lubricant does not exit from any of the outlet screw connections, the main distributor is blocked. Clean the main distributor or replace it.

Reinstall the outlet screw connections.

Loosen the outlet screw connections on the blocked subdistributor. If lubricant suddenly exits under pressure when unscrewing one of the outlet screw connections, the connected lubrication point is blocked. If lubricant does not exit from any of the outlet screw connections, the subdistributor is blocked. Clean the blocked subdistributor and replace it if required.

Remove the blockage at the lubrication point.

Pos: 27.21 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

447

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 27.22 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Signalanzeigen @ 51\mod_1288879531062_78.doc @ 498044

Signal displays

6

5

4

Pos: 28 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

448

ZTS 000 0004

Fig.382

Note

The red LED always displays a malfunction in the program sequence.

The function of the pump is displayed via two control LEDs (green (4)/red (5)) in the viewing window (6) on the protective motor housing of the pump. The red LED always displays a malfunction in the program sequence. red on off

Ready for operation: 1.5 sec green on off red on off off red on 1 sec off

1 sec. green on off red on Until the lubricant reservoir is re-filled red off green on off on 1 sec

1 sec. green on off red off on 0.5 sec off

0.5 sec. green on off

Display of functional readiness

Program run of a lubrication process

Cycle error on the progressive distributor

Error grease level

Grease level too low

Error pump motor speed

Error CPU / memory

Placing in Storage

Pos: 29.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/A-E/Einlagerung @ 0\mod_1197385459120_78.doc @ 19966

20

Pos: 29.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/Am Ende der Erntesaison @ 0\mod_1197385501276_78.doc @ 19985

Placing in Storage

20.1

Pos: 29.3 /BA/Einlagerung/Selbstfahrer/Einlagerung Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197385531370_78.doc @ 20004

At the End of the Harvest Season

Placing the machine in storage at the end of the harvest season is the best possible way to preserve the machine.

Note

Park the machine in a dry place protected from the elements where no commercial fertilisers are stored.

Support the machine on blocks so that the entire weight is not resting on the wheels.

Clean the machine thoroughly through the maintenance openings inside and out. Chaff and dirt attract moisture, which causes steel parts to begin rusting.

If a high pressure washing device is used for cleaning, do not point the water jet at the bearing or electrical system/electronic components.

Lubricate the machine according to the lubrication chart. Grease the threadings of setting screws and similar items; relieve springs.

Transport interlock ratchet mechanism for side mowers: grease the bolt.

Lubricate the plunger rods of all hydraulic cylinders liberally and insert as far as possible.

Moisten with oil all lever joints, cutter bars, and bearing points that cannot be lubricated.

Write down all repair jobs that must be performed by the next harvest and arrange for them to be done with sufficient lead time. Your KRONE dealer is better able to perform maintenance service and any required repairs outside of harvest season.

Pos: 29.4 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Motorbereich @ 0\mod_1197385875776_78.doc @ 20043

Pos: 29.5 /BA/Einlagerung/Selbstfahrer/Hinweis auf Motorhersteller @ 0\mod_1197385918276_78.doc @ 20062

Note

For further information, please refer to the engine manufacturer’s operating instructions included with delivery (chapter on cleaning and preservation)

Pos: 29.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

449

Placing in Storage

Pos: 29.7 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/Vor Beginn der neuen Saison @ 0\mod_1197386024448_78.doc @ 20081

20.3

Pos: 29.8 /BA/Einlagerung/Selbstfahrer/Text vor Beginn der Saison Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197386062214_78.doc @ 20100

Before the Start of the New Season

Before the start of the new harvest season, conduct a thorough inspection of the machine.

Keeping the machine in flawless condition will rule out the possibility of costly malfunctions during harvest time.

If this was not already done after the last harvest, the machine must be thoroughly cleaned inside and out.

Refit any belts and V-belts that were removed and check belt tensions.

Remove the covers from the engine openings.

Lubricate the machine completely according to the lubrication chart.

Check to make certain all bolts are tightened and all cotter pins are in place.

Check all seals and the filling quantity of the cooling system. Antifreeze and anticorrosion agent must remain in the cooling system even during summer months, since they protect the system against corrosion.

Check the batteries. Check the charge state and height of the battery acid. If necessary, charge the batteries.

Check the tyre pressures.

Retighten the four attachment bolts on the frame arms to a tightening torque of 640 Nm

(annually).

After these tasks are complete, let the machine run about one hour at half speed. Then check all bearings for overheating.

Pos: 29.9 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

450

Pos: 29.10 /BA/Einlagerung/Selbstfahrer/Reibkupplung BYPY entlüften @ 0\mod_1197387210183_78.doc @ 20228

20.4 Friction clutch –ByPy

Placing in Storage

20.4.1

Fig. 383:

Completely loosen the four hexagonal socket head screws (2). These screws are not entirely threaded. Therefore they cannot be screwed out of the coupling.

The coupling is now ready for use.

Venting the Friction Clutch on the PTO Shaft

Pos: 30 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165

Fig. 384

Tighten the hexagonal socket head screws (2) on the friction clutch at the beginning of the storage period. This will relieve the disc springs' pressure on the friction lining and prevent the tendency to adhere. The flange coupling is vented.

To place the machine in service again, follow the instructions in chapter "Friction Clutch".

451

Appendix

Pos: 31 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/A-E/Anhang @ 1\mod_1202278612285_78.doc @ 58360

21 Appendix

Pos: 32 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/Fehlermeldungen @ 13\mod_1226558727524_78.doc @ 166264

===== Ende der Stückliste =====

452

A  

Abrasion Limit ................................................... 376

Activating fast reversing.................................... 275

Actuating release switches ................................. 72

Adjustable Fan Nozzles ...................................... 94

Adjusting the Compensation Springs ............... 282

Adjusting the conditioner plate ......................... 287

Adjusting the cutting height ...................... 278, 280

Adjusting the Lifting Height ............................... 279

Adjusting the mowing units ............................... 277

Adjusting the roller conditioner (optional extra) 288

Adjusting the Sensors ....................................... 403

Adjusting the swath width ................................. 291

Adjusting the Tedder Speed ............................. 285

Adjusting the track control arm on the lateral mowing units ................................................. 293

Adjusting the Warning Panel ............................ 230

Affixing the Adhesive Safety and Information

Labels ............................................................. 15

After Shearing Off ............................................. 383

Air comfort seat ................................................... 45

Air filter .............................................................. 344

Air intake and distribution ................................. 396

Aligning the Cutter Bar ...................................... 364

Allround lights (optional) ..................................... 64

Angular gearbox ....................................... 359, 362

At the End of the Harvest Season .................... 443

Attaching the Front Mowing Unit ...................... 316

Attaching the Lateral Mowing Unit .................... 324

Autopilot .............................................................. 36

Autopilot release switch / - optional .................... 74

Axle separation key ............................................ 77

B  

Basic screen ....................................................... 99

Battery ........................................................ 38, 422

Before the Start of the New Season ................. 444

BEKA - MAX central lubrication ........................ 435

Beka Max .......................................................... 435

Belt drives ........................................................ 410

Blade Changing on Cutting Discs .................... 377

Blade Quick-Fit Device ............................ 373, 379

Blade screw connection ................................... 372

Blade Screw Connection ................................. 378

Brake light .......................................................... 59

Brakes .............................................................. 385

Bringing up a Menu Level ................................ 116

C  

Cab Circuit Board ............................................. 433

Cab relay PCB ................................................. 431

Cabin .................................................................. 42

Changing / cleaning the fresh air filter ............. 397

Changing a customer record (1) or creating a new one ............................................................... 109

Changing the Times of the Lubricating Interval 440

Charge Indicator Lamp ...................................... 78

Charging Batteries ........................................... 424

Check battery ................................................... 425

Check before Start-up ...................................... 231

Check lock ............................................... 236, 268

Checking and maintaining tyres ....................... 417

Checking refrigerant condition and level ......... 408

Checking the capacitor .................................... 409

Checking the Cutter Blades and Blade Holder 371

Checking the Lock on the Lateral Mowing Units

..................................................................... 265

Circulation filter ................................................ 398

Cleaning the Engine Compartment with

Compressed Air ........................................... 331

Collector/drier ................................................... 407

Commissioning ................................................ 226

Compressed-air reservoir ................................ 346

Compressed-air reservoir ................................ 346

Console Circuit Board ...................................... 432

Contact ............................................................... 15

Contamination in the engine compartment ...... 331

Control units and fuses .................................... 430

453

Converting the Tedder Deflector Plate to an

Auger-Type Cross Conveyor ........................ 295

Cooler ................................................................. 49

Cooling system ................................................... 38

Cross Conveyor Drive ....................................... 415

Cruise Control ................................................... 246

Cutter Blades .................................................... 371

D  

Daily checks ...................................................... 231

Dangers in Case of Non-compliance with the

Safety Instructions .......................................... 33

Deactivating the axle suspension ..................... 294

Deflector Plates ................................................ 293

Delete customer counter................................... 111

Description of Installation ................................. 228

Deviating Torque .............................................. 353

Diagnostics Socket / USB Connection ............... 81

Diesel engine error storage .............................. 215

Disable the shut-off valve on the front outrigger

...................................................................... 237

Drain valve ........................................................ 347

Drawer for first-aid kit/operating instructions ...... 48

Drive data information section (VI) ................... 103

Drive of mowing unit ......................................... 414

Driving and Transport ....................................... 233

Driving Forwards ............................................... 244

E  

Eliminating Blockages on the Cross Conveyor 355

Emergency exit ................................................... 38

Emergency Exit ................................................... 50

Empty the water separator ............................... 333

Engine area ...................................................... 443

Engine coolant .......................................... 342, 343

Engine Failure Pilot Lamp .................................. 78

Engine oil and filter replacement ...................... 332

Engine oil level .................................................. 332

Entering parameters ......................................... 119

Error Messages ........................................ 224, 446

F  

Fan wheel drive ................................................ 411

454

Fast Direction Change (Fast Reversing) ......... 275

Field mode basic screen .................................... 99

Filling Quantities and Lubrication Designations for

Gearboxes ................................................... 357

Fire preventions ................................................. 39

Fitting the batteries and connecting the poles correctly ....................................................... 427

Fitting the guard cloths .................................... 226

Folding All Mowing Units from Headland Position to Transport Position .................................... 266

Folding Down Lateral Mowing Units ................ 226

Folding Down the Mowing Units ...................... 255

Folding the Front Mowing Unit from Headland

Position to Transport Position ...................... 270

Folding the Lateral Mowing Units from Headland

Position to Transport Position ...................... 267

Folding Up the Guards ..................................... 234

Folding up the Mowing Units ........................... 264

Friction clutch ................................................... 445

Front mowing unit 22, 30, 278, 283, 291, 293, 310,

364

Fuel .................................................................. 338

Fuel filter/water separator ................................ 333

Full Beam ........................................................... 55

G  

Game animal protection ................................... 272

Gearbox for Top Roller Drive ........................... 363

General on Driving ........................................... 242

Grease types, NLGIClass 2 ............................. 438

Guide's seat ....................................................... 49

H  

Hand pump ...................................................... 335

Headlamp Flasher .............................................. 55

Horn ................................................................... 54

Hydraulic system .............................................. 386

I  

Identification Plate ................................................ 9

Identifying Symbols in the Operating Instructions

....................................................................... 32

Ignition lock ........................................................ 79

Implements ........................................................ 37

Indicator Switches ............................................... 54

Indicator, hazard warning flasher and brake light

........................................................................ 59

Info centre EasyTouch ........................................ 97

Information message ........................................ 225

Information Required for Questions and Orders 10

Information Section ............................................. 99

Information section of settings (IV and V) ......... 103

Information section of the travelling gear data (III)

...................................................................... 102

Input gearbox .................................................... 360

Inside mirror ........................................................ 68

Installation of Cutter Blades .............................. 230

Installing the auger-type cross conveyor .......... 299

Intended Use .............................................. 10, 253

Interior lighting .................................................... 65

Introduction ........................................................... 9

K  

Killing the engine .............................................. 241

-Klimatronik / heating .......................................... 86

Krone Machine Controller circuit board (KMC1)

...................................................................... 434

L  

Ladder to driver's cabin ...................................... 42

Lateral Mowing Unit ......... 284, 285, 292, 358, 367

Left Outside Mirror .............................................. 66

Lifting All Mowing Units from Working Position to

Headland Position ......................................... 266

Lifting the Front Mowing Unit from Working

Position to Headland Position ....................... 269

Lifting the Lateral Mowing Units from Working

Position to Headland Position ....................... 267

Lighting ............................................................... 58

Lowering All Mowing Units from Headland

Position to Working Position ......................... 256

Lowering All Mowing Units from Transport

Position to Headland Position ....................... 256

Lowering the Front Mowing Unit from Headland

Position to Working Position ......................... 258

Lowering the Front Mowing Unit from Transport

Position to Headland Position ....................... 258

Lowering the Lateral Mowing Units from Headland

Position to Working Position ......................... 257

Lowering the Lateral Mowing Units from Transport

Position to Headland Position ...................... 257

Lubricant .......................................................... 437

Lubricant filling ................................................. 436

Lubricating the PTO shaft ................................ 419

Lubrication Chart .............................................. 420

M  

Machine Data Counter ..................................... 132

Machine overview .............................................. 11

Main battery switch .................................... 40, 423

Main block ........................................................ 390

Main gearbox ................................................... 358

Main Menu 1 Settings ...................................... 117

Main Menu 2 Counters .................................... 132

Main Menu 3 Maintenance .............................. 134

Main Menu 4 Service ....................................... 141

Maintenance ...................................................... 40

Maintenance – Basic Machine ......................... 385

Maintenance – Central Lubrication .................. 435

Maintenance – compressed air system ........... 346

Maintenance – electrical system ...................... 421

Maintenance - Engine ...................................... 327

Maintenance – lubrication chart ....................... 419

Maintenance – Mowing Units ........................... 349

Maintenance Table – Engine ........................... 329

Maintenance Table – Mowing Units ................. 351

Manometric switch ........................................... 406

Measuring Acid Density ................................... 426

Menu 1-1 Parameters ...................................... 118

Menu 1-2 Machine setting ............................... 120

Menu 1-3 Units ................................................. 124

Menu 1-4 Language ......................................... 125

Menu 1-5 Display ............................................. 126

Menu 1-5-1 Contrast ........................................ 127

Menu 1-5-2 Beeper .......................................... 128

Menu 1-5-4 Direction of Rotation ..................... 130

Menu 1-6 Date/time ......................................... 131

Menu 3-1 .......................................................... 135

Menu 3-4 Manual mode ................................... 138

Menu 4-1 Diagnostics ...................................... 142

455

Menu 4-1-1 Diagnostics of axle suspension ..... 146

Menu 4-1-10 Diagnostics Work ........................ 179

Menu 4-1-11 CAN bus ...................................... 190

Menu 4-1-12 Travelling gear ............................ 191

Menu 4-1-13 Electronics ................................... 202

Menu 4-1-14 Diesel Engine .............................. 203

Menu 4-1-15 Joystick ........................................ 206

Menu 4-1-16 Control unit console .................... 208

Menu 4-1-17 Display ......................................... 211

Menu 4-1-3 Diagnostics of spring compensation

...................................................................... 149

Menu 4-1-4 Diagnostics of cutting height ......... 155

Menu 4-1-5 Diagnostics of hydraulic auger hood

...................................................................... 163

Menu 4-1-6 Sideshift diagnostics ..................... 169

Menu 4-1-7 Diagnostics front guard flaps......... 174

Menu 4-2 Error list ............................................ 212

Menu 4-3 Service level ..................................... 217

Menu 4-4 Information ........................................ 218

Menu 4-4-1 Joystick .......................................... 219

Menu 4-4-2 Software ........................................ 220

Menu 4-4-3 Machine ......................................... 222

Menu 5 Basic Screen ........................................ 223

Menu Level / Short overview ............................ 115

Motor Data (II) Information Section .................. 101

Moving the Front Mowing Unit to Central Position.

...................................................................... 235

Moving the guards into the working position .... 274

Mowing ............................................................. 271

Mowing Unit Drive ............................................. 259

Mowing with Individual Mowing Units ............... 274

MR2 engine control ........................................... 431

Multi-Function Lever ........................................... 82

Multi-Function Lever Driving ............................... 85

N  

Namur sensor ................................................... 403

O  

Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals

(Gearboxes) .................................................. 357

Oil level check and oil change on the cutter bar

.............................................................. 364, 367

456

Opening the cabin door ..................................... 43

Opening the Front Guard ................................. 354

Operation – Mowing Units ............................... 253

Operation of Mowing Units .............................. 254

Operators controls ............................................. 44

Outrigger arms ................................................. 412

Outside mirrors .................................................. 66

Over-pressure valves ....................................... 391

Overview of motor ............................................ 327

P  

Panel Switches and Pilot Lamps ....................... 71

Parking Brake .................................................. 250

Periodical Inspection of the Cutting Discs / Blade

Drums .......................................................... 375

Periodical Inspection of the Leaf Springs ........ 374

Personnel Qualification and Training ................. 33

Pilot Lamp for Cooling Water ............................. 78

Placing in Storage ............................................ 443

Position of sensors........................................... 402

Position of Sensors .......................................... 400

Position of the Adhesive Safety Stickers on the

Machine ......................................................... 16

Position of the General Information Labels on the

Machine ......................................................... 24

Precondition for mowing .................................. 272

Pumps .............................................................. 389

Q  

Quick access Customer Data Counter ............ 108

Quick access Hydraulic axle suspension......... 112

Quick access Hydraulically adjustable cutting height (optional) ........................................... 104

Quick access Hydraulically adjustable lateral spring compensation (ground pressure)

(optional) ...................................................... 106

Quick Access Keys in the Basic Screen .......... 104

Quick access Machine settings ....................... 114

Quick charge .................................................... 424

Quick Stop ....................................................... 275

R  

Radio .................................................................. 95

Refrigerant ....................................................... 406

Refrigerant data sheet R 134a (excerpt) .......... 405

Release switch - holding brake ........................... 75

Release switch – road/field ......................... 73, 237

Release switch travelling gear .................... 76, 238

Releasing the holding brake manually .............. 252

Removing Mowing Units ................................... 310

Removing of the compensation springs ........... 311

Removing the Side Mowing Unit ...................... 317

Removing the tedder deflector plate ................. 296

Removing the Weiste Triangle ......................... 314

Re-Ordering the Adhesive Safety and Information

Labels ............................................................. 15

Repairing the Sheared Off Bearing Unit ........... 384

Replacing the fuel filter ..................................... 333

Replacing the fuel filter insert ........................... 334

Replacing the hydraulic oil filter ........................ 394

Replacing the linings ......................................... 380

Replacing Urea Filter Inserts ............................ 336

Retightening the Attachment Bolts on the

Outrigger ....................................................... 418

Reversing .......................................................... 245

Right outside mirror and anti-collision mirror ...... 67

Roof Panel Switch Group ................................... 57

S  

Safety .................................................................. 14

Safety cartridge ................................................. 345

Safety-conscious work practices ........................ 33

Self-propelled working machine ......................... 35

Setting of the Scraper on the Cross Conveyor

(Optional) ...................................................... 290

Setting the Acceleration Behaviour .................. 242

Setting the anti-collision mirror ........................... 67

Setting the right outside mirror ........................... 67

Shear pins ......................................................... 356

Side light/dipped beam ....................................... 60

Spare Parts ....................................................... 350

Special Equipment – Mowing Units .................. 295

Speed gearbox ................................................. 361

Spotlight .............................................................. 65

Starter ............................................................... 429

Starting the engine ............................................ 239

Starting to Drive ............................................... 241

Starting with an Auxiliary Battery ..................... 241

Start-up ............................................................ 231

Status line (I) .................................................... 100

Steering Column Adjustment ............................. 53

Steering Column and Foot Pedals ..................... 52

Stopping ........................................................... 248

Stopping with Foot Brakes ............................... 249

Sun blind ............................................................ 68

Switch off the engine........................................ 251

Switch off the machine ..................................... 251

Switch panel ....................................................... 70

Switching All Mowing Unit Drives On/Off ......... 263

Switching Axle Separation On and Off ............ 276

Switching on the dipped beam ........................... 60

Switching on the hazard warning flasher ........... 59

Switching on the indicator .................................. 59

Switching on the parking light ............................ 60

Switching the counter on or off ........................ 110

Switching the Front Mowing Unit Drive On/Off 262

Switching the Left Mowing Unit Drive On/Off .. 260

Switching the Mowing Unit Drives On and Off . 260

Switching the Right Mowing Unit Drive On/Off 261

System Description Operating and Brake

Hydraulics .................................................... 389

T  

Tanks ............................................................... 339

Tanks of urea solution ..................................... 340

Technical data ............................................ 12, 405

Technical data / CRI mowing unit ...................... 13

Technical data / CV mowing unit ....................... 13

Technical Data / Vehicle .................................... 12

Telephone and radio sets .................................. 40

Tensioning belts ............................................... 347

Tensioning the V-belts ..................................... 300

Test run ............................................................ 350

Three-phase generator .................................... 428

Tightening Torques .......................................... 352

Tightening Torques (Countersunk Screws) ..... 353

Tool box ........................................................... 352

457

Towing .............................................................. 252

Transfer gearbox .............................................. 395

Transport / Road Travel .................................... 233

Troubleshooting ................................................ 441

Tyres ........................................................... 38, 416

U  

Using the operating brake .................................. 56

V  

Venting the fuel system .................................... 342

W  

Washer system ................................................... 69

Wheel chocks ..................................................... 40

Wheel mounting ............................................... 418

Windscreen washer system ............................. 399

Windshield wipers .............................................. 69

Working floodlight Bottom front .......................... 63

Working floodlight rear ....................................... 63

Working floodlights ............................................. 61

Working floodlights ............................................. 62

Working floodlights Cab ..................................... 62

Working in the vicinity of power transmission lines

....................................................................... 39

458

.

. . konsequent, kompetent

Maschinenfabrik

Bernard Krone GmbH

Heinrich-Krone-Straße 10, D-48480 Spelle

Postfach 11 63, D-48478 Spelle

Phone +49 (0) 59 77/935-0

Fax +49 (0) 59 77/935-339

Internet: http://www.krone.de

eMail: [email protected]

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

advertisement

Table of contents